JP7118128B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the special game is finished is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, and whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is a high probability is kept secret, and is determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played is completed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not the probability is high in the specific game state perform a high-probability suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state.

JP 2009-240529 A

However, if an effect with a low degree of expectation is performed, there is a risk that the interest will decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and an object of the present invention is to suppress the deterioration of interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and holding means (for example, , a main CPU 101), and is controllable to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a specific result. A game state control means capable of controlling an advantageous game state (for example, a high probability game state and a state with an electric sapo ) that is advantageous to the player compared to the game state and different from the special game state; Effect display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 16) in which the display effect is performed, and a suggestive effect (e.g., subtraction effect ), and holding image display control means capable of displaying a normal holding image as an image indicating that the starting memory is stored in the holding means (for example, the sub CPU 201), and scenario determining means capable of determining in advance the scenario of the suggestive effect before it is controlled to the advantageous game state (for example, a high-probability game state and a state with an electric sapo ). (for example, a sub CPU 201 that performs scenario presetting processing), and the game state control means controls a plurality of advantageous game states with different periods of control to the advantageous game state (for example, a plurality of different power support times). A high probability game state and a state with an electric sapo ) can be controlled to any advantageous game state, and the effect execution means is controlled in advance to the advantageous game state by the scenario determination means. The suggestive effect (for example, the subtraction effect) can be executed based on the determined scenario, and when the advantageous game state is controlled, the advantageous game state ends. It is possible to perform a variable display effect by the effect display means, and when a plurality of starting memories are stored by the holding means, the suggestive effect (for example, the subtraction effect) is displayed as the above The holding image display control means is configured to be capable of being performed over a variable display effect performed for one start memory out of a plurality of start memories and a variable display effect performed for the next start memory of the one start memory. , the normal pending image is displayed at least when the effect mode of the suggestive effect is displayed It is characterized in that it is configured to be controllable so that it will not be

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to suppress the decline of interest.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an example which shows the front exploded perspective view which looked at the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from the diagonal upper right. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit containing a 1st and 2nd special design display part. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit random number determination table memorize|stored in main ROM102 of the main control circuit 100. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table stored in a main ROM 102 of a main control circuit 100; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot kind determination table memorize|stored in main ROM102 of the main control circuit 100. FIG. When the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open, it is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side area. , is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a state in which the game ball flows down the right side area when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed. When the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open, it is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the left side area. FIG. 11 is an example of a front view of a back unit 176; FIG. It is an example of the back view of the back unit 176. FIG. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the back diagonally upper left. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the back unit 176 from the back diagonally upper left. It is an example of the back perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 diagonally from the upper right. FIG. 11 is an example of a front view of the attacker unit 500. FIG. FIG. 10 is an example of a side view of the attacker unit 500. FIG. FIG. 4 is an example of a plan view of an attacker unit 500; It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 from the front diagonally upper right. FIG. 11 is an example of a front view showing a base member of the attacker unit 500. FIG. It is an example of the back view which shows the front side board part 520 of the attacker unit 500. FIG. 5 is an example of a front cross-sectional view of an attacker unit 500. FIG. It is an example of the exploded cross-sectional perspective view which looked at the attacker unit 500 from the front diagonally upper right. (a) An example of a plan view showing a large winning opening solenoid 620, (b) an example of a plan view showing a link arm 630, and (c) an example of a plan view showing a shutter 610. FIG. (a) An example of a plan view showing the attacker unit 500 when the shutter 610 is at the second position, (b) Similarly, an example of a plan view showing the special electric accessory 600. FIG. (a) An example of a plan view showing the attacker unit 500 when the shutter 610 is at the first position, (b) Similarly, an example of a plan view showing the special electric accessory 600. FIG. It is an example of a plan view showing a special electric accessory 6000 according to the second embodiment. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd embodiment from the front diagonally upper right. (a) An example of a plan view showing the housing portion 6001, (b) an example of a perspective view of the housing portion 6001 viewed diagonally from the upper right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the housing portion 6001 viewed from the upper right. is. (a) An example of a plan view showing the large winning opening solenoid 6003, (b) An example of a perspective view of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 viewed diagonally from the front right, (c) The large winning opening solenoid 6003 viewed diagonally from the upper right 1 is an example of a back perspective view. FIG. (a) An example of a plan view showing a link arm 6004, (b) An example of a rear perspective view showing the link arm 6004 from an oblique upper right direction. (a) An example of a plan view showing the regulating member 6005, (b) an example of a perspective view of the regulating member 6005 as seen from the upper right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the regulating member 6005 as seen from the upper right. be. FIG. 11 is a front perspective view showing the assembly structure of the special electric accessory 6000 without the accommodating portion 6001. FIG. It is an example of a front perspective view showing an assembly configuration of the big winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005. FIG. It is an example of a rear perspective view showing an assembly configuration of a big winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004 and a regulating member 6005. FIG. (a) An example of a plan view showing an assembly configuration of a big winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004 and a regulating member 6005, (b) an example of a view omitting the illustration of the link arm 6004 of (a). (a) An example of a plan view showing the assembly structure of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 in the closed state, (b) A diagram in which the illustration of the link arm 6004 in (a) is omitted. An example. (a) A plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission portion 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 starts to move from the state illustrated in FIG. An example, (b) is an example of the figure which abbreviate|omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of (a). (a) A plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission portion 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state shown in FIG. An example, (b) is an example of the figure which abbreviate|omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of (a). (a) A plan view showing the assembly structure of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission portion 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state illustrated in FIG. An example, (b) is an example of the figure which abbreviate|omitted illustration of the link arm 6004 of (a). FIG. 8A is an example of a schematic plan view showing a locked state by a regulating member 6005, and FIG. 7B is an example of a schematic plan view showing a state in which the locking state is released by the regulating member 6005. FIG. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the normal electric accessory unit 400 from the front diagonally upper right. This is an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as seen obliquely from the upper left rear. It is a figure which shows the normal electric accessories 460, the 2nd starting port switch 441, and the accommodating member 443. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. FIG. It is an example of the back view which looked at the normal electric accessory 460 from the upper right diagonally. A mode of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (illustrated by a dashed line), and an ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in a state of transition from the closed state to the open state. 1 is an example of a rear view showing a mode (indicated by a solid line). The aspect of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in transition (illustrated by the dashed line), and the aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the open state (illustrated by the solid line). It is a rear view showing the. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, (A) a diagram for explaining that the blade member 4620 is blocked from opening, (B) FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining that the blade member 4620 is allowed to open; It is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). It is an example of a back view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper front accessory 1000 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper front accessory 1000 from the back diagonally upper left. FIG. 10 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position; FIG. 10 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decoration 1040 is moving downward. FIG. 10 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decoration 1040 moves downward to the operation limit position. It is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). It is an example of a back view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the upper back side accessory 1100 from the front right diagonally above. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper back side accessory 1100 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper back side accessory 1100 from the back diagonally upper left. 83(A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 82, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the X portion shown in (A). 83(A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 82, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the Y portion shown in (A). Fig. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in a normal mode (mode at the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a back view. After the upper back accessory 1100 starts to operate, it is a diagram showing an example of the state before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. FIG. 11A is a front view, and FIG. 11B is a rear view showing an example of a mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach their limit positions. After the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 move the movable decorative body 1110 to the paper surface. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a mode when the covering decorative body 1120 is operated downward (when the covering decorative body 1120 starts to operate with respect to the movable decorative body 1110), (A) is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. is. 11A is a front view, and FIG. 1B is a rear view, showing an example of a mode in which the covering decoration 1120 has moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decoration 1110. FIG. It is an example of a front view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). It is an example of a back view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed obliquely from the upper left. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower accessory 1200 from the back diagonally upper left. FIG. 12A is a front view showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it is at the origin position, and FIG. 12B is a rear view. , and are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operated to the intermediate position, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 in the case of operating to the operation limit, (A) is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. It is an example of the back view of the upper corner article 1320. FIG. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper corner accessory 1320 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper corner accessory 1320 from the back diagonally upper left. There is an example of a back view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position. FIG. 13B is an example of a rear view showing a state in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin position. 108 is an example of a rear view showing a state in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further operated from the position shown in FIG. 107; FIG. It is an example of a back view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit positions. FIG. 13 is a front view of a lower corner accessory 1350; It is an example of the back view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower corner accessory 1350 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower corner accessory 1350 from the back diagonally upper left. It is an example of a back view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position. It is an example of a back view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start to operate from the origin position. It is an example of a back view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit positions. FIG. 13 is an example of a front view of the rear unit 176 showing a mode when all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to their operation limit positions. The front view of the rear unit 176 showing the mode when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position. An example. The front view of the back unit 176 showing the mode when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. An example. It is an example of a front view of a side accessory 1400 in a normal mode. It is an example of a back view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode. It is an example of the front view of the exploded perspective view which looked at the side accessory 1400 diagonally from the upper right front. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the side accessory 1400 from the back diagonally upper left. FIG. 14 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16; FIG. 14 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16; FIG. 14 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16; FIG. 14 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16; FIG. 10 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16; . It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the 2nd inside panel 1550 from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the second middle panel 1550 from the back diagonally upper left. (A) An example of a front view of a second middle panel 1550, (B) an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line CC shown in (A). 4 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101; 4 is a flow chart showing an example of a start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of variation pattern determination processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of main control main processing by the main CPU 101; It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design control processing by main CPU101. It is a flow chart showing an example of a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU101. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol display time management processing by main CPU 101. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time saving number of times subtraction processing by main CPU101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by main CPU101. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101; It is a flow chart which shows an example of design control processing normally by main CPU101. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing by a sub CPU 201; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing by a sub CPU 201; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of command transmission processing by a sub CPU 201; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of message setting processing by a sub CPU 201; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of direct table registration processing by a sub CPU 201; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of message transmission processing by a sub CPU 201; It is a block diagram showing an example of state transition of a plurality of game state stages. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the secrecy A stage 2002; 4 is a flowchart showing an example of scenario presetting processing by a sub CPU 201; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between a battle attribute 2100 and an effect map 2102; It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation map used for scenario lottery. It is an example showing, together with the time sequence, provisional change settings for each of the first to fourth holds. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production|presentation determination processing (secret A stage) repeatedly performed for every predetermined time as a subroutine of production|presentation mode determination processing. It is an example of a fluctuation pattern table. 141 is a flow chart showing an example of effect determination processing (secret A stage) continuing from FIG. 140; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of starting memories held in first to fourth reserves; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of starting memories held in first to fourth reserves; 143 is a flow chart showing an example of effect determination processing (secret A stage) continued from FIG. 142; It is a figure which shows the aspect which blocks three provisional fluctuations. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of effect determination processing (secret A stage) continued from FIG. 146; FIG. This is an example of a temporary change sequence in a state where the first to third reservations are subject to the scenario lottery. This is an example of a temporary change sequence in a state where the first to fourth reservations are subject to the scenario lottery. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing an example of a modified example when it is determined in step S326 that there is a scenario effect being executed; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of look-ahead effect selection processing (high probability stage). It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern at the time of determining the area which performs look-ahead production. It is a figure which shows an example which selects the detail of the prefetch effect|presentation. It is a diagram showing an example when the details of the look-ahead effect is a countdown effect. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of background change control processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of background change consecutive possible number of times determination processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is an example of a table relating to background change control and background change scenarios; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a specific example for explaining the flow of background change control processing according to the embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing an example of change scenario determination processing; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance up control process. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a pending change determination process; FIG. 4 is a sequence chart showing lighting control of a character lamp; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of control processing for character lamp effects; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of full-screen effect control; FIG. It is a screen figure showing an example of a screen display.

[Game machine configuration]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 6. FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, viewed obliquely from the upper right front. FIG. 6 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display portions. Also, the directions shown in the drawings are the directions when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, "left" is written in the right direction of the drawing because the drawing is a rear view, so "right" on the drawing becomes "left" when viewed from the front. Similarly, even when "right" is written in the left direction of the drawing, "left" on the drawing becomes "right" when viewed from the front for the same reason.

It should be noted that, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the front side is defined as the front side, and the back side is defined as the rear side. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side, and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, thereby defining the left-right direction. Furthermore, the front side is the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back side is the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board unit 17, a payout unit 18, and a substrate unit 19 .

The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11 . The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the dispensing unit 18 and the board unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the plate unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the game board unit 17 on the front side. support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. An opening 22 is provided in the glass door 13 . A transparent protective glass 23 is provided in the opening 22 of the glass door 13 . The protective glass 23 is arranged to face a game board unit 17 (to be described later) in the front-rear direction when the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12 . A speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are arranged above the glass door 13 . The speaker 24 performs, for example, voice notification, presentation, error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is for, for example, notifying with light or performing effects.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The tray unit 14 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13 .

The upper tray 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 26 are shot from the shooting device 15 toward the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and a performance button 62. - 特許庁A game ball to be rented or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball is paid out from a payout port 61 to an upper tray 26.例文帳に追加The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

The lower tray 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 26. - 特許庁A payout port 63 is provided in the lower tray 27 . The game balls overflowing from the upper tray 26 are put out to the lower tray 27 from the payout port 63. - 特許庁

The shooting device 15 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 26 toward the game area 20 . The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 12 and the lower right portion of the pan unit 14 . The firing device 15 comprises a panel body 31 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 32 .

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15 . The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31 . The driving device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 31 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid. Thus, in the shooting device 15, when the shooting handle 32 is operated by the player, game balls are shot by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of hit determination and various effect images related to the game. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an identification pattern (decorative pattern) for effect, an effect image according to the result of the big hit determination, an effect image during the big win, and a demonstration effect image. , the number of suspensions of variable display of the identification pattern, and the like are included. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially in the center of the game board unit 17 (inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

In the present embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided for displaying the above various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided and effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. You may make it display.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 23 . A game area 20 is formed on the front side surface of the game board unit 17, in which the launched game ball can roll and flow.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board unit 17 is arranged substantially in the center of the transparent panel 172 forming the game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll down and the game area 20. A center unit 174, an ordinary electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174 , the normal electric accessory unit 400 , the attacker unit 500 and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172 . The back unit 176 is provided behind the transparent panel 172 .

An opening 1722 is formed in the transparent panel 172 at a portion where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, which will be described later, is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172 and a game nail or the like is planted thereon. A game ball shot from a shooting device 15 jumps out from a guide rail 26 toward a game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, and flows downward in the game area 20 while changing its traveling direction.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 26 . The inner rail 26b is for guiding the shot game ball to the upper part of the game area 20 together with the outer rail 26a. The inner rail 26b is arranged on the left side of the transparent panel 172 inside the outer rail 26a.

The center unit 174 has a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the downflow area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right of the center rail 1742 concerned.

The game balls fired by the shooting device 15 are divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20. The game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted on the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). When it collides with a game nail or the like provided, it flows downward while changing its traveling direction. The shot game balls are distributed to the flow-down areas according to the amount of operation of the shooting handle 52.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 52 is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area of the center rail 1742 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 52 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area of the center rail 1742 . The hitting method in which the game ball flows down to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hitting", and the hitting method in which the game ball flows down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hitting". It is possible for the player to distinguish between them.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 5442, the big winning port 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49 .

The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a winning game state (big winning game state or small winning game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 540 , the count switch 541 detects the game ball that has won the prize. When game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 47 to the upper tray 42 (or from the payout port 48 to the lower tray 44).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move back and forth, and a winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610 . The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the big winning opening 540 . The special electric accessory 600 has an open state that enables (or facilitates) entry of game balls into the large winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid 620, and It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is based on the result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 described later. It is performed when it is shifted to a game state or a small hit game state). In addition, the result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 described later is the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. is indicated by the stop display mode of

The first start port 5442 gives an opportunity for hitting determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of the hitting determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73 described later. It gives A first starting port switch 5472 is arranged in the first starting port 5442 (see FIG. 7). When the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472. - 特許庁When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, a hit determination is performed inside the pachinko game machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 7), and a preset number of game balls are released from the payout port 61. It is dispensed (discharged) to the upper tray 26 or to the lower tray 27 from the dispensing port 63 . In addition, winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is performed by hitting to the left.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially in the lower left part of the game area 20 . The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in front view, and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in front view. Conventionally, most of the electric accessory units 400 are arranged below the first starting port 5442, for example. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a larger liquid crystal display device 16, making it difficult to arrange it below the first starting port 5442. FIG. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal electric accessary product unit 400 is arranged substantially in the lower left part of the game area 20 .

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for winning (passing) of the game ball as a condition for a hit determination, and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display unit 74 to be described later. It gives A second starting port switch 441 is arranged in the second starting port 440 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball enters the second starting port 440 , the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 . When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, a hit determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. to the upper tray or from the outlet 63 to the lower tray 27 (discharged). The winning difficulty of the second starting port 440 is determined by the normal electric accessory 460 . In principle, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by hitting to the right.

Although the details will be described later, the normal electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 that can rotate to the right, a starter solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIGS. 49 and 50), and the power of the starter solenoid 4630. A power transmission mechanism 4640 (see, for example, FIGS. 49 and 50) is provided. The normal electric accessory 460 can be shifted (driven) between an open state in which the passage of game balls is easy and a closed state in which it is difficult to pass the game balls, by driving the vane member 4620 by the starting solenoid 4630. configured to When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball enters the second start port 440 or is discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 from the out port 450. be done. The opening/closing drive by the normal electric accessory 460 (wing member 4620) is performed only for a predetermined period and times when the normal pattern in the normal pattern display section 71 is in a specific stop display mode.

The passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is arranged on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500 . The pass gate 49 is provided with a pass gate switch 49a (see FIG. 7). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). It should be noted that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 is performed by hitting to the right.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 5442, the big winning port 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially in the lower right portion of the game area 20 . The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged in the substantially lower right part of the game area 20 is that the liquid crystal display device 16 has been required to be larger in recent years, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such a large-sized liquid crystal display device 16.

The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a winning game state (big winning game state or small winning game state) which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 540 , the count switch 541 detects the game ball that has won the prize. When game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move back and forth, and a winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610 . The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the big winning opening 540 . The special electric accessory 600 has an open state that enables (or facilitates) entry of game balls into the large winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid 620, and It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is such that the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74, and the winning game state (jackpot game state or It is performed when it is shifted to a small hit game state).

The general winning openings 53 , 54 , 55 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board unit 17 , and the general winning opening 56 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 17 . In addition, general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a are arranged in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 (see FIG. 7). When game balls enter the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27). (expelled).

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls of the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440 is 3, the number of prize balls of the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, 56 is 10, and the number of winning balls of the big winning port 540 The number of prize balls is set to 15 respectively. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is arranged at the central lowermost part of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flowing direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flowed into when the launched game ball does not win any starting port or winning port.

The LED unit 70 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 41 . The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display parts are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display portions, a normal symbol display portion 71, a normal symbol reservation display portion 72, a first special symbol display portion 73, a second special symbol display portion 74, a first special A design pending display portion 75 and a second special symbol pending display portion 76 are provided.

The normal symbol display section 71 displays the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 460 is driven to be in the open state according to the result of determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display portion 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start variable display in which lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated when a predetermined variable display start condition is satisfied. A combination (display pattern) by turning on/off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 71a and 71b (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in an open state, the normal electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second start port The winning difficulty of the game ball to 440 is changed.

The normal symbol suspension display section 72 displays the number of execution times of suspended normal symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "suspension number of normal symbol variation display"). The normal symbol reservation display unit 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol suspension display unit 72 displays the number of suspension times of normal symbol variation display by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended twice, the display LED 72a lights up and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 display the result of determination (hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which transition or maintenance of the game state is determined according to the result of determination (hit determination).

The first special symbol display portion 73 has a display LED group 73a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 5442 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. In the display LED group 73a, when a predetermined condition for starting variable display is established, the eight LEDs start variable display in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) of lighting and extinguishing of eight LEDs is displayed as a special pattern. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state is such that the game ball can enter the big winning hole 540. Become. In addition, in the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display portion 74 has a display LED group 74a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. In the display LED group 74a, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, the eight LEDs start variable display in which the lighting and extinguishing are repeated. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) of lighting and extinguishing of eight LEDs is displayed as a special pattern. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state is such that the game ball can enter the big winning hole 540. Become. In addition, in the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display section 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

Thus, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the normal The transition from the game state (normal game state) to the winning game state which is advantageous to the player is determined. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big win, the game state is shifted to a big win game state as a win game state. Also, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the game state is shifted to a small hit game state as a hit game state. Thus, in this embodiment, two types of winning game states are provided as the game state to be shifted from the normal game state.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 75 and the second special symbol reserved display unit 76 display the number of executions of variable display of the reserved special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "number of times of suspension of variable display of special symbols"). to display. The first special symbol reservation display unit 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol reservation display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol suspension display portion 75 and the second special symbol suspension display portion 76 display the number of suspension times of special symbol variation display by turning on/off the display LEDs 75a/75b and 76a/76b. The display modes of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 75a, 75b and 76a, 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a, 72b of the reserved display portion 72 for normal symbols.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back unit 176 is for decorating the game board unit 17. The upper front accessory 1000 is arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the upper front accessory 1000 is arranged behind the upper front accessory 1000. An upper back character 1100 arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 19), a lower character 1200 arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and a liquid crystal display. A corner accessory 1300 (see, for example, FIG. 19) arranged so that a movable body, which will be described later, is positioned at four corners of the display area of the device 16, and a corner accessory 1300 arranged on the right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is provided with a side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, an attack ball gutter 1600, a main board case 1700, and a rear box 1800 that accommodates the above accessories and is unitized by attaching the main board case 1700. - 特許庁The details of each role product 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400 provided in the back unit 176 will be described later.

Below, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of the internal processing by the main CPU 101 when the game ball wins the first starting hole 5442 or the second starting hole 440 will be described.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first special symbol display unit 73 is started. Storage is suspended (variation display of the first special symbol is started). The suspension of the starting memory for the first special symbol is performed when both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. Canceled on the condition that there is no That is, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the suspension of the start memory is canceled after the special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed. Then, when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 while neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suspension of the starting memory is immediately released. When the suspension of the starting memory is released, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display section 73 is started.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the variation display of the second special symbol based on the game ball to the second starting port 440 is started. Storage is suspended (variation display of the second special symbol is suspended). The suspension of the starting memory for the second special symbol is performed when both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. Canceled on the condition that there is no That is, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the suspension of the start memory is canceled after the special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed. Then, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 while neither the first special pattern nor the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the suspension of the starting memory is immediately released. When the suspension of the starting memory is released, the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display section 74 is started.

In addition, in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change simultaneously. That is, while the special symbols are variably displayed in one of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbols are not variably displayed in the other display portion. . In this embodiment, when both the starting memory for the first special symbol and the starting memory for the second special symbol are suspended, regardless of which starting memory is suspended first, the second special symbol Priority is given to the cancellation of the hold about the start memory of, and the second special symbol display unit 73 performs the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set to 4 times. Therefore, the maximum number of suspensions of variable display of special symbols is 8 times, which is the sum of the number of suspensions of variable display of special symbols due to the winning of the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440 .

Also, while the first or second special symbols are changing in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, except for specific cases, the identification symbols consisting of numbers on the liquid crystal display device 16 fluctuate. Is displayed. In this embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. Further, as for the identification symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first or second special symbol being variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 is stopped and displayed. Is displayed. The identification pattern is also used as identification information for presentation.

In addition, when the first or second special symbols stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 are in a specific stop display mode, the player is informed of the winning. An effect image to cause is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. - 特許庁In this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Further, the specific stop display mode when the first or second special symbol is stop-displayed is set corresponding to the type of win. In such a configuration, the combination of identification symbols stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbols. form. Thereby, the player can recognize the type of winning in addition to the winning. It should be noted that some of the types of hits are displayed in a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize them, depending on the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbols. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the winning and the type of winning.

[Electrical Configuration of Game Machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko game machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 for controlling the game, and a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling the performance according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (readable/writable memory), and the like.

The main CPU 101 is connected with a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 102 .

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 101 . In this embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information of the special symbol game is stored as starting memory. Specifically, the main RAM 103 has a first special symbol start memory area (0) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, and the upper limit of four first special symbol games. A first special symbol start memory area (1) to a first special symbol start memory area (4) are provided in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to a special symbol is stored as a start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start memory area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol being changed is stored as the start memory, and the upper limit four times of the second special game. A second special symbol start memory area (1) to a second special symbol start memory area (4) are provided in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as start memory.

The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when power is turned on, an I/O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101 . The I/O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. A command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub-control circuit 200 . The backup capacitor 107 retains various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, rapidly supplying power to the main RAM 103 when power is cut off.

Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100 .

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display portion 71, a normal symbol pending display portion 72, a first special symbol display portion 73, a second special symbol display portion 74, a first special symbol pending display portion 75, A second special symbol holding display portion 76, a starting solenoid 4630 for driving the vane member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460, and a large winning solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610 are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. The main control circuit 100 also includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function to call a hall attendant and a function to display the number of hits, and a hall computer that manages the pachinko machines in the hall as a whole. An external terminal board 320 is connected.

Also connected to the main control circuit 100 are a first starting switch 5472, a second starting switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general prize winning switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a. . When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the member. Also connected to the main control circuit 100 are a backup clear switch 330 and the like for clearing the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade.

A payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100 . The payout/shooting control circuit 300 is connected with a payout device 340 for putting out game balls, a launching device 15 for shooting game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. A payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18 . A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation on the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

When the payout/launch control circuit 300 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or a ball rental control signal supplied from the card unit 360, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out game balls. Also, when the player grips the shooting handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the payout/shooting control circuit 300 applies power to the shooting solenoid according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation). It supplies and controls the shooting of game balls.

Furthermore, a sub-control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106 . The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 16, control of sound generated from the speaker 24, control of light from the lamp 25, and the like, according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100. FIG.

In the present embodiment, a command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, but a signal cannot be supplied from the sub-control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. It may be configured such that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100 .

The sub-control circuit 200 includes a sub-CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, an audio control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 100 . Also, the sub-control circuit 200 is connected with a production button switch 310 that is turned on and off by operating the production button 62 .

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 202 . In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100 .

The program ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the game effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In this embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a computer-readable storage medium having a control means is used. If so, another mode may be used. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device, a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, and a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the programs, tables, etc. may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like, instead of being recorded in advance. Furthermore, the programs, tables, etc. may be recorded in different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201 . In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16 . The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that buffers image data, and an image signal that converts image data into an image signal. A D/A converter or the like that converts as

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying images on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 201 . The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification pattern image data showing identification patterns, background image data, image data for effect, and the like.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 . In this manner, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 24 . The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 24 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and produces sound from the speaker 24 .

The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamps 25 including decorative lamps and the like. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The role product control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling the respective role products 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400. FIG. The role control circuit 207 controls the drive circuit for supplying the drive signal, the lighting circuit for supplying the lighting control signal, the operation pattern and the lighting pattern to each of the roles 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400. is stored in the accessory data ROM or the like.

Also, the drive circuit selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM according to the role product activation command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Then, the selected motion pattern is read out from the role product data ROM, and the mechanical motion of each role product 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400 is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role product data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role product 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400 is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

[Function flow]
Next, the function flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is shot by a user's operation, and game ball payout control processing is performed when the game ball wins various prizes. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using special symbols and a normal symbol game using normal symbols.

When a "jackpot" is achieved in the special symbol game or when a "hit" is achieved in the normal symbol game, the possibility of winning the game ball is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is easily performed. Become.

In addition, for various prizes, special symbol start winning, which is one condition for variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game, and one condition for variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol game. Certain normal symbol start-up prizes are also included.

The term "variable display" as used in this specification is a concept in which identification symbols are variably displayed from the start to the end of one special symbol game. and stop production. The variable presentation and stop presentation of the identification symbols may be performed multiple times in one variable display. It should be noted that the variable effect is merely a visual effect, and has a different meaning from the variable display of the variable display.

Further, in the "variable display", for example, it is possible to perform a "derivation display" in which a special symbol (identification symbol) is displayed as a result of the special symbol game. That is, in this specification, the operation from the start of the "variable display" to the "derived display" is referred to as one "variable display".

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed by the main CPU 101 as control processing.

(1) When a special symbol starting prize is won in a special symbol game, random numbers (random number for judging a big hit and random number for determining a symbol) are extracted from a counter for judging a big hit and a counter for determining a symbol, respectively. Each random number value is stored (refer to the flow of the special symbol start winning process during the special symbol game shown in FIG. 8).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is established. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random numbers are stored by the special symbol starting prize, and variable display of special symbols is performed under the condition that various data such as random numbers are stored. It is determined that the conditions for starting are satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, the big-hit judgment random number extracted from the big-hit judgment counter is referred to, and the big-hit judgment is made as to whether or not to make it a "big-hit". After that, stop symbol determination processing is performed. In this process, the symbol determination random number extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described big hit determination are referred to, and the special symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined.

Then, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from a variation pattern determination counter, and the random number, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination, and the above-mentioned special symbols to be stopped and displayed are referred to determine the variation pattern of the special symbols.

Next, effect pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, the random number, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination, the above-mentioned special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the above-described special symbol variation pattern are referred to, A performance pattern to be executed along with the variable display of special symbols is determined.

Next, as a result of the determined big hit determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the performance pattern associated with the variable display of the special symbol are referred to, and variable display control processing for controlling the variable display of the special symbol. , and effect control processing for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the performance display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" will be achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "big hit" has occurred, a big win game control process for performing a big win game is executed. Incidentally, in the jackpot game, the possibility of winning various prizes described above increases. On the other hand, when it is determined that the "jackpot" was not achieved, the jackpot game control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "jackpot" is not achieved, or when the jackpot game control process is completed, a game state shift control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, management of the normal game state different from the jackpot game state is performed.

As the normal game state, for example, in the above-described jackpot determination, the game state in which the probability of being determined as a “jackpot” increases (hereinafter referred to as “high probability game state”), and a special symbol start winning prize is easily obtained. A game state (hereinafter referred to as “time-saving game state”) and the like. After that, again, the determination processing of whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbols is performed, and after that, various kinds of processing of the above-described special symbol control processing are repeated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the game ball starts winning during the variable display of special symbols, various data (random numbers for judging big hits, random values for determining symbols, etc.) acquired at the time of starting winning ) is stored until the conditions for starting the variable display of the special symbols are met. Thus, storing various data until a condition for starting variable display of special symbols is satisfied is called "reservation", and various data withheld is called starting memory.

That is, when the game ball starts winning during the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbols corresponding to the starting winning is suspended, and after the variable display of the currently executed special symbols ends. Variable display of reserved special symbols is started. Below, the variable display of the reserved special symbol is also referred to as "reserved ball".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start prize and second start prize) are provided, and a maximum of 4 for each special symbol start prize of ball can be acquired. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 8 held balls can be obtained.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko machine of this embodiment determines whether the held ball wins or loses (whether or not a "big hit" is won) based on the information on the held ball described above, and furthermore, the determination result is It has a function to perform a predetermined effect based on, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start winning prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter, and the random value is stored (normal symbol start winning prize during the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 8). process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbols is established. In this discrimination process, it is determined whether or not the random number is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied with the fact that the random number is stored as one condition. discriminate.

Next, when the variable display of normal symbols is started, the random number value extracted from the hit determination counter is referred to, and a hit determination is made as to whether or not it is a "hit". After that, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of normal symbols is determined.

Then, with reference to the determined result of hit determination and the variation pattern of normal symbols, a variable display control process for controlling variable display of normal symbols and an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

When the variable display control process and effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a "win" is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that it becomes a "hit", a winning game control process for performing a winning game is executed.

In the winning game control process, the possibility of various prizes mentioned above, especially the possibility of the special symbol starting prize of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not become a "hit", the winning game control process is not executed. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of normal symbols is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, game ball payout control is performed based on conditions such as whether or not a "big win" occurs in a special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not a "win" occurs in a normal symbol game. Ease of processing changes.

In this embodiment, as a method for extracting various random numbers, a soft random number method for generating random numbers by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A hard random number method for extracting may be employed as the method for extracting the various random values described above.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number from being extracted in the predetermined period by determining the initial value of the random number at a timing different from the predetermined period.

[Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 16 is composed of liquid crystal, and displays various effects in its display area.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect image associated with (corresponding to) the special symbol displayed in the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74) to be described later is displayed in the display area. to be displayed. At this time, for example, when the special symbols are being variably displayed in the special symbol portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74), except for specific cases, for example, 1 to 8 A plurality of performance identification patterns (decorative patterns) consisting of numbers, various characters, etc. are variably displayed in the display area.

When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74), a plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area. be.

Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol part (the first special symbol display part 73, the second special symbol display part 74) is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is "big win"). , an effect image is displayed in the display area for making the player understand that it is a "jackpot".

As an effect for making the player understand that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of stationary identification symbols are displayed in a specific manner (for example, a manner in which the same identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), and after that, an effect such as displaying an image informing of a “big hit” can be given.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display portion 75 and the second special symbol reservation display portion 76, which will be described later. For example, in the display area, suspension information (for example, the same number of suspension symbols as the number of suspensions) for informing the number of suspensions (starting memory number) of variable display of special symbols is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, and the advance notice at this time is also displayed in the display area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 71 described later is in a predetermined mode, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the player can grasp the information. A display function may be further provided.

[Special pattern display part]
The special symbol display portions (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74) are arranged in the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) special symbols in the special symbol game. In this embodiment, the special symbol display portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74) is configured by a 7-segment display device that displays the special symbol in the form of numbers, symbols, and the like.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74) may be composed of, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on/off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is triggered by the fact that the game ball has won the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 (special symbol start prize). , Performs a variable display of special symbols (identification information). Then, the special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) perform the variable display of the special symbols for a predetermined time, and then perform the stop display of the special symbols.

Below, the special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball wins the first starting hole 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol. In addition, the special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball wins the second starting hole 440 is called a second special symbol.

In the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74), when the stop-displayed first special symbol or second special symbol is in a specific mode ("jackpot" mode) 2, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

That is, in the special symbol display portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the jackpot game state, It is a "big hit".

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot 53 is opened. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the first special symbol is specified in the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74) , the big winning opening 53 is open.

The open state of each big winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won, or until a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when any one of these conditions is met, the large winning opening that was in an open state is closed.

Hereinafter, a game in which the big winning hole 53 is in a state (open state) where game balls can easily be received is referred to as a round game. Between the round games, the big winning opening is closed.

A round game is counted as the number of rounds such as 1 round, 2 rounds, or the like. For example, the first round game is called the first round, and the second round game is called the second round.

In addition, in the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74), if the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the specific mode ("failure" mode) , The game state does not shift except when the falling lottery is won.

That is, in the special symbol game, the special symbols are variably displayed by the special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74), and then the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the game is played according to the result. It is a game in which states are transitioned or maintained.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is variable Display (hold ball) is held.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed first special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbols to be reserved (so-called "reserved number (number of reserved balls)") is defined to be four (pieces) at maximum.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) is withheld.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed second special symbol that has been suspended is started. In this embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbol to be reserved (the number of reserved symbols) is defined to be four times (pieces) at maximum. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the total number of reserved variable display of special symbols is eight at maximum.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable display of the other special symbol. . Specifically, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are preferentially digested over the reserved balls of the first special symbol. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first special symbol reserved ball and the second special symbol reserved ball are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the reserved order.

[Normal pattern display unit]
The normal symbol display portion 71 is arranged in the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . In this embodiment, the normal symbol display portion 71 is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74) as viewed from the player side.

The normal symbol display unit 71 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) normal symbols in the normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display unit 71 is composed of a plurality of LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs). . Then, in the normal symbol display section 71, a display pattern formed by turning on/off each normal symbol display LED is displayed as a normal symbol.

When the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, the normal symbol display unit 71 alternately lights and extinguishes the two normal symbol display LEDs to display the variable normal symbols. Then, the normal symbol display unit 71 displays the normal symbols in a stationary manner after performing the variable display of the normal symbols for a predetermined time.

In the normal symbol display portion 71, when the stopped normal symbol is in a predetermined mode ("win" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "loss"), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which normal symbols are variably displayed by the normal symbol display unit 71, then the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the normal electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

Incidentally, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is suspended. Then, when the normal symbols that are currently being variably displayed are stopped and displayed, the variably displayed normal symbols that have been suspended are started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable display of normal symbols to be reserved (that is, "number of reserved symbols") is defined to be four (pieces) at maximum.

[Normal symbol holding display device]
The normal symbol holding display device 63 is arranged in the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

The normal design reservation display device 63 is a device that displays the number of reserved variable display of normal symbols, and the normal design reservation display device 63 is provided with a plurality of normal design reservation display LEDs, and the normal design reservation display device 63 , By turning on/off each normal symbol reserved display LED, the number of normally variable display reserved symbols is displayed.

Specifically, the normal design reservation display device 63 displays the normal design reservation display LED according to the reservation number of the variable display of the normal design, and the normal design reservation display LED is normally displayed according to the reservation number of the variable display of the normal design. A maximum of 4 lights are lit.

[First special symbol holding display device]
The first special symbol holding display portion 75 is arranged in the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

The first special symbol reservation display unit 75 is a device that displays information about variable display of the first special symbol that is being reserved (reserved ball of the first special symbol). In this embodiment, the first special symbol reservation display unit 75 includes a plurality of first special symbol reservation display LEDs.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved display unit 75 displays the first special symbol reserved display LED according to the number of reserved variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol reserved display LED is the first Up to four lights are lit according to the number of reserved variable display of special symbols.

[Second special symbol holding display device]
The second special symbol holding display portion 76 is arranged in the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

The second special symbol reservation display unit 76 is a device that displays information about the variable display of the second special symbol that is being reserved (second special symbol reservation ball), and the second special symbol reservation display unit 76 is , and a plurality of second special symbol reserved display LEDs.

Specifically, the second special symbol reservation display unit 76 displays the second special symbol reservation display LED according to the number of reservations of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol reservation display LED is the second special symbol reservation display LED. Depending on the number of pending variable display of 2 special symbols, a maximum of 4 lights.

Next, the data configuration and the like of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11. FIG.

[Random hit judgment table]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a winning random number determination table (first start opening, second start opening) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. As shown in FIG. The hit random number determination table (first start port) is based on the big hit determination random number value acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 5442, "big win", "minor win", and "losing". It is referred to determine one of the by lottery. The hit random number determination table (second start port) determines by lottery whether "big hit" or "loss" based on the random number value for big hit determination acquired when the game ball wins in the second start port 440. It is referenced when

The random number value for judging a big hit is a random number number for judging the result of a lottery that is triggered by winning a starting prize. More specifically, the big hit determination random number value is a value indicating the lottery result of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). In this embodiment, the random number for big hit determination is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

In this embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting hole 5442, one of "big hit", "minor hit" and "loss" is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the first start), the value of the probability variable flag ("0 (= OFF)" or "1 (= ON)") "big hit", "small hit" and the range (width) of the random number value for judging the big hit that determines the winning of each of the "losing" and the judgment value data corresponding to it ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data" and "losing judgment value data”) is defined. The variable probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "high probability game state". When the game state is "high probability game state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is "low probability game state", the probability variation flag is "0".

In this embodiment, when the first starting port 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is any one of "0" to "204", the "jackpot" is won. , "jackpot determination value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "jackpot" (jackpot probability (selection rate)) in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

Also, when the first start port 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is one of "205" to "409", "small hit" is won, " Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "small hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

Furthermore, when the first start port 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "409", "losing" is won and "losing determination value data” is determined.

On the other hand, when the first start port 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random number value for hit determination is any one of "0" to "1637", "big hit" is won, and "big hit" judgment value data” is determined. That is, the "jackpot" winning probability (jackpot probability (selection rate)) in this case is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

Also, when the first start port 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is one of "1638" to "1842", "small hit" is won, " Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "minor hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319), which is the same as when the variable probability flag is "0".

Furthermore, when the first start port 5442 wins, if the probability variable flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "1842", "losing" is won and "losing determination value data” is determined.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 5442, the jackpot probability fluctuates depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the "high probability game state". Specifically, when the game state is "high probability game state", the jackpot probability when the game ball wins in the first start hole 5442 is about 8 times when the game state is not "high probability game state". get higher

Similarly, when the second start port 440 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is any one of "0" to "204", "big hit" is won, " Big hit judgment value data” is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "jackpot" (jackpot probability (selection rate)) in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

In addition, when the second start port 440 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "204", "losing" is won and "losing determination value data” is determined.

On the other hand, when the second starting port 440 wins, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is any one of "0" to "1637", "big hit" is won and "big hit" judgment value data” is determined. That is, the "jackpot" winning probability (jackpot probability (selection rate)) in this case is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

In addition, when the second start port 440 wins, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "1637", "losing" is won and "losing determination value data” is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the game state at the time of winning is the "high probability game state" without winning the "small hit". The probability of big win varies depending on whether or not, and the probability of big win when the game state is "high-probability game state" is about eight times higher than when it is "low-probability game state".

[Symbol Judgment Table]
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first start opening, second start opening) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. As shown in FIG. The symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) is based on the symbol random number value acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 and the aforementioned determination value data. are referred to select the "select symbol command at the time of hit" and the "design designation command" for determining the stop symbol. The ``selection pattern command at the time of winning'' is a command for specifying the winning pattern determined according to the type of winning at the time of winning, and the ``designation command'' specifies the pattern to be displayed when the fluctuation of the special pattern is stopped. This command is for The symbol random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the symbol determination table (first starting port) of the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any one of "0" to "9", 10/100 "z0" is selected as the winning selection symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command with a probability of . In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "10" to "19", "z1" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "20" to "29", "z2" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "30" to "39", "z3" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "40" to "49", "z4" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "50" to "95", "z5" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 46/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is "96" or "97", "z6" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of winning with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol is specified. "zA4" is selected as the command. Further, when the big hit judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is "98" or "99", "z7" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of winning with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol is specified. "zA5" is selected as the command. In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "0" to "99", "z8" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of winning, and as the symbol designation command "zA6" is selected. On the other hand, when the loss judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "0" to "99", the winning selection symbol command is not selected, and "zA7" is used as the symbol designation command. selected.

Further, according to the symbol determination table (second starting port) of the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of "0" to "24", 25 With a probability of /100, "z9" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "25" to "49", "z10" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 25/100. , "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "55" to "99", "z11" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. , "zA9" is selected as the symbol designation command. On the other hand, when the loss judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "0" to "99", the winning selection symbol command is not selected, and "zA10" is used as the symbol designation command. selected.

[Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 11 shows a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. As shown in FIG. The jackpot type determination table is referred to for determining the jackpot type such as the number of rounds, whether or not to turn on the variable probability flag, and whether or not to turn on or not to turn on the short-time flag, according to the winning time selection symbol command relating to the jackpot. . In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won regardless of the type of jackpot, the time saving flag is set to "1". The number of times of time saving at this time is determined to be one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times, and the determined number of times of time saving is set. The variable probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "high probability game state". When the game state is "high probability game state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is "low probability game state", the probability variation flag is "0". Similarly, the time saving flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "time saving game state". When the game state is the "time-saving game state", the time-saving flag is "1", and when it is the "non-time-saving game state", the time-saving flag is "0". The number of time reduction is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol game in which the time reduction gaming state can be continued. That is, when the special symbol variation (lottery of special symbols) for the number of times of time saving (100 times) is performed without winning a jackpot in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is terminated and shifted to a non-time saving game state. In addition, in this embodiment, the high probability game state continues until the next big hit is won. However, when the special symbol variation (lottery of special symbols) is performed for a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot, the high-probability game state may be ended and the low-probability game state may be entered.

According to the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "8", and the jackpot with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "8", and a big hit with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "8", and a big hit with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "8", and a big hit with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "8", and the big hit of probability variable flag ON and time saving flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is "5", and the big hit of probability variable flag ON and time saving flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z7", the number of rounds is "16", and the big hit of probability variable flag ON and time saving flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z9", the number of rounds is "5", and a big hit with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z10", the number of rounds is "5", and the big hit of probability variable flag ON and time saving flag ON is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z11", the number of rounds is "16", and the big hit of probability variable flag ON and time saving flag ON is determined.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the hit time selection symbol command (that is, the jackpot determination value data) is designed to determine the jackpot of the time-saving flag-on regardless of which, but not necessarily limited to this, the jackpot determination value data A jackpot of time saving flag off may be determined according to.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 determines the number of times of time saving to be one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The time-saving game state may be controlled to continue until the next big hit is won, or the time-saving game state may be controlled to continue as long as the high-probability game state continues.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 201 controls so that the high-precision gaming state continues until the next big hit is won. It may be controlled so that the high-probability game state continues (then it shifts to a low-probability game state), or until the next big win is substantially won in relation to the winning probability of the big win (for example, 10000 It may be controlled so that the high-probability game state continues until the next time), or it may be controlled so that the high-probability game state continues until the next big hit is won.

[Flow of game balls]
Below, the flow of game balls shot toward the game area 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14. FIG. FIG. 12 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened. FIG. 13 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 14 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the left region when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened.

As described above, the attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49 . Therefore, in the jackpot game state, so-called right hitting is performed. When the large winning opening 540 is in the open state by the shutter 610, the game ball hit to the right tends to enter the large winning opening 540.例文帳に追加In addition, even if it is not in the jackpot game state, right-handed hitting is performed during the electric sapo.

However, when the player hits to the right, the game ball flowing down the right area loses the sense of anticipation when it does not enter the big winning opening 540, and just waits for it to flow into the out opening 57 as it is. becomes. Therefore, when a game ball hit to the right does not enter the big winning hole 540, the player feels disadvantageous, which causes a decrease in interest. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for a larger liquid crystal display device 16, and the current situation is that places where the attacker unit 500 and the like can be arranged within the game area 20 are limited. Therefore, in order to meet the demand for a larger liquid crystal display device 16, the attacker unit 500 must be arranged below the game area 20 as in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment. When the attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower part of the game area 20, if the game ball hit to the right does not enter the big winning hole 540, it will flow into the out hole 57 as it is.

In this regard, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially in the lower left portion of the game area 20 as described above. In addition, the attacker unit 500 is provided with a game ball guiding member 580. - 特許庁This game ball guide member 580, including the guide nail 700, guides a game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540 in the game area 20 where the out opening 57 is arranged. It leads to the upstream of the blade member 4620 arranged in the left area beyond the center, and is a member that forms the path of the game ball extended on the extension line of the big winning opening 540 toward the flowing direction of the game ball. is. Here, the "upstream of the blade member 4620" is the area where the game ball can be received into the second start opening 440 if the blade member 4620 is open (hereinafter referred to as "second start opening reception area). This second starting opening receiving area is, for example, the peripheral area of the game ball 223 located above the blade member 4620 in FIG.

In addition, in the game area 20, a game ball guide member is provided as a flow-down path for a game ball that is struck to the right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the big winning opening 540 without entering the big winning opening 540. A guide nail 700 forms a flow-down path connecting the exit side of 580 and the out port 57 . Then, the game ball flowing down this flow-down path always passes through the second starting opening receiving area before reaching the out opening 57. - 特許庁

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the normal symbol determination shifts to the high probability game state with the end of the jackpot game state as a trigger, the electric sapo state is in the time saving game state, and the blades at a high frequency Member 4620 is released.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open, if the game ball hit to the right (flowing down the right area) does not enter the big winning hole 540, the game The ball is always guided by the game ball guiding member 580 and the guiding nail 700 to the second starting opening receiving area upstream of the vane member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 .

Of the game balls hit right (flowed down the right area), the game balls that did not win the big winning opening 540 are always guided to the second start opening receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620, so the second If the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open when the game ball is guided to the starting port receiving area, it is received by the blade member 4620 without flowing into the out port 57, and the second starting port 440 are more likely to win prizes. That is, when the blade member 4620 is closed, the out port 57 is the most downstream position of the game area 20 as described above, but when the blade member 4620 is open, the out port 57 is replaced with the second The starting port 440 is the most downstream position. Thus, the blade member 4620 has the function of changing the most downstream position in the game area 20 .

In this way, even if the game ball hit to the right (flowed down the right area) does not enter the big winning opening 540, the game ball always reaches the second start opening receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620) Since the player is guided, the expectation of winning the prize at the second starting port 440 continues, and the interest can be enhanced.

In particular, right-handed hitting is performed in the electric sapo state. Therefore, although the big winning opening 540 does not open during the electric sapo, the blade member 4620 changes the most downstream position from the out opening 57 to the second start opening 440, so the game progresses in the electric sapo state. It can be promoted and increase interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 13, when the vane member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed, the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning hole 540 , is always guided upstream of the blade member 4620, but flows into the out port 57 through between the blade member 4620 and the guide nail 700 (that is, the left side of the guide nail 700).

Of the game balls struck to the right (flowed down the right area), the game balls that did not reach the big winning opening 540 ) may be configured to be led to the out port 57 . At this time, among the game balls hit to the right, game balls that did not enter the big winning hole 540 are game balls that reached the big winning hole 540 but did not win, and game balls that did not reach the big winning hole 540. Although there are game balls that did not win, any game ball may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620, or only one of the game balls may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620. .

By the way, as shown in FIG. 14, the left-handed game ball (the game ball that has flowed down the left side area) generally wins the first starting hole 5442 or the general winning holes 53, 54, 55, It flows into the out port 57 or the out port 450 . After the game ball is hit to the left, the game ball 224 rolling in the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 continues to have a feeling of winning the prize to the first start port 5442, but it goes to the first start port 5442. As for the game ball 2226 that has deviated from the flow path 222 and has not won any of the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, the conventional pachinko machine uses the first starting port (corresponding to the first starting port 5442 of the present embodiment). The expectation of winning a prize will be lost. Also, even if the game ball 224 rolls in the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442, if it does not win the first starting port 5442, the expectation of winning is lost at that time. In this embodiment, when the left-handed game ball (game ball flowing down the left region) rolls in the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 but does not enter the first start port 5442, and , Even if it does not win any of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 after deviating from the flow path 222 heading to the first starting opening 5442, these game balls will reach the out opening 57 In between, it necessarily passes through the second starting port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460). As described above, the upstream of the blade member 4620, if the blade member 4620 is open, it is the area (second start opening receiving area) where it is possible to receive the game ball to the second start opening 440, so the second When rolling in the flow path 222 toward one starting port 5442 but not winning the first starting port 5442, and when deviating from the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442 and further general winning ports 53, 54, 55 Even if the player does not win the prize at the second starting port 440, the expectation of winning the prize at the second starting port 440 continues, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, since the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right region, there is little expectation that the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 will be opened when the ball is hit left. However, immediately after the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state ends, the variable display of normal symbols may be suspended. Also, even if the player hits left, a game ball that has vigorously jumped into the game area 20 may flow down the right side area. Therefore, even in the normal game state, the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is rarely opened. In addition, the guide nail 700 prevents not only the game ball that has flowed down in the right side area but also the game ball that has rolled to the side of the guide member 700 due to excess momentum from the game ball that has flowed down in the left side area, and immediately flows into the out port 57. Since it has a suppressing function, if the blade member 4620 is open, there is a possibility of winning the second starting port 440 . Therefore, even if the expectation of winning the first starting port 5442 or the general winning ports 53, 54, 55 for the left-handed game ball is lost, the expectation of winning the second starting port 440 continues. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In this embodiment, the pass gate 49 is arranged in the right area, but instead of this, the pass gate 491 may be arranged in the left area. In this case, there is a possibility that the frequency with which the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened is increased compared to the case where the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right region. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball loses the expectation of winning the first starting port 5442, it is possible to continue the winning of the second starting port 440 with a higher expectation. .

Among the left-handed game balls (game balls that flowed down in the left region), as game balls that did not reach above the normal electric accessory unit 400 or did not reach the first start port 5442, for example It may be configured so that there is a game ball that has flowed down the flow path leading to the out port 450 (see, for example, FIGS. 3 and 49) or the out port 57 existing below the normal electric accessory unit 400 . At this time, among the left-handed game balls, the game balls that did not win the first start port 5442 are the game balls that did not reach the upper part of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or the first start port 5442, and the normal Although there are game balls that have reached above the electric accessory unit 400 or near the first start port 5442 but have not won, any game ball may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620, or Only one game ball may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620 .

In addition, when the game ball that rolls in the direction of the big winning hole 540 among the left-handed game balls (the game ball that has flowed down in the left area) rolls the game ball guiding member 580, the game ball moves to the big winning hole 540 The shutter 610 or the rib provided on the game ball guide member 580 is collided with to enter the first starting port 5442 or flow into the out 55 or out port 450.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540 is always placed on the left side beyond the center of the game area 20 where the out opening 57 is arranged. It has a game ball guiding member 580 that leads to the second starting port receiving area of the area. However, the game ball guiding member 580 is such a game ball (a game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540), necessarily a function to lead to the second start opening receiving area , and may be limited to leading beyond the center of the game area 20 to the left area. For example, the game ball guiding member 580 has the function of guiding such a game ball to the left area, but the game ball guided to the left area is further distributed to a plurality of areas including the second start opening receiving area. The configuration is equivalent.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540 is guided to the left area by the game ball guide member 580. The game ball guide member 580 is not necessarily essential, and for example, the game ball that is hit to the right and has not entered the big winning opening 540 may be guided to the left area only by the guide nail.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball guide member is used as a flow path for a game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the big winning opening 540 without entering the big winning opening 540. A flow-down path connecting the exit side of 580 and the out port 57 is formed, and the game ball flowing down this flow-down path always passes through the second start port receiving area before reaching the out port 57 It is designed to In this embodiment, since the second starting port 440 is formed in the left area, the game ball flowing down the above flow path is always guided to the left area. However, in view of the idea that the game ball flowing down the path always passes through the second starting hole receiving area before reaching the out hole 57, in such a case, the second starting hole 440 is located in the left side area. Being placed is not essential.

[Construction of back unit]
The configuration of the back unit 176 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20. FIG. FIG. 15 is an example of a front view of the rear unit 176. As shown in FIG. FIG. 16 is an example of a rear view of the rear unit 176. As shown in FIG. FIG. 17 is an example of a perspective view of the rear unit 176 as seen obliquely from the upper front right. FIG. 18 is an example of a perspective view of the rear unit 176 as seen obliquely from the upper left of the rear surface. FIG. 19 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the rear unit 176 viewed obliquely from the upper right front side. FIG. 20 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 viewed obliquely from the upper left of the back surface.

As described above, the back unit 176 includes an upper front component 1000, an upper back component 1100, a lower component 1200, a corner component 1300, a side component 1400, a middle panel 1500, and an attack ball gutter 1600. , a main board case 1700 and a rear box 1800 . Note that the corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350 .

The rear box 1800 has a box shape, and an opening 1820 is formed substantially in the center. The liquid crystal display device 16 and the like are arranged in this opening 1820 .

The upper rear accessory 1100 (more specifically, a base member 1180 (see, for example, FIG. 67) described later) is attached and fixed above the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800 . Details of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described later.

The lower accessory 1200 (more specifically, a lower accessory fixing base 1220 (see, for example, FIG. 75) described later) is attached and fixed below the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800 . Details of the lower accessory 1200 will be described later.

The side accessory 1400 (more specifically, a mounting plate 1410 (see FIG. 105, for example) described later) is mounted and fixed to the right side of the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800 . The details of the side role item 1400 will be described later.

The upper corner accessory 1320 (see, for example, FIG. 86) is placed in front of the upper back accessory movable decorative body 110 so that the first movable body 1330 is positioned at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. The bodies 1340 are attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned at the upper right corners of the liquid crystal display device 16, respectively. The lower corner accessory 1350 is located forward of the lower accessory 1200, with the third movable body 1355 positioned at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the fourth movable body 1357 positioned at the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. , are attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned respectively. The first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction. Details of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described later.

The upper front accessory 1000 (more specifically, a decorative accessory base member 1010 (see, for example, FIG. 59) which will be described later) is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned forward of the upper back accessory 1000. be. Details of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described later.

The middle panel 1500 is arranged in an area corresponding to a part of the game area 20 behind the transparent panel 172 , and includes a first middle panel 1520 and a second middle panel 1550 . The first middle panel 1520 is a plate-like member having a picture or pattern on the front surface, and the picture or pattern on the front surface can be seen through the transparent panel 172 . The second middle panel 1550 is a plate-like member having an annular opening window 1552, which will be described later in detail, and is configured such that a predetermined picture appears in the opening window when predetermined conditions are met. Details of the second middle panel 1550 will be described later.

The attack ball gutter 1600 is a gutter-shaped one that receives the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 56 and discharges them to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 . In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls that have won the big prize opening 540 are combined and discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board case 1700 accommodates a lamp relay board 1710, a main control relay board 1720, and the like.

The back unit 176 further comprises a first ornamental design 1900 and a second ornamental design 1920 . The first decorative design 1900 is attached to the front right side of the upper back accessory 1100 . The second decorative design 1920 is attached to the front left side of the upper back accessory 1100 . The first decorative design 1900 and the second decorative design 1920 are decorated on the front surface, and both of them have a design function without being movable.

[Attacker Unit]
The configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 21 to 32. FIG.

The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510 , a front side plate portion 520 , a guideway 530 , a big winning opening 540 , a rear side case 550 and a special electric accessory 600 .

A base member 510 shown in FIGS. 21 to 26, 28 and 29 is a base member of the attacker unit 500. As shown in FIGS. The base member 510 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is arranged with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction and its plate surface oriented in the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510 . A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510 .

The slit 511 is formed through the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed in the upper portion of the base member 510 in a substantially linear shape extending while gently sloping from right to left in a front view. A shutter 610 (more specifically, a guiding portion 611 of the shutter 610 ), which will be described later, is arranged in the slit 511 .

The front side plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 21 to 25 and 27 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500. As shown in FIGS. The front side plate portion 520 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510 . The front side plate portion 520 is arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The front side plate portion 520 faces the base member 510 in the front-rear direction and is arranged in a state spaced forward from the base member 510 . In this way, between the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510, a gap (hereinafter referred to as "special electric role space R2") is formed which is large enough for a game ball to enter. The special electric accessory space R2 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510 when viewed from the front. The front side plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via screws or the like. The front side plate portion 520 is made of a transparent resin material, and the rear side of the front side plate portion 520 is visible to the player.

The guiding path 530 shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 to 29 appropriately guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The guide path 530 is formed by the shutter 610 and a substantially plate-like member (wall portion) erected rearward from the front side plate portion 520 . The taxiway 530 includes a first taxiway 531 , a second taxiway 532 and a third taxiway 533 .

It should be noted that the guideway 530 (more specifically, the first guideway 531) is formed by the shutter 610 as described above. Here, as will be described later, the shutter 610 is configured to be movable back and forth with respect to the base member 510 via the slit 511 . In such a configuration of the shutter 610 , the first guiding path 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510 . Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the following description will be made on the assumption that the shutter 610 is advanced forward with respect to the base member 510 (the first guide path 531 is formed).

The first guideway 531 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end of the special electric role space R2. The first guideway 531 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from the right to the left while gently inclining. The length in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the first guide path 531 is slightly shorter than that of the base member 510 . The left end of the first guideway 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the special electric role space R2. The right end of the first guideway 531 is formed near the right end of the special electric role space R2. The first guiding path 531 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first guideway 531 has a deceleration rib 534 .

The deceleration rib 534 serves to reduce the movement speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 534 is composed of a plurality of rear projections 534 a projecting forward from the base member 510 and a plurality of front projections 534 b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 520 . In this embodiment, six rear projections 534a are provided. Also, five front protrusions 534b are provided. The plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged along the extending direction (horizontal direction) of the first guideway 531 with appropriate spacing therebetween. The appropriate interval is set to be longer than at least the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap in front view (not facing each other in the front-rear direction, but shifted in the left-right direction).

With such a configuration of the first guideway 531, the game ball (moved by the first guideway 531) collides with the rear protrusion 534a and the front protrusion 534b, and moves in a zigzag shape in plan view. (Because smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), the movement speed is reduced.

By reducing the moving speed of the game ball moved along the first guide path 531 in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531 . Thus, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guideway 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third guideway 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. , and can be made to win a prize in the big prize opening 540.例文帳に追加That is, it is possible to quickly digest the rounds in the jackpot game. Also, even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if many game balls stay on the shutter 610, many prizes can be won. In addition, since many game balls can be won at once, winning more than the number of possible wins in one round of the jackpot game (so-called over-winning) is likely to occur.

The second taxiway 532 is arranged immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electric role space R2. The second guideway 532 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right to the left while gently inclining. The inclination angle of the second guideway 532 is formed to be substantially the same as the inclination angle of the first guideway 531 . In this way, the second guideway 532 and the first guideway 531 are configured as one substantially linear guideway that gently slopes from right to left. The second guideway 532 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball from right to left (first guideway 531 side).

The third guideway 533 is arranged substantially in the center of the special electric role space R2 in the vertical direction. The third guideway 533 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from the right to the left while gently inclining. The third guideway 533 is arranged below the first guideway 531 . The third guideway 533 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the first guideway 531 when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29 and the like, a wall connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the left end of the third guideway 533 and the left end of the first guideway 531 . A wall connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the right end of the third guideway 533 and the right end of the second guideway 532 . Thus, the third guideway 533 is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front.

The third guiding path 533 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball from the right to the left (towards the big winning opening 540). The third guiding path 533 has a guide portion 535 .

The guide part 535 is formed at the bottom of the third guideway 533 . The guide portion 535 is a substantially triangular plate-like member in plan view. The guide part 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 533 backward.

25, 26, 28 and 29 is formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The big winning opening 540 is formed behind the lowest portion of the third guideway 533 (behind the guide portion 535). The big winning opening 540 has a count switch 541 . As shown in FIG. 25 , the count switch 541 is arranged behind and below the big winning opening 540 .

The rear case 550 shown in FIGS. 21, 23 to 25, 29, 31 and 32 includes various members (shutter 610, big prize opening solenoid 620, link arm 630, etc.) that constitute the special electric accessory 600. ). The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow box shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 31, the rear case 550 is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by a substantially flat mounting portion 551 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed into a two-story structure by the mounting portion 551, and predetermined members are arranged in the upper space and the lower space, respectively. Specifically, the shutter 610, the link arm 630, and the like are arranged in the upper space. In addition, a large winning opening solenoid 620 and the like are arranged in the lower space. The rear case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) communicate with each other via a slit 511. As shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessories]
The configuration of the special electric accessory 6000 according to the second embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 33 to 48. FIG.

In addition, the special electric accessory 6000 switches between a state (open state) in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the large prize-winning port 540 and a state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the large-prize winning port 540. However, unless otherwise specified, the arrangement and configuration of various members will be described below assuming that they are in a closed state.

The special electric accessory 6000 comprises a housing portion 6001, a shutter 6002, a winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004 and a regulating member 6005, as shown in FIGS.

A housing portion 6001 shown in FIGS. 33 to 36 is a member that houses various members (shutter 6002, big winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, regulating member 6005, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 6000. The housing portion 6001 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an upper side and a front side opened. The housing portion 6001 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 (see FIG. 21 and the like) via screws or the like. The housing portion 6001 has a communication opening 6011 , a support shaft 6012 , a boss portion 6013 and a guide opening 6014 .

The communication opening 6011 communicates between the upper side and the lower side of the accommodating section 6001 . A communication opening 6011 is formed on the right side of the housing portion 6001 . The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to vertically penetrate the accommodating portion 6001 . The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to surround the boss portion 6013 to be described later from the rear to the right in plan view.

The support shaft 6012 rotatably supports a link arm 6004, which will be described later. The support shaft 6012 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. The support shaft 6012 is formed to protrude upward. The support shaft 6012 is formed in the rear right portion of the housing portion 6001 and behind the communication opening 6011 .

The boss portion 6013 rotatably supports a later-described restricting member 6005 . The boss portion 6013 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. Boss portion 6013 is formed to protrude upward. The boss portion 6013 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center) in a plan view and in front of the communication opening 6011 to the left. 33 to 35 and other appropriate drawings, the boss portion 6013 is shown in a state in which a screw is attached to support the regulating member 6005. As shown in FIG.

Guidance opening 6014 is for inserting guide shaft 6056 of regulation member 6005, which will be described later. More specifically, it defines the movement (displacement) path of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005, as will be described later. The guiding opening 6014 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center and to the left of the boss portion 6013) in plan view. The guide opening 6014 is formed so as to pass through the accommodating portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The guide opening 6014 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view that is bent in the middle from one longitudinal end to the other longitudinal end. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 36( a ), guide opening 6014 comprises first guide opening 6016 and second guide opening 6017 .

The first guide opening 6016 is formed to extend substantially linearly in the left-right direction. The first guide opening 6016 is formed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013 . The length in the left-right direction of the first guide opening 6016 is formed to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction of the connection opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003, which will be described later.

The second guide opening 6017 is formed to extend arcuately in plan view. More specifically, the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a portion of a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss 6013 (see the dashed-dotted arrow in FIG. 36(a)). Thus, the second guide opening 6017 is formed in the vicinity of the boss portion 6013 so as to extend along the outline of the boss portion 6013 in plan view. The rear end of the second guide opening 6017 is connected with the left end of the first guide opening 6016 . A front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 is formed forward of the center P of the boss portion 6013 in the front-rear direction.

A shutter 6002 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is a member (a member for switching between an open state and a closed state) that opens and closes the large winning opening 540 by power from a large winning opening solenoid 6003, which will be described later. The structure of the shutter 6002 is substantially the same as the shutter 610 of the special electric accessory 600 according to the first embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30(c), etc.). The shutter 6002 has an elongated plate portion 6021 , a connecting plate portion 6022 and a connecting shaft 6023 .

The elongated plate portion 6021 is a member that forms the first guiding path 531 (see FIG. 29 and the like). The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed such that its longitudinal direction is oriented in the left-right direction in a plan view, and is slanted to the left in a front view (the upper surface faces the upper left).

The connecting plate portion 6022 is a member that connects the elongated plate portion 6021 and a connecting shaft 6023 to be described later. The connection plate portion 6022 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in plan view. The connection plate portion 6022 is formed to extend rearward from the central portion of the elongated plate portion 6021 in the left-right direction.

The connecting shaft 6023 is connected with a link arm 6004 which will be described later. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed to protrude upward. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed near the rear end of the connecting plate portion 6022 .

In the shutter 6002 having such a configuration, the elongated plate portion 6021 is inserted into the slit 511 (see FIG. 29, etc.) from behind, and the connection plate portion 6022 is placed on the bottom surface of the housing portion 6001. Housed in 6001. The shutter 6002 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the housing portion 6001 .

A large prize winning opening solenoid 6003 shown in FIGS. 34, 35 and 37 is a member for driving the shutter 6002 . The big winning opening solenoid 6003 includes a solenoid housing portion 6031 , a power generation portion 6032 , a plunger 6033 , a power transmission portion 6034 and a spring 6035 .

The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is a member that accommodates various members that constitute the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The solenoid housing portion 6031 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is arranged with its longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction. The solenoid housing portion 6031 is attached to the housing portion 6001 from below.

The power generator 6032 is a member that generates power for the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The power generator 6032 is composed of a coil, a fixed iron core, and the like (not shown). The power generator 6032 can attract a plunger 6033, which will be described later, in response to energization from a predetermined power supply. The power generating portion 6032 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The power generating portion 6032 is housed inside (left portion) of the solenoid housing portion 6031 with its longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed in the left-right direction.

The plunger 6033 is a substantially bar-shaped member (movable iron core). The plunger 6033 is arranged with its longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed in the left-right direction. Plunger 6033 is arranged to extend rightward from power generating portion 6032 . The plunger 6033 is configured to reciprocate in the left-right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032 .

The power transmission section 6034 is a member that transmits the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003 to another member (specifically, the link arm 6004). The power transmission portion 6034 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The power transmission portion 6034 is housed inside (right portion) of the solenoid housing portion 6031 and attached to the right end portion of the plunger 6033 . The power transmission part 6034 has a connection opening 6036 and a connection protrusion 6037 .

The connection opening 6036 is to be connected with a link arm 6004 which will be described later. The connection opening 6036 is formed on the right side of the power transmission portion 6034 in plan view. The connection opening 6036 is formed so as to pass through the power transmission portion 6034 in the vertical direction.

The connecting protrusion 6037 is connected with a regulating member 6005 which will be described later. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed by a pair of plate-like portions formed to protrude upward. The pair of plate-shaped portions are formed so as to be parallel to each other in the left and right directions. With such a configuration, the connecting protrusion 6037 has a gap extending in the front-rear direction between the pair of plate-like portions. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed at the left rear end of the power transmission part 6034 . In addition, below, the connection protrusion part 6037 shall point out the said gap.

Spring 6035 is a so-called compression coil spring. The spring 6035, through which the plunger 6033 is inserted, is arranged between the power generation portion 6032 and the power transmission portion 6034 in a constantly compressed state. In this way, the spring 6035 always applies a rightward biasing force to the plunger 6033 (power transmission section 6034).

In the big prize winning opening solenoid 6003 having such a configuration, the plunger 6033 moves rightward by the biasing force of the spring 6035 when the power generating section 6032 is not energized. On the other hand, when the power generating portion 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 moves leftward against the biasing force of the spring 6035 due to the attractive force of the power generating portion 6032 . In this way, in the big winning opening solenoid 6003, by turning on and off the power generation section 6032, the plunger 6033 can reciprocate in the horizontal direction with respect to the power generation section 6032 to generate power.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the right (that is, when the power generation unit 6032 is not energized), the shutter 6002 slides forward to move the game ball. It becomes a state (closed state) in which it is difficult to win a prize to the big prize mouth 540. On the other hand, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the left (that is, when the power generation unit 6032 is energized), the shutter 6002 slides backward to move the game ball to the large winning opening 540. Winning becomes easy (open state).

A link arm 6004 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 and 38 interlocks (interlocks) the large winning opening solenoid 6003 and the shutter 6002, and transmits power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 to the shutter 6002. It is a member. The link arm 6004 is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view by a portion (first link extension portion 6041) extending substantially in the left-right direction and a portion (second link extension portion 6042) extending substantially in the front-rear direction. be done. The link arm 6004 has a central tubular portion 6043 , a connecting opening 6044 , a connecting shaft 6045 and a restricting protrusion 6046 .

The central tubular portion 6043 is inserted through the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 . The center tubular portion 6043 is formed substantially in the center of the link arm 6004 (connection portion between the first link extension portion 6041 and the second link extension portion 6042) in plan view. The central tubular portion 6043 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. When the support shaft 6012 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6043, the link arm 6004 is supported so as to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise around the central tubular portion 6043 in plan view.

The connecting opening 6044 is through which the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted. A connecting opening 6044 is formed at the left (tip) end of the first link extension 6041 . The connecting opening 6044 is formed to penetrate the first link extending portion 6041 in the vertical direction. The connecting opening 6044 is formed in an elongated hole shape extending linearly from the distal end side to the proximal end side (the central cylindrical portion 6043 side). The length of the connection opening 6044 in the lateral direction in plan view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 .

The connecting shaft 6045 is connected with the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The connecting shaft 6045 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed at the front (tip) end of the second link extending portion 6042 . The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6045 is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter (horizontal length) of the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 .

The restricting protrusion 6046 abuts on a restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005, which will be described later, in a predetermined case. The restricting protrusion 6046 is formed in a plate shape protruding downward. The restricting protrusion 6046 is formed in the vicinity of the base end of the first link extension 6041 and on the front left side of the central cylindrical portion 6043 in plan view. A rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 is formed to be a flat surface facing rearward.

A regulating member 6005 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 and 39 is a member for regulating unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. The regulating member 6005 includes a central tubular portion 6053 , a regulating block portion 6054 , a connecting shaft 6055 and a guiding shaft 6056 .

The central cylindrical portion 6053 is inserted through the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 . The central tubular portion 6053 is formed substantially in the center of the regulating member 6005 in plan view. The central tubular portion 6053 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. In addition, the central tubular portion 6053 is formed in an elongated hole shape extending in the left-right direction in a plan view.

A plate-like portion (first restricting extension portion 6051 ) extending so as to spread in plan view is formed on the right rear of the central cylindrical portion 6053 . Further, a plate-like portion (second restricting extension portion 6052) is formed on the left side of the central tubular portion 6053 so as to spread out in plan view. In this way, the central tubular portion 6053, the first restricting extension portion 6051, and the second restricting extension portion 6052 are formed in a substantially L-shaped mutual positional relationship in plan view. Note that when the boss portion 6013 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6053, the restricting member 6005 is supported so as to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise around the central tubular portion 6053 in a plan view.

The regulating block portion 6054 abuts on the regulating projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 in a predetermined case. The restriction block portion 6054 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped (block-shaped) portion that protrudes upward. The regulating block portion 6054 is formed substantially in the center of the first regulating extension portion 6051 (that is, right rear of the central cylindrical portion 6053) in plan view. A front side surface of the regulation block portion 6054 is formed to be a flat surface facing forward.

The connecting shaft 6055 is connected to the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the first restricting extension portion 6051 (that is, right rear of the central tubular portion 6053) in plan view. Thus, the axial center of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to substantially overlap the axial center of the regulation block portion 6054 in the vertical direction. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed to be smaller than the width of the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037).

The guide shaft 6056 is inserted through the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001 . The guide shaft 6056 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented vertically. Guide shaft 6056 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the second restricting extension portion 6052 (that is, to the left of the central cylindrical portion 6053) in plan view. The outer diameter of the guide shaft 6056 is formed to be substantially the same as the length of the guide opening 6014 (the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017) in the lateral direction in plan view.

33 to 35 and 40 to 44, the assembly structure of the housing portion 6001, the shutter 6002, the winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 in the special electric accessory 6000 will be described below. do.

43 and subsequent drawings, the accommodating portion 6001 is indicated by broken lines, but the support shaft 6012, the boss portion 6013, and the guide opening portion 6014 are indicated by solid lines for convenience of explanation. 43 and subsequent drawings, the link arm 6004 is indicated by a broken line, but the restricting protrusion 6046 is indicated by a solid line for convenience of explanation. In addition, in the drawings after FIG. 44, the illustration of the configuration of each member is simplified for convenience of explanation.

First, an outline of the assembly structure of various members (the shutter 6002, the big winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004 and the regulation member 6005) to the housing portion 6001 will be described.

The shutter 6002 is placed on the bottom surface of the housing portion 6001 . Thus, the shutter 6002 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the housing portion 6001 .

Also, the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is attached to the housing portion 6001 from below. Thus, the upper side and the lower side of the housing portion 6001 (the power transmission portion 6034 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003) are communicated through the communication opening portion 6011.

In addition, the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6043 of the link arm 6004 from below so as to be relatively rotatable. Thus, the link arm 6004 is rotatably supported in the housing portion 6001 about the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 in a plan view clockwise or counterclockwise.

In addition, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 is inserted through the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the restricting member 6005 from below so as to be relatively rotatable. In this way, the restricting member 6005 is supported by the accommodating portion 6001 so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise in a plan view around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 .

Next, the details of the assembly structure of various members will be described.

As described above, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 extends downwardly of the housing portion 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the housing portion 6001. and is protruded. The connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is inserted from above into the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001 . In this way, the link arm 6004 and the big winning opening solenoid 6003 are interlockably connected via the connecting shaft 6045 and the connecting opening 6036 .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 44( a ), the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged so as to contact the left edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . That is, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged with a gap in the left-right direction in plan view between the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 and the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 .

Further, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted through the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 from below. Thus, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 are interlockably connected via the connecting opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023 .

Also, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 , the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 contacts the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005 .

Note that, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005 are planes parallel to each other. surface contact).

Further, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodation portion 6001, as shown in FIGS. It is positioned to abut the left edge of portion 6053 .

Further, in a state in which the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 protrudes downward from the accommodating portion 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating portion 6001. be done. The connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted from above into the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001. Thus, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 are interlockably connected via the connecting shaft 6055 and the connecting protrusion 6037 .

As shown in FIG. 44(b), the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is arranged in front of the connecting protrusion 6037 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037).

Further, in a state in which the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted through the guiding opening portion 6014 of the housing portion 6001 from above.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located at the first guide opening of the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017 of the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001. 6016 (more specifically, abutting the right end of the first guide opening 6016).

As described above, in the state where the left side edge of the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is aligned with the first guide opening 6016. is in contact with the right end of the

44 and 48, the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 (in more detail, describes in detail the regulation of unintended rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintended movement of the shutter 6002).

In this embodiment, the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 does not mean opening according to the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003, but an external force applied directly to the shutter 6002 (for example, a game ball hitting the shutter 6002). collision of the shutter 6002, or a fraudulent act on the shutter 6002 performed by a fraudulent person).

In the following description, the direction of rotation of each member is based on the plan view unless otherwise specified. Further, in the following description, a state in which unintended opening of the shutter 6002 is restricted by the restricting member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001 is referred to as a "locked state."

In the special electric accessory 6000 assembled as described above, when an external force (a force that causes the shutter 6002 to slide backward) is applied directly to the shutter 6002, the opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023 , a force is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 to rotate it clockwise.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block 6054 of the restriction member 6005 move backward (that is, in the moving direction when the link arm rotates clockwise). abutted. Therefore, when a force that rotates clockwise is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 , the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise to the restriction member 6005 via the restriction projection 6046 and the restriction block 6054 . A rotating force is transmitted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 44(b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 (more specifically, the right end of the first guide opening 6016 and the guide shaft 6056). abutting). That is, the edge of the first guide opening 6016 (hereinafter referred to as the front edge) is arranged in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 (moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). be. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 48( a ), even if a counterclockwise rotating force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the restricting member 6005 , the guiding shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is first Since it interferes with the front edge of the guide opening 6016, the restricting member 6005 cannot rotate.

As described above, since the restricting member 6005 cannot rotate, the link arm 6004 transmitting force to the restricting member 6005 cannot rotate either. Further, since the link arm 6004 cannot rotate, the shutter 6002 transmitting force to the link arm 6004 cannot move either. That is, even when an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 does not move backward against the external force and can maintain the closed state.

As described above, when the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guiding opening 6016, the shutter 6002 is moved as intended by the regulating member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001. Unintended opening (more specifically, unintended rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintended movement of the shutter 6002) is restricted (locked state).

When the link arm 6004 transmits a counterclockwise rotating force to the restricting member 6005 in the locked state, the rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 are separated. The front side surface presses each other with a relatively strong force. However, the rear side surface of the restricting projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005 are in surface contact, not point contact, as described above. can be made

44 to 48, the configuration for opening the shutter 6002 according to the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003 when the shutter 6002 is closed will be described in detail.

As will be described later, when the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003, unlike the case where the external force is applied directly to the shutter 6002, the regulation member 6005 and the housing portion 6001 The locked state by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) is released.

When the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 (when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state), when opening the shutter 6002, the power generating section 6032 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is energized. is done. When the power generator 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 starts to move leftward as shown in FIGS. Further, when the plunger 6033 starts to move leftward, the power transmission part 6034 (connecting opening 6036 and connecting projection 6037) fixed to the right end of the plunger 6033 also moves leftward.

When the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission section 6034 moves to the left, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 between the connecting protrusion 6037 and the regulating member 6005. . Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 leftward. Thus, when power is transmitted from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 , the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the accommodating portion 6001 .

Specifically, the central tubular portion 6053 of the restricting member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 , and the right edge portion of the central tubular portion 6053 comes into contact with the boss portion 6013 . In addition, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves leftward with respect to the first guide opening 6016 of the housing portion 6001, and moves toward the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017). part).

In the following description, the movement of the power transmission portion 6034 until the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the restricting member 6005 abuts against the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is moved to the first guide opening of the housing portion 6001). 6016) is referred to as "first movement of the power transmission portion 6034". Also, the movement of the power transmission portion 6034 after the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is moved to the first guide opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001). ) is referred to as "second movement of the power transmission portion 6034".

Further, when the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmitting section 6034 moves leftward by the first movement of the power transmitting section 6034, the connecting opening 6036 moves leftward with respect to the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Then, the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 abuts on the connecting shaft 6045 . In addition, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 does not press the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 during the movement. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004.

In the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034, the timing at which the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 contacts the left end portion of the first guide opening portion 6016 (the rear end portion of the second guide opening portion 6017) The timing at which the right edge of the central tubular portion 6053 of the member 6005 contacts the boss portion 6013 and the timing at which the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 contacts the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 are all They are set to be approximately the same.

In addition, in the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned inside the first guide opening 6016, and forward of the guide shaft 6056 (the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). The forward edge of the first guide opening 6016 is located in the direction of movement when moving. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034, even if a force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005 to rotate it counterclockwise, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is Since it interferes with the front side edge of the first guide opening 6016, the locked state by the regulation member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001 is continued.

Further, as described above, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004. In other words, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted from the power transmission section 6034 to the regulation member 6005, but is not transmitted to other members (for example, the link arm 6004). In this way, although the restricting member 6005 moves leftward, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 do not rotate (move) in any direction, and maintain the attitude when the shutter 6002 is closed. Become.

In this state, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, when the power transmission section 6034 moves further to the left (when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement), the connecting protrusion of the power transmission section 6034 Power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulation member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulation member 6005 and the control member 6037 . Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 leftward.

Here, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge portion of the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 . That is, the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 cannot move leftward with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 . Therefore, when the connecting projection 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 to the left, the restricting member 6005 tends to rotate counterclockwise about the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 .

Further, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 contacts the left end portion of the first guide opening portion 6016 (the rear end portion of the second guide opening portion 6017) of the housing portion 6001. are in contact. In addition, the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to partially overlap with a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss portion 6013 . That is, in front of the guiding shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 (moving direction when the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise), an opening is formed along the locus along which the guiding shaft 6056 moves ( There is nothing to interfere when the guide shaft 6056 moves).

In this way, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 leftward and the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise about the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, as shown in FIG. As shown in (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is guided by the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001 and moves forward through the second guide opening 6017 . Note that when the restricting member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 moves rearward relative to the power transmission portion 6034. continue.

Note that the restricting member 6005 changes the position of the center of rotation in the horizontal direction between when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the first movement and when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement as described above. ing. Specifically, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the first movement, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodation portion 6001 that contacts the left edge portion of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned at the center of rotation. and Further, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 that contacts the right side edge portion of the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned as the center of rotation.

In this way, by varying the position of the center of rotation of the regulating member 6005, the front side of the first guide opening 6016 is moved forward of the guide shaft 6056 (moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). It toggles whether there is an edge or the second guide opening 6017 extends.

Thus, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the locked state of the restricting member 6005 and the guiding opening portion 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001 is released, and the guiding shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is accommodated. The second guide opening 6017 of the portion 6001 can be moved forward. That is, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 leftward, thereby rotating the regulating member 6005 counterclockwise about the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. do.

Also, when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 is in contact with the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 . That is, power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the link arm 6004 via the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 and the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 . Specifically, the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 leftward. Thus, when the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 pushes the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 leftward, the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise.

When the power transmission unit 6034 is in the first movement (locked state), when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, that is, when the link arm 6004 and the restricting protrusion 6046 When a counterclockwise rotating force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulation member 6005 via the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the first guide opening. The restricting member 6005 could not rotate because it interferes with the front edge of the portion 6016 .

However, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 can move forward through the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001 as described above. The restriction block portion 6054 of 6005 is also moved rearward. Note that when the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves rearward, it moves away from the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 .

Therefore, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, if the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 do not interfere with That is, the link arm 6004 can rotate counterclockwise.

Further, when the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the shutter 6002 via the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 and the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 . Specifically, the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 pushes the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 rearward. Thus, when the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 pushes the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward, the shutter 6002 starts to slide backward.

The second movement of the power transmission portion 6034 ends when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001, as shown in FIG. Thus, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001, the shutter 6002 is opened.

As described above, the shutter 6002 is opened from the closed state, but when the shutter 6002 is closed from the open state, the shutter 6002 is opened after de-energization of the big winning opening solenoid 6003. Various members (shutter 6002, big winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulating member 6005) operate in the reverse order.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, for example, a technique of providing a displacement member that can be displaced between a position where it is easy for a game ball to pass and a position where it is difficult for a game ball to pass with respect to a passage area. is publicly known. For example, as described in JP-A-2008-307103.

In the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, a door member of a winning device is provided as the displacement member. A solenoid is employed as a drive source for displacing the door member (reciprocating between the open position and the closed position).

Further, in the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, the locking portion provided on the transmission means of the solenoid and the engaging protrusion provided on the door member come into contact with each other to close the door. The opening of the door member can be restricted (locked) at the position.

However, since a certain degree of accuracy is required in the positional relationship between the locking portion and the engaging protrusion, if the solenoid deteriorates over time or foreign matter enters the solenoid drive path, etc. no longer come into contact with In this way, if the locking portion and the engaging protrusion do not come into complete contact with each other, the door member may rattle at the closing position, or the door member may be slightly opened (unintended displacement may occur). possibility), which was inconvenient.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and is to more reliably restrict unintended displacement of a displacement member when the displacement member is displaced to a position where passage of a game ball is difficult. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes: a game board 17 having a game area 20 on which game balls roll; and a second starting port 440 provided in the game area 20 through which game balls can pass. (passage area), and a displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004 ), a large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means) for driving the displacement member, and a main control circuit 100 (driving control means) capable of controlling the large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means). The displacement member is in a state where displacement is controlled to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, and the main control circuit 100 (drive control means) moves the displacement member to a position where the game ball can easily pass When the displacement control is not performed, the displacement member can be locked at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through (regulation member 6005 and guidance opening 6014 of accommodation unit 6001). The solenoid 6003 (driving means) includes: a power generation section 6032 that generates power; and power transmission capable of transmitting the power generated by the power generation section 6032 to the displacement member by being in contact with at least a part of the displacement member. and a portion 6034, wherein the locking means includes a regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) that regulates the displacement of the displacement member by coming into contact with at least a part of the displacement member, and defines a displacement path of the regulating portion. The displacement path includes a first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section) and the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section). The displacement member includes a different second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section), and the displacement member is at least partially in contact with the power transmission unit 6034 and has a position where the game ball can easily pass and a position where the game ball can pass. The regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is displacement-controlled along the guide opening 6014 (displacement guide portion) as the power transmission portion 6034 is displaced. Means maintains the locked state of the displacement member when the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is positioned in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), and the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is When located in the second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section), it releases the locked state of the displacement member.

With such a configuration, the locking means (the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001) can be locked only when the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is positioned at the right end of the first guide opening 6016, for example. Instead, the locked state of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004 ) can be maintained while the guide shaft 6056 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 . That is, even if the positional relationship between the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the accommodation portion 6001 is slightly deviated (for example, even if the power transmission portion 6034 is not arranged in a normal position), the locked state is maintained. can be maintained. Therefore, when the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, unintended displacement of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is more reliably regulated. can do.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) includes movement and rotation, and the locking means is such that the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) When positioned in one guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the rotation of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is restricted and locked while the movement of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is possible. When the state is maintained and the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is positioned in the second guide opening portion 6017 (second displacement section), the position of the rotation center of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is adjusted to the position of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion). By positioning the member 6005 (regulating portion) in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) can be rotated to release the locked state. It is something to do.

With such a configuration, the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion), which is one member, can switch between maintenance and release of the locked state by combining two operations (movement and rotation). In this way, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where members for performing two operations (movement and rotation) are provided. Especially in the special electric accessory as in the present embodiment, since the arrangement space of the parts is limited, it is beneficial to have such a configuration.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement member includes a shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion) for guiding a game ball, and a link arm 6004 (link portion) connected to the game ball guiding portion. and the power transmission portion 6034 is connected to the link arm 6004
(link part).

With such a configuration, the power transmission section 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link section) instead of the shutter 6002 (game ball guide section), so that the power transmission section 6034 does not come into direct contact with the shutter 6002 (game ball guide section). The shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion) can be locked.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 6000 has been described as an example of an object to be locked, but the object to be locked is not limited to this, and may be an ordinary electric accessory or the like. may

Also, when the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034 is completed, the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves leftward with respect to the link arm 6004 . In this way, when the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004, the regulation protrusion portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 abut against each other. can be released. That is, the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005 can be arranged so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

According to such a configuration, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, when the link arm 6004 is about to rotate counterclockwise, the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction member 6005 are separated from each other. interference with the restriction block portion 6054 (restriction of rotation of the link arm 6004) can be more reliably prevented.

Further, even when the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034 is completed, the contact state between the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 is maintained, and the link arm When the 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 presses the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005, thereby assisting the rotation of the restricting member 6005. .

Also, the configuration of the guide opening 6014 (the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017) is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. For example, the guidance opening 6014 (displacement guidance section) is closed when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise while the power transmission section 6034 is in the first movement (locked state). In addition, it may be formed in front of the guide shaft 6056 (moving direction when the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) so as to interfere with the movement of the guide shaft 6056 . From the viewpoint of promoting smooth movement of the guide shaft 6056, the configuration according to the present embodiment formed along the movement path of the guide shaft 6056 is desirable.

[Configuration of ordinary electric accessory unit 400]
The configuration of the normal electric accessory unit 400 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. FIG. 49 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the normal electric accessory unit 400 as viewed obliquely from the upper right front. FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the normal electric accessory unit 400 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The normal electric accessory unit 400 is attached and fixed to the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 within the game area 20 . The normal electric accessory unit 400 includes general winning ports 53, 54, 55, a second starting port 440, a second starting port switch 441 for detecting winning of game balls to the second starting port 440, and an out port 450. And, a housing member 443 that receives the game ball that has won the second start port 440 and the game ball received in the out port 450 and discharges it outside the pachinko game machine 1, and the front surfaces of the second start port 440 and the out port 450 and a normal electric accessory 460. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are formed in the plate-shaped opening forming member 420 . The opening forming member 420 is formed with a hole 442 through which a rotating shaft 4622 of a blade member 4620 (to be described later) passes.

The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in front view, and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in front view.

A wall 4452 that partitions the second starting port 440 and the out port 450 is formed on the rear surface of the front cover 445 . This wall 4452, when the blade member 4620 is opened, the game ball that has passed through the upper part of the blade member 4620 (game ball that wins the second start opening 440) is received in the out port 450, It has a function to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 440 when the blade member 4620 is not opened.

The second starting port switch 441 is arranged on the back side of the second starting port 440 so that a game ball that has won the second starting port 440 can be detected.

The housing member 443 is provided with openings 4434 and 4436 at portions corresponding to the second starting port 440 and the out port 450, respectively. A game ball is accommodated in the opening 4434, and a game ball received in the out port 450 is accommodated in the opening 4436. - 特許庁The game balls accommodated in the openings 4434 and 4436 are collected by a game ball circulation facility provided in an island facility (not shown). In addition, the housing member 443 has a hole 4432 through which a rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 (to be described later) passes.

[Configuration of normal electric accessories 460]
The configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53. FIG. FIG. 51 is an example of a diagram showing a normal electric accessory 460, a second starting switch 441, and a housing member 443. FIG. FIG. 52 is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. FIG. FIG. 53 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460 viewed obliquely from the upper right.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a base cover 4610 , a blade member 4620 , a starter solenoid 4630 , and a power transmission mechanism 4640 that transmits power from the starter solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620 .

The base cover 4610 accommodates the starting solenoid 4630 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 with the accommodation member 443 and is attached to the rear side of the opening forming member 420 . The rear side of the base cover 4610 is attached and fixed to the transparent panel 172 described above. A guide groove 4612 elongated in the left-right direction is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610 . A bearing (not shown) is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610 to rotatably support a pin 4648 to be described later.

The blade member 4620 is provided with a rotating shaft 4622 below the plane of the drawing. The rotating shaft 4622 passes through a hole 442 formed in the opening forming member 420 and a hole 4432 formed in the housing member 443, and is rotatably supported by a bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, which will be described later. The rotating shaft 4622 has a notched portion that is supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, and has a non-circular cross-sectional shape in the axial direction. Further, when the power from the starting port solenoid 4630 is transmitted to the rotary shaft 4622 as a rotational force by the power transmission mechanism 4640, the blade member 4620 rotates about the rotary shaft 4622 as the rotation center. In the present embodiment, blade member 4620 is in a closed state when it is standing, and is in an open state when it rotates rightward about rotating shaft 4622 from the closed state.

The starting port solenoid 4630 includes a plunger 4632 that expands and contracts in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and has a flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 (the tip on the right side when viewed from the front). The plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630 is normally (non-excited) extending rightward in front view, and when energized, the plunger 4632 moves leftward in front view (retraction direction).

As the plunger 4632 of the starting solenoid 4630 expands and contracts in the left-right direction, the power transmission mechanism 4640 converts the power into rotational force and transmits it to the rotary shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 . The power transmission mechanism 4640 includes a blade connecting member 4642 connected to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, a flange connecting member 4646 connected to the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, and a blade connecting member 4642. and a link member 4644 provided between the flange connecting member 4646.

The blade connecting member 4642 has a bearing 46444 that supports the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 . The bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 corresponds to the shape of the rotating shaft 4622 to be supported. Therefore, the blade connecting member 4642 rotates together with the rotating shaft 4622 around the rotating shaft 4622 as the center of rotation. Further, the blade connecting member 4642 has a support shaft 46426 protruding to the rear side. The support shaft 46426 can revolve around a rotation shaft 4622 supported by bearings 46424 .

The link member 4644 is a V-shaped member when viewed from the front, and a long hole 46442 is formed at the lower end when viewed from the front. A support shaft 46426 of the blade connecting member 4642 is slidably connected to the long hole 46442 . A support shaft 46446 protruding rearward is formed at the upper end of the link member 4644 in front view. An engagement shaft 46448 is formed below the support shaft 46446 so as to protrude toward the rear side. A bearing 46444 that rotatably supports a pin 4648 is formed in the central portion of the link member 4644 (the portion where the angle of the dogleg changes). The link member 4644 is rotatable around a pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 . When the link member 4644 rotates about the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444, the support shaft 46446 and the engaging shaft 46448 also rotate about the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444.

The flange connecting member 4646 has a flange clamping portion 46462 , a connecting hole 46464 and an engaging groove 46466 . The flange clamping portion 46462 clamps the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting solenoid 4630 , and the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the direction of extension and retraction of the plunger 4632 as the plunger 4632 extends and retracts. A support shaft 46446 of the link member 4644 is connected to the connecting hole 46464 so as to move inside the connecting hole 46464 . The engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466 . Here, the engaging shaft 46448 has a teardrop shape with a pointed end in a cross section that traverses the longitudinal direction. The link member 4644 engages with the engagement groove 46466 at this tip. Further, the flange connecting member 4646 has a guide piece 46468 elongated in the left-right direction on the rear side (the side of the base cover 4610). This guide piece 46468 is guided by a guide groove 4612 formed in the base cover 4610 .

[Description of the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, the operation of the normal electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. FIG. 54 shows the state of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (illustrated by the dashed line), and the normal state when the blade member 4620 is in transition from the closed state to the open state. FIG. 10 is an example of a rear view showing a mode of an electric accessory 460 (indicated by a solid line). FIG. 55 shows the aspect of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in transition (illustrated by the dashed line), and the aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the open state (solid line). ) is a rear view showing the .

When the starter solenoid 4630 is energized, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (leftward in front view (rightward in FIGS. 54 and 55)). As the plunger 4632 moves in the retraction direction, the flange 4634 (see FIGS. 49 and 50) moves in the retraction direction. When the flange 4634 moves in the contracting direction, the flange connecting member 4646 that clamps the flange 4634 between the flange clamping portions 46462 moves in the contracting direction. When the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the contracting direction, the engaging shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engaging groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged. When the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connection member 4646 is disengaged, the link member 4644 rotates about the pin 4648 pivotally supported in the pin insertion hole 46444. It rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 54 and 55) when viewed. At this time, the link member 4644 can move downward inside the connecting hole 46464 of the flange connecting member 4646 . When the link member 4644 rotates counterclockwise in a front view around the pin 4648 pivotally supported in the pin insertion hole 46444, the support shaft 46426 slidably connected in the long hole 46442 of the blade connecting member 4644 rotates. The blade connecting member 4642 rotates clockwise around the rotating shaft 4622, and the blade member 4620 operates toward the open state.

When the vane member 4620 moves from the open state to the closed state, the starter solenoid 4630 is de-energized so that the plunger 4632 moves in the extending direction, which is the opposite movement from the operation from the closed state to the open state. done by In order to smoothly engage the engagement shaft 46448 with the engagement groove 46466 during operation of the blade member 4620 from the open state to the closed state, the portion of the engagement groove 46466 that contacts the engagement shaft 46448 is obliquely downward right (diagonally downward left in FIGS. 54 and 55) when viewed from the front.

[Explanation of the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, referring to FIG. 56, functions of the normal electric accessory 460 will be described. FIG. 56 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, and (A) is a diagram for explaining that the blade member 4620 is blocked from opening. and (B) are diagrams for explaining that the blade member 4620 is allowed to open. 56(A) and (B) omit illustration of the starting solenoid 4630. As shown in FIG.

When the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (when the plunger 4632 of the starter solenoid 4630 (see FIG. 54, for example) is de-energized), the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466. Therefore, the link member 4644 cannot rotate (rotate around the pin 4648 pivotally supported in the pin insertion hole 46444) (see FIG. 56(a)). Therefore, unless the plunger 4632 moves in the retraction direction (unless the starter solenoid 4630 is energized except for special circumstances such as failure), the blade member 4620 cannot be opened even if it is attempted to open. Therefore, even if a force is applied from the outside to illegally open the blade member 4620, this can be prevented.

On the other hand, when the starter solenoid 4630 is energized, the plunger 4632 moves in the retraction direction as described above, disengages the engagement shaft 46448 from the engagement groove 46466, and opens the blade member 4620 (Fig. 56(b)).

In this way, the link member 4644 forming the engaging shaft 46448, the flange connecting member 4646 forming the engaging groove 46466, and the starting solenoid 4630 prevent the blade member 4620 from being illegally opened. It functions as unauthorized opening prevention means.

[Configuration of upper front accessory 1000]
The configuration of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. FIG. 57 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 58 is an example of a rear view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode. FIG. 59 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 60 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The upper front accessory 1000 has a base plate 1010 to which various members constituting the upper front accessory 1000 are attached, a decoration plate 1030 attached and fixed to the front side of the base plate 1010, and an operation on the base plate 1010. A movable decoration 1040 configured, a driving motor 1050 as a driving source for operating the movable decoration 1040, a plurality of gears 1060 capable of transmitting the power of the driving motor 1050 to the movable decoration 1040, A force transmission member 1020 that transmits the power from the driving motor 1050 to the movable decoration 1040 via these gears 1060, and a coil spring 1070 as an example of an elastic member that biases the movable decoration 1040 toward the origin position. , and a photosensor 1080 (see FIG. 60) for detecting the position of the movable decoration 1040 . The gear 1060 and the force transmission member 1020 function as a force transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decoration 1040.

The base plate 1010 is a plate-like member attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 so as to be positioned forward of the upper back accessory 1100 . A first support shaft 1011 , a second support shaft 1012 , a third support shaft 1013 and a fourth support shaft 1014 are formed on the front side of the base plate 1010 to be connected to various members of the force transmission member 1020 . The base plate 1010 also has a notch 1016 formed at a position where a bearing 10226 of a first transmission member 1022 described later is positioned when the movable decoration 1040 is at the origin position, and a cutout portion 1016 formed so that the movable decoration 1040 is positioned at the origin position. A notch portion 1017 is formed at a position corresponding to a later-described coil spring support shaft 1042 (lower side end portion of the coil spring 1070) formed on the back side of the movable decorative body 1040 when it is in the state. In this specification, the cutout portion 1016 and the cutout portion 1017 are referred to as a rear-side first cutout portion 1016 and a rear-side second cutout portion 1017, respectively. Further, the base plate 1010 has a bearing 1054 that supports a hollow boss 10662 formed in the center of the first gear 1062, which will be described later, and a hole 1015 corresponding to the movable range of the boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067, which will be described later. , and a hole 1018 corresponding to the movable range of a position detection piece 10682 of a position detection gear 1068, which will be described later.

The decorative plate 1030 is decorated on the front side (not shown). The decoration plate 1030 is formed at a portion (on the front side corresponding to the rear-side first notch 1016) where the bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022, which will be described later, is positioned when the movable decoration 1040 is at the origin position. and a cutout portion 1038 formed at a portion where the lower end portion of the coil spring 1070 is positioned (a position on the front side corresponding to the second rear cutout portion 1017). In this specification, the cutout portion 1036 and the cutout portion 1038 are referred to as a front-side first cutout portion 1036 and a front-side second cutout portion 1038, respectively.

The movable decorative body 1040 includes a coil spring support shaft 1042 connected to the lower end of the coil spring 1070, a first transmission member side support shaft 1044 supported by a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later, and a A second transmission member side support shaft 1046 that is pivotally supported by the bearing 10264 of the second transmission member 1026 is formed.

The drive motor 1050 is attached and fixed to the base plate 1010 via a motor attachment member 1054 . Drive motor 1050 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotational speed of drive motor 1050 is reduced to output power from motor output shaft 1052 .

Gear 1060 includes a first gear 1062 , a second gear 1064 , a third gear 1066 , a fourth gear 1067 and a position detection gear 1068 . Among these gears, the first gear 1062, the second gear 1064, the third gear 1066, and the fourth gear 1067 have the function of transmitting the power output from the motor output shaft 1052 to the force transmission member 1020. Detector gear 1068 has no such function.

A hollow shaft 10622 is formed in the center of the first gear 1062 . A motor output shaft 1052 is press-fitted into this hollow shaft 10622 . Accordingly, when the drive motor 1050 rotates, the first gear 1062 rotates around the center of the first gear 1062 (motor output shaft 1052).

The fourth gear 1067 is formed with a boss 10672 on the front side at a predetermined distance from the center 10674 in the radial direction. A position detection piece 10682 is formed on the front side of the position detection gear 1068 at a predetermined distance from the center 10684 in the radial direction. The position detection gear 1068 has substantially the same diameter as the fourth gear 1067 . Therefore, the position detection gear 1068 rotates by the same rotation angle in the opposite direction in synchronization with the rotation of the fourth gear 1067 . In this way, the position of the movable decoration 1040 can be detected. In this embodiment, the position detection of the movable decorative body 1040 detects whether or not it is at the origin position.

The force transmission member 1020 includes a first transmission member 1022 to which power from the drive motor 1050 is transmitted via a gear 1060, a rack 1024 to which the power transmitted to the first transmission member 1022 is transmitted, and a first transmission member and a second transmission member 1026 to which power from 1022 is transmitted via rack 1024 .

The first transmission member 1022 is a fan-shaped plate-like member, and has a bearing 10222 formed at the center in the radial direction. This bearing 10222 pivotally supports the first support shaft 1011 formed on the base plate 1010 . Of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b, the first transmission member 1022 extends from the radially outer side to the inner side (that is, the center of the first transmission member 1022 (bearing 10222)) along the left side 1022a when viewed from the front. A long hole 10224 is formed in the facing direction. A boss 10672 of a fourth gear 1067 penetrating through the hole 1015 is connected to the elongated hole 10224 so as to be movable inside the elongated hole 10224 . A bearing 10226 is formed at the radially outer end along the right side 1022b in front view of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 . This bearing 10226 supports a support shaft 1044 formed on the movable decoration 1040 . A side 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 is substantially horizontal when the movable decoration 1040 is at the origin position. Further, the first transmission member 1022 includes a gear 10228 that is coaxial with the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the first transmission member 1022 concerned.

The second transmission member 1026 is a rod-shaped member that is substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, and has a bearing 10262 at the left end in front view and a bearing 10262 at the right end in front view. A bearing 10264 is formed. Bearing 10262 pivotally supports fourth support shaft 1014 of base plate 1010 . The bearing 10264 pivotally supports the support shaft 1046 of the movable decoration 1040 . The second transmission member 1026 also includes a gear 10266 coaxial with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262). This gear 10266 has substantially the same diameter as the gear 10228 provided on the first transmission member 1022 .

A rack 1024 that transmits power from the first transmission member 1022 to the second transmission member 1026 is provided between the first transmission member 1022 and the second transmission member 1026 . The rack 1024 is a rod-shaped member provided substantially horizontally, and has a gear 10244 on the right side (first transmission member 1022 side) in front view, and a gear 10248 on the left side (second transmission member 1026 side) in front view. is formed. The gear 10244 meshes with the gear 10228, and converts the rotational power of the gear 10228 into a substantially horizontal direction. The gear 10248 further converts the power converted in the substantially horizontal direction by the gear 10244 into the rotational direction and transmits it to the second transmission member 1026 . The rack 1024 has a substantially horizontally elongated hole 10242 formed on the right side (gear 10244 side) when viewed from the front, and a substantially horizontally elongated hole 10246 formed on the left side (gear 10248 side) when viewed from the front. A second support shaft 1012 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10242 , and a third support shaft 1013 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10246 .

The coil spring 1070 biases the movable decoration 1040 toward the origin position. The coil spring 1070 has an upper end attached and fixed to the back surface of the base plate 1010 and a lower end attached and fixed to a coil spring support shaft 1042 formed on the back surface of the movable decorative body 1040 . When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located in the front-side second notch 1038 and the back-side second notch 1017 .

Photosensor 1080 is provided so as to be positioned in photosensor arrangement region 1019 formed on base plate 1010 . The photosensor 1080 detects the position of the movable decoration 1040 by detecting the position detection piece 10682 provided on the position detection gear 1068 . In this embodiment, the photosensor 1080 is provided so that the position detection piece 10682 can be detected when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position.

[Description of the operation of the upper front accessory 1000]
Next, the operation of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63. FIG. FIG. 61 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 62 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decoration 1040 is moving downward. FIG. 63 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decoration 1040 has moved downward to the operation limit position. In FIGS. 61 to 63, constituent members of the force transmission member 1020 are indicated by dashed lines so that the movement of each member can be understood.

When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the drive motor 1050 rotates, and when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. do. When the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1064 meshing with the teeth of the first gear 1062 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1064 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1066 meshing with the teeth of the second gear 1064 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth gear 1067 meshing with the third gear 1066 rotates clockwise about the center 10674 of the fourth gear 1067 when viewed from the front. When the fourth gear 1067 rotates clockwise about the center 10674 as viewed from the front, the boss 10672 also rotates about the center 10674 in the circumferential direction and moves clockwise along the inside of the hole 1015 . Since the boss 10672 is movably connected within the elongated hole 10224, when the boss 10672 rotates clockwise around the center 10674 as viewed from the front, the first transmission member 1022 (that is, the gear 10228) moves toward the first support shaft. It rotates clockwise with 1011 (bearing 10222) as the center of rotation when viewed from the front. When the first transmission member 1022 rotates clockwise around the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front, the support shaft 1044 supported by the bearing 10226 rotates clockwise around the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front. move to

Further, when the gear 10228 rotates clockwise about the first support shaft 1011 when viewed from the front, the power of the gear 10228 is transmitted to the gear 10244, and the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right when viewed from the front. Here, the second support shaft 1012 connected to the elongated hole 10242 and the third support shaft 1013 connected to the elongated hole 10246 function as guides for moving the rack 1024 substantially horizontally. When the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in front view, this power is transmitted to the gear 10266, and the gear 10266 rotates clockwise around the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) in front view. When the gear 10266 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 in front view, the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) in front view. When the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front, the support shaft 1046 supported by the bearing 10264 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front. move to

Here, the gear 10228 and the gear 10266 have the same diameter, the distance from the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) to the support shaft 1044 (bearing 10226), and the distance from the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) to the support shaft. The distance to 1046 (bearing 10264) is the same. Therefore, when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, the support shafts 1044 and 1046 are synchronously rotated around the first support shaft 1011 and the fourth support shaft 1014, respectively. operate around. As a result, the movable decorative body 1040 moves downward (that is, toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) while maintaining a substantially horizontal state and drawing an arc clockwise when viewed from the front.

When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the position detection gear 1068 meshing with the third gear 1066 also rotates clockwise about the center 10684 of the position detection gear 1068 when viewed from the front. Rotate. The position detection gear 1068 does not mesh with the fourth gear 1067 , but the fourth gear 1067 and the position detection gear 1068 have the same diameter and both mesh with the third gear 1066 . Therefore, the rotation angle of the fourth gear 1067 and the rotation angle of the position detection gear 1068 are the same. The rotation angle of the gear 1067 and thus the position of the movable decoration 1040 can be detected.

When the driving motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the movable decoration body 1040 maintains a substantially horizontal state and arcs counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the reverse movement of the above-described movement. It operates upward while drawing

In this manner, the movable decoration 1040 can operate between the origin position and the operation limit position. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1040 from the origin position toward the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (movable body presentation) is performed when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440. It is based on the result of the hit check performed on the On the other hand, the movement from the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the origin position is performed when the movable object effect based on the result of the current hit determination is completed, and is performed based on the result of the hit determination after the next time. It will prepare for the movable body production to be performed.

[Configuration of upper back accessory 1100]
The configuration of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 70. FIG. FIG. 64 is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 65 is an example of a back view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode. FIG. 66 is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 seen obliquely from the front right. FIG. 67 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 68 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view). 69, (A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 65, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the X portion shown in (A). 70, (A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line BB shown in FIG. 65, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the Y portion shown in (A).

Line AA shown in FIG. 65 is a vertical line passing through the center of a bearing 11724 (described later) formed in an extended portion 11741 (described later) of the upper left arm 1172, and is shown in FIG. Line BB is a line that vertically traverses the longitudinal portion of upper left arm 1172 .

The upper back accessory 1100 is made of a substantially flat metal plate and has a shape of a substantially picture frame without a lower side, and has a base member 1180 on which various members are attached, and a left driving mechanism having a left motor 1151 and the like. 1150, a right driving mechanism 1160 having a right motor 1161, etc., a decorative cover 1130 covering the left motor 1151, etc. from the front so that the player cannot see it, and a right motor 1161, etc. A movable decorative body 1110 that can move up and down by a decorative cover 1140, a left driving mechanism 1150, and a right driving mechanism 1160, and a pair of left and right covering decorative bodies 1120 that are pivotally supported by the movable decorative body 1110 and movable. A pantograph mechanism 1170, one end of which is connected to the base member 1180 and the other end of which is connected to the covering decoration 1120, operates (contracts in a substantially diamond shape) in accordance with the vertical movement of the movable decoration 1110, and the pantograph mechanism 1170. A regulating member 1190, which is a member for regulating the operation and is attached to a substantially central portion of the base member 1180, and a static ornament 1196 which is a member decorated on the front surface and is fixedly attached to the base member 1180. Prepare.

The base member 1180 includes a central plate portion 1182 extending in the horizontal direction, a left vertical plate portion 1184 extending downward from the left end of the central plate portion 1182, and a right vertical plate portion extending downward from the right end of the central plate portion 1182. 1186.

A static decoration 1196 is attached to the front surface of the central plate portion 1182 as a decoration that is decorated on the front and does not operate. A horizontally long rectangular center plate 1188 is provided upward at the upper end of the center plate portion 1182 . A front surface of the central plate 1188 has a pair of left support shaft 11882 and right support shaft 11884 projecting forward.

A restricting member 1190 is attached to the front surface of the central plate 1188 below the left spindle 11882 and the right spindle 11884 to restrict the pantograph mechanism 1170 from operating above a certain level. The regulating member 1190 is a trapezoidal plate member and has a left contact surface 1192 inclined downward to the left and a right contact surface 1194 inclined downward to the right.

The left vertical plate portion 1184 is configured to allow attachment of a left motor attachment member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is attached. A hole 11842 is formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the left motor 1151 when the left motor mounting member 1152 is mounted. A left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 and a left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 are formed on the front surface of the left vertical plate portion 1184 . A substantially C-shaped hole 11846 is formed around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 when viewed from the front. This hole 11846 is formed corresponding to the trajectory along which the support shaft 11562 formed in the driven gear 1156 moves when the driven gear 1156 (to be described later) rotates.

The right vertical plate portion 1186 is configured to allow attachment of a right motor attachment member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is attached. A hole 11862 is formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the right motor 1161 when the right motor mounting member 1162 is attached. A right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 and a right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 are formed on the front surface of the right vertical plate portion 1186 . A substantially C-shaped hole 11866 is formed around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 when viewed from the front. This hole 11866 is formed corresponding to the trajectory along which the support shaft 11662 formed in the driven gear 1166 moves when the driven gear 1166, which will be described later, rotates.

The left drive mechanism 1150 has a left motor 1151 , a left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted, a drive gear 1157 , a driven gear 1156 , a left arm member 1155 and a left transmission arm 1154 . Of these, the left arm member 1155 , the driven gear 1156 and the drive gear 1157 function as left drive transmission members that transmit power from the left motor 1151 to the left transmission arm 1154 . The installation area of the left drive transmission member in the vertical direction (operating direction of the movable decoration 1110) is provided outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when viewed from the front. It is smaller than the operating range. A hollow shaft 11544 formed at one (right) end of the left transmission drive arm 1154 is pivotally supported by the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the area where the left drive transmission member is installed.

The left motor 1151 is a motor capable of forward and reverse rotation. Left motor 1151 is attached to left motor mounting member 1152 . The left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted is attached to the left vertical plate portion 1184 so that the output shaft of the left motor 1151 is coaxial with the driving gear 1157 and passes through the hole 11842 formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184. can be attached to Therefore, when the left motor 1151 rotates, the drive gear 1157 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the left motor 1151 .

Driven gear 1156 meshes with driving gear 1157 . Driven gear 1156 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation when drive gear 1157 rotates. The driven gear 1156 is a gear with a larger diameter than the driving gear 1157 . As a result, the rotational force of the left motor 1151 transmitted from the driving gear 1157 is amplified. The driven gear 1156 also has a bearing 11564 in the center and a support shaft 11562 at a predetermined distance from the center on the front surface. A bearing 11564 is rotatably supported on the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 so that the driven gear 1156 can rotate around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 .

The left arm member 1155 is a member having a substantially inverted C shape when viewed from the front (substantially C shape when viewed from the rear), and has a left arm bearing 11552 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper surface) and the other end. A left arm support shaft 11554 is provided at the end (the end on the lower side of the paper surface). The left arm bearing 11552 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 11562 of the driven gear 1156 .

The left transmission arm 1154 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the left motor 1151 to the movable decoration 1110 via the drive gear 1157 , the driven gear 1156 and the left arm member 1155 . The left transmission arm 1154 has a hollow shaft 11544 protruding forward at one (left) end and an elongated hole 11542 at the other (center side) end. A boss 1112 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decoration 1110 ), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the long hole 11542 to support the movable decoration 1110 . The left transmission arm 1154 also has a left arm bearing 11548 rotatably supported on the left arm support shaft 11554 of the left arm member 1155 . The hollow shaft 11544 rotates around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the area where the left drive transmission member is installed, so that the left transmission arm 1154 can rotate (circularly move) around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848. Possibly pivoted. A coil spring 1153 as an example of an elastic member that urges the left transmission arm 1154 counterclockwise (leftward rotation direction) is externally inserted in the hollow shaft 11544 .

Right drive mechanism 1160 has right motor 1161 , right motor mounting member 1162 to which right motor 1161 is mounted, drive gear 1167 , driven gear 1166 , right arm member 1165 and right transmission arm 1164 . Of these, the right arm member 1165 , the driven gear 1166 and the drive gear 1167 function as right drive transmission members that transmit power from the right motor 1161 to the right transmission arm 1164 . The installation area of the right drive transmission member in the vertical direction (the direction in which the movable decoration 1110 operates) is provided outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when viewed from the front. It is smaller than the operating range. A hollow shaft 11644 formed at one (right) end of the right transmission drive arm 1164 is pivotally supported by the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 in the installation area of the right drive transmission member.

The right motor 1161 is a motor capable of forward and reverse rotation. Right motor 1161 is attached to right motor mounting member 1162 . A right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted is attached to the right vertical plate portion 1186 so that the output shaft of the right motor 1161 is coaxial with the drive gear 1167 and passes through a hole 11862 formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186. It is attached. Therefore, when the right motor 1161 rotates, the drive gear 1167 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the right motor 1161 .

Driven gear 1166 meshes with drive gear 1167 . Driven gear 1166 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation when drive gear 1167 rotates. The driven gear 1166 is a gear with a larger diameter than the driving gear 1167 . As a result, the torque of the right motor 1161 transmitted from the driving gear 1167 is amplified. The driven gear 1166 also has a bearing 11664 in the center and a support shaft 11662 at a predetermined distance from the center on the front surface. A bearing 11664 is rotatably supported on the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 so that the driven gear 1166 can rotate around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 .

The right arm member 1165 is a substantially C-shaped member when viewed from the front (substantially reversed C-shaped when viewed from the rear), and has a right arm bearing 11652 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper surface) and the other end. A right arm support shaft 11654 is provided at the part (the end on the lower side of the paper surface). Right arm bearing 11652 is rotatably supported on support shaft 11662 of driven gear 1166 .

The right transmission arm 1164 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the right motor 1161 to the movable decoration 1110 via the drive gear 1167 , the driven gear 1166 and the right arm member 1165 . The right transmission arm 1164 has a hollow shaft 11644 protruding forward at one (right) end and a long hole 11642 at the other (central) end. A boss 1114 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decoration 1110 ), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the long hole 11642 to support the movable decoration 1110 . The right transmission arm 1164 also has a right arm bearing 11648 rotatably supported on the right arm support shaft 11654 of the right arm member 1165 . A hollow shaft 11644 rotates around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 in the area where the right drive transmission member is installed, so that the right transmission arm 1164 can rotate (circularly move) around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868. Possibly pivoted. In addition, a coil spring 1163 as an example of an elastic member that biases the right transmission arm 1164 clockwise (right rotation direction) is fitted around the hollow shaft 11644 .

In this way, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 support the movable decorative body 1110 from both the left and right sides, and transmit power from the left motor 1154 and the right motor 1161 to the left drive transmission member and the right drive transmission member described above. is transmitted through

Pantograph mechanism 1170 has upper left arm 1172 , lower left arm 1174 , upper right arm 1176 and lower right arm 1178 . The pantograph mechanism 1170 has four arms, an upper left arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178, forming a substantially rhombus-shaped side, and deforming the shape of this substantially rhombus (upper left arm 1172). and the lower left arm 1174 (the angle formed by the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178). The upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are made of colorless and transparent resin. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin.

As for the above-mentioned "substantially diamond shape", of the four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, and the lower right arm 1178, for example, two sets of arms facing each other are parallel (for example, the upper left The lower arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 are parallel, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 are parallel), and the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 are of the same length. Shapes and squares are also envisioned. Also, among the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, for example, two sets of arms facing each other have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm The arms 1176 may have the same length) or may not have the same length. may have different lengths. That is, the lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are not limited to specific lengths, and various variations can be adopted. In addition, considering that each arm, that is, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) operates, it is not always necessary for the arms facing each other to be parallel, and the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) does not need to be parallel. It may be a form in which the facing arms change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state in accordance with the driving of , or a form in which the parallel state changes to the non-parallel state. In addition, regarding the above-mentioned "opposing arms are parallel", considering the structure in which the accessories (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) are driven, it may be difficult to obtain perfect parallelism. Therefore, if the tilt directions of the opposing arms are in the same direction, they are considered to be parallel (substantially parallel). Also, even if each of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 has a different length, the accessories (movable decoration 1110 and covered decoration 1120) can be moved (for example, from the origin position to the operation limit position). ), the length of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be varied.

The left upper arm 1172 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. It has a bearing 11724 in the part. Bearing 11722 is rotatably supported by left support shaft 11882 .

The left lower arm 1174 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. An extended portion 11741 extending upward (upper left arm 1172 side) is formed. The thickness of the extended portion 11741 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft 11742 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the extending portion 11741 at a position above the upper end 11743 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 . A hollow shaft 11744 is formed in the front-rear direction at the central end of the upper left arm 1172 .

The left upper arm 1172 and the left lower arm 1174 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting the bearing 11724 on the support shaft 11742 . The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are in the origin position (the position where both the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are in a horizontal state, for example, the mode shown in FIG. 65). Except for the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742), they are arranged substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the portions excluding the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742) are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. Also, the hollow shaft 11744 passes through the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decoration 1110 and is supported by the guide shaft 11224 . The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 .

The upper right arm 1176 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. It has a bearing 11764 in the part. Bearing 11762 is rotatably supported on right support shaft 11884 .

The lower right arm 1178 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. An extended portion 11781 is formed that extends upward (toward the lower right arm 1178 side). The thickness of the extended portion 11781 in the front-rear direction is thinner than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft 11782 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the extending portion 11781 at a position above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion of the lower right lower arm 1178 . A hollow shaft 11784 is formed in the front-rear direction at the central end of the right lower arm 1178 .

Upper right arm 1176 and lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting bearing 11764 on support shaft 11782 . The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other (bearing 11764 and a support shaft 11782), they are arranged substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 (the portions excluding the bearing 11764 and the support shaft 11782) are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction is within the thickness range of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 . Also, the hollow shaft 11784 passes through the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration 1110 and is supported by the guide shaft 11244 . The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 .

In the above description, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are arranged so that the longitudinal portions of the respective arms 1172 and 1174 are substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. A detailed positional relationship in the front-rear direction between 1172 and left lower arm 1174 will be described.

The left upper arm 1172 has a frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal portion, and a rearmost position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion (see FIGS. 69(B) and 70(B)). reference). The left lower arm 1174 has a frontmost position F2 in the longitudinal direction (thickness direction) and a rearmost position B2 in the longitudinal direction (see FIGS. 69(B) and 70(B)). ). Here, the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is positioned rearward of the frontmost position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction. The rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the left lower arm 1174 is located on the rear side of the rearmost surface position B2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 . However, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction is rearward of the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction and the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction. It is located in front of the surface position B1 (between the frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172). In other words, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are such that when a cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal portion of each arm 1172, 1174 is viewed, the thickness of each arm 1172, 1174 extends in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). ) (a positional relationship in which the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side).

In this embodiment, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. A left upper arm 1172 is configured to be positioned slightly rearward. Alternatively, however, the upper left arm 1172 may be positioned slightly forward of the lower left arm 1174 . That is, in the present embodiment, the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is located rearward of the frontmost position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction. The rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal portion of 1172 in the front-rear direction is located rearward from the rearmost surface position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction, and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction. The position B2 is located behind the frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left upper arm 1172 and in front of the rearmost position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172. Alternatively, the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is located rearward of the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction, and the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 The position of the rearmost surface in the front-rear direction of the upper right upper arm 1176 is positioned rearward from the position of the rearmost surface in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1176 , and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is the lower left arm 1174 . Rearward of the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion in the longitudinal direction and forward of the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 (the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is the left lower arm). 1174 and the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction).

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is behind the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction and the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172 . (Between the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172) is doing. However, instead of this, the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (of the upper left upper arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174, from the position of the most forward arm to the position of the most rearward arm) The rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 and the rearwardmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 may be substantially flush with each other within a range in which the thickness) can be reduced. Alternatively, the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 and the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction may be substantially flush with each other. Furthermore, the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction and the rearwardmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction are substantially flush with each other, and the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 The foremost position in the front-rear direction and the foremost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 are substantially flush (that is, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are substantially on the same plane). You can

Note that the positional relationship in the longitudinal direction between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 is the same as the positional relationship in the longitudinal direction between the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176, and thus description thereof is omitted.

In this way, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 and the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) are arranged vertically (the width direction of each arm). , the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178 to the rearmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176) can be reduced, and the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the longitudinal direction can be reduced. When the pachinko machine is installed in a pachinko hall, the length in the front-rear direction is restricted. Objects can be arranged, and it is possible to execute a dynamic movable performance using a plurality of accessories that overlap in the front-rear direction.

In the contracted state of the pantograph mechanism 1170, the extended portion 11741 extends upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11743 of the left lower arm 1174, so that the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are at the origin position. It becomes a substantially horizontal state. Similarly, since the extended portion 11781 extends upward to a position beyond the upper end 11783 of the lower right arm 1178, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are substantially horizontal at the origin position. Further, the movable range of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) can be increased by the extent that the extension portion 11741 (extension portion 11781) is formed. Become. Moreover, since each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 and 1178 can be made thicker, the strength of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 and 1178 can be increased and stability during operation can be improved. Furthermore, by increasing the strength of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 and 1178, it is possible to increase the size of the movable accessory that operates in accordance with the operation of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 and 1178. It becomes possible to perform more dynamic movable effects.

By setting the positional relationship between the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) as described above, a plurality of accessories overlapping in the front-rear direction can be formed. It is possible to perform a dynamic movable effect using a movable accessory and a dynamic movable effect by increasing the size of the movable accessory, and it is possible to further enhance the game interest by the movable effect.

The movable decorative body 1110 is decorated on its front surface and has openings 1101 and 1105 formed at substantially symmetrical positions. Lenses 1103 and 1107 are fitted in these openings 1101 and 1105, respectively. The movable decorative body 1110 can slide up and down together with the covering decorative body 1120 by a left drive mechanism 1150 and a right drive mechanism 1160 . The movable decoration 1110 has a hole 11102 , a slot 11104 , a hole 11106 and a slot 11108 , and a boss 1112 and a boss 1114 . The holes 11102 and 11106 are holes provided at positions substantially symmetrical to each other. The elongated hole 11104 and the hole 11106 are provided at substantially symmetrical positions, and are elongated elongated holes. The bosses 1112 and 1114 are provided on the back side of the movable decorative body 1110 at positions substantially symmetrical to each other. In addition, the movable decorative body 1110 has an LED board 1116 on which a large number of LEDs are arranged behind the lenses 1103 and 1107, so that it can emit light as the game progresses. When the LEDs arranged on the LED substrate 1116 emit light, the light is displayed through the lenses 1103 and 1107 .

The covering decoration 1120 has a covering decoration 1122 arranged on the left side of the movable decoration 1110 and a covering decoration 1124 arranged on the right side of the movable decoration 1110 . The covering decoration 1122 has a support shaft 11222 and a guide shaft 11224 . The covering decorative body 1124 has a support shaft 11242 and a guide shaft 11244 .

The cover decoration 1122 has a support shaft 11222 rotatably supported in the hole 11102 of the movable decoration 1110 and a guide shaft 11224 slidably inserted through the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decoration 1110 . In addition, the cover ornament 1122 is connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (more specifically, it is rotatably supported by the bearing 11744 at the central end of the left lower arm 1174). As a result, the covering decoration 1122 covers the front surface (lens 1103) of the movable decoration 1110 and is arranged movably with respect to the movable decoration 1110 with the support shaft 11222 as the center of rotation.

The covering decoration 1124 has a support shaft 11242 rotatably supported in the hole 11106 of the movable decoration 1110 and a guide shaft 11244 slidably inserted through the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration 1110 . The cover ornament 1124 is also connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (more specifically, it is rotatably supported by the bearing 11784 at the central end of the lower right arm 1178). As a result, the covering decoration 1124 covers the front surface (lens 1107) of the movable decoration 1110 and is arranged movably with respect to the movable decoration 1110 with the support shaft 11242 as the center of rotation.

The covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124 are arranged so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other.

[Description of the operation of the upper back accessory 1100]
Next, the operation of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. FIG. 71A and 71B are diagrams showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in a normal mode (mode at the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a back view. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a state after the upper back accessory 1100 starts operating and before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach their limit positions, (A). is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. 73A and 73B are diagrams showing an example of a mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach their limit positions, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. . FIG. 74 shows that after the upper left arm 1172 and upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the left transmission arm 1154 and right transmission arm 1164 move the decoration. 11A is a front view, and FIG. ) is the rear view. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which the covering decoration 1120 has moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decoration 1110,
(A) is a front view, and (B) is a rear view.

As shown in FIG. 71, when the upper back accessory 1100 is at the origin position, the pantograph mechanism 1170 is in a closed state (the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are all substantially horizontal). be. Here, the members (the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178) that can be hidden by the movable decoration 1110 when the movable decoration 1110 is actuated downward in the paper surface are the back surface of the movable decoration 1110. The members that are difficult to hide with the movable decoration 1110 (the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) are made of colorless and transparent members. As a result, the images displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are less likely to be obstructed, and the players are less likely to notice this.

As the movable decorative body 1110 moves downward in the plane of the paper, the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 change their postures in the vertical direction, and the upper arms 1172, 1176 and the lower arms 1174, 1178 move vertically. The angle formed by is increasing. When the movable decoration 1110 is actuated downward in the plane of the paper, the directions in which the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 face are vertical, but until the movable decoration 1110 exceeds a certain operating range, Left lower arm 1174 and lower right arm 1178 remain positioned on the back side of movable ornament 1110 .

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the drive gear 1157 also rotates counterclockwise. As drive gear 1157 rotates counterclockwise, driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise. When the support shaft 11562 is at the origin position (when the movable decoration 1110 and the covered decoration 1120 are at the origin position), it is positioned above the plane of the paper, and when the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise, the bearing 11564 (left It circulates clockwise around the driven gear mounting shaft 11844). When the support shaft 11562 rotates clockwise around the bearing 11564 (the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844), the left arm member 1155 is pushed downward to the left. When the left arm member 1155 is pushed downward to the left, a clockwise pressing force around the hollow shaft 11544 (the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848) acts on the left transmission arm 1154 . When a clockwise pressing force about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 acts on the left transmission arm 1154, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum. When the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise, the boss 1112 slidably connected to the slot 11542 moves within the slot 11542 and moves the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in a front view, the drive gear 1167 also rotates clockwise. As drive gear 1167 rotates clockwise, driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise. When the support shaft 11662 is at the origin position (when the movable decoration 1110 and the covered decoration 1120 are at the origin position), it is positioned above the plane of the paper, and when the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise, the bearing 11664 ( It circulates counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868). When the support shaft 11662 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11664 (right driven gear mounting shaft 11864), the right arm member 1165 is pushed downward and to the right. When the right arm member 1165 is pushed downward to the right, a counterclockwise pressing force around the hollow shaft 11644 (right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868) acts on the right transmission arm 1164. As shown in FIG. When a counterclockwise pressing force around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 acts on the right transmission arm 1164, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise with the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum. . When the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 1114 slidably connected to the slot 11642 moves within the slot 11642 and moves the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, the covering decorations 1122 and 1124 also move downward along with the movement of the movable decoration 1110 . Since the guide shafts 11224, 11244 of the covering decorations 1122, 1124 are slidably inserted into the elongated holes 11104, 11108 of the movable decoration 1110, when the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, gravity This is because the covering decorations 1122 and 1124 are also moved downward by the action.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front in synchronism with this, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 maintain a substantially horizontal state on the paper surface. It works downwards.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 move downward in the paper plane, the lower central hollow shaft 1744 connected to the covered decorative body 1122 moves downward in the paper plane. pushed down towards As a result, the left lower arm 1174 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 11742, and the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11722 (central left support shaft 11882). When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in a front view to move the movable decoration 1110 and the covered decoration 1120 downward in the paper surface, the hollow shaft 11784 connected to the covered decoration 1124 is pushed downward in the paper surface. be done. As a result, the lower right arm 1178 rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 11782, and the upper right arm 1176 rotates against the bearing 11762.
It rotates clockwise with (central right support shaft 11884) as a fulcrum. Thus, the pantograph mechanism 1170 operates.

By the way, when the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise about the bearing 11722 (central left support shaft 11882 ), it will come into contact with the left contact surface 1192 of the regulating member 1190 eventually. Further, when the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise about the bearing 11762 (central right support shaft 11884 ), it will come into contact with the right contact surface 1194 of the regulating member 1190 eventually. The position of the upper left arm 1172 when in contact with the left contact surface 1192 is the operating limit position directed downward in the paper plane, and the position of the upper right arm 1176 when in contact with the right contact surface 1194 is the upper position in the paper plane. This is the operating limit position directed downward.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front after the left upper arm 1172 has moved to the operation limit position, the movable ornament 1110 moves further downward in the plane of the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11744 moves toward the long hole 11104. Move from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decoration 1122 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 11222 as a fulcrum. Further, when the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in a front view after the upper right arm 1176 has moved to the operation limit position, the movable decorative body 1110 moves further downward in the plane of the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11784 moves toward the elongated hole 11108. moves from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decorative body 1124 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 11242 as a fulcrum. In this way, the covering decoration 1122 and the covering decoration 1124 move downward from the original position along with the movable decoration 1110, and the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 move downward in the paper. When the movable decoration 1110 is moved to the limit position and the movable decoration 1110 moves downward in the drawing, the covering decoration 1120 is moved relative to the movable decoration 1110 . When the covering decoration 1120 operates relative to the movable decoration 1110, the lenses 1103 and 1107 fitted in the openings 1101 and 1105 are exposed and visible to the player. The amount of exposure of lenses 1103 and 1107 increases as the relative working range of covering decoration 1120 with respect to movable decoration 1110 increases.

Thus, the upper back accessory 1100 is vertically movable between the origin position (see FIG. 71) and the lower end position (see FIG. 73). Specifically, the movable decoration 1110 is movable between the origin position and the lower end position, and the covering decoration 1120 is moved between the origin position and the operation limit positions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176. can be moved. After the movable decoration 1110 and the covering decoration 1120 have moved to the lower end position, the operation limit position is that the covering decoration 1120 reaches the limit with respect to the movable decoration 1110 while the movable decoration 1110 is at the lower end position. This is the activated position. That is, the vertical position of the movable decorative body 1110 is the same at the lower end position and the operation limit position. When the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 are at the origin position, they stand by at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . On the other hand, when the upper back accessory 1100 (more specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120) is at the lower end position, the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed even when the covered decorative body 1120 is at the operation limit position. Located in front of the display area. That is, when the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position moves toward the lower end position, the upper back accessory 1100 (the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) moves from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It will advance toward the front. Advancement of the upper back role 1100 forward from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, winning (passing) of the game ball to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752 ) is executed according to the result of the hit determination executed under the condition of ).

It should be noted that when the upper back role 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed at a position visible to the player. Since the upper left arm 1172 is made of transparent resin, it does not hinder the visibility of the effect image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 (more specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) moves up and down by the pantograph mechanism, the fulcrum between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, and the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left The fulcrums with the lower arm 1174 are all on the side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, which is less likely to hinder the player's visual recognition (the player tends to focus on the central portion), and the left side drive mechanism. 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160 can be provided compactly in a range smaller than the vertical movable range of the upper back accessory 1100 . Although the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin, even if the upper rear accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are Since the arm 1178 moves so as to be hidden behind the movable decorative body 1110, the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are difficult to come into view of the player. In addition, by reducing the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, the overall thickness of the upper back accessory 1100 can be reduced (in the present embodiment, the thickness is about the same as the width of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161). ing).

In addition, when the movable decoration 1110 starts to operate, the movable decoration 1110 and the covering decoration 1120 both start to operate from the origin position, and the covering decoration 1120 (covering decoration) with respect to the movable decoration 1110 from the middle. 1122 and the covering ornament 1124) will begin to operate relative to each other. That is, when the movable decoration 1110 starts to operate, the covering decoration 1120 does not operate on the movable decoration 1110, so the covering decoration 1120 does not operate from the time when the movable decoration 1110 starts to operate. Since it is difficult to predict the final form, the movable decoration 1110 will perform an operation that exceeds the player's expectation from the middle, making it possible to increase interest.

In this embodiment, when the movable decoration 1110 starts to operate, the covering decoration 1120 (the covering decoration 1122 and the covering decoration 1124) does not operate with respect to the movable decoration 1110, and the movable decoration 1120 (covering decoration 1122 and covering decoration 1124) does not operate. The covering decoration 1120 is configured to start operating relative to the decoration 1110, but is not limited to this, and the covering decoration 1120 is configured to operate regardless of the position of the movable decoration 1110. may be

By the way, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 contact the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, respectively (after reaching the operation limit position), the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate. Even if this is done, the postures of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 (directions in which the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 face) do not change. On the other hand, regarding the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178, even after the upper left arm 1172 and the right upper arm 1176 contact the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, respectively, the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1174 do not move. The longitudinal portion of each arm 1178 changes its posture in the vertical direction. When the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 will eventually be exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, before the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are exposed from the back side of the movable decoration 1110, the covering decoration 1120 (covering decoration 1122) is applied to the movable decoration 1110. and covering decorative body 1124) are operated relatively. That is, when the movable decoration 1110 moves downward in the paper surface, the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction. And the lower right arm 1178 appears in a position where it can be visually recognized in a front view. The arm 1178 is positioned on the back side of the covering decorative body 1120 . When the covered decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110, the role object area (area where the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 are combined) that can be visually recognized in the front view becomes large. By doing so, the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are prevented from being exposed in a way that is natural and comfortable for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, after the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position starts to operate toward the lower end position, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 each move to the left contact surface. 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, while continuing to operate the movable decoration 1110 toward the lower end position, the covering decoration 1120 (the covering decoration 1122 and the covering decoration Body 1124) is actuated upward. Here, the operation of the covering decoration 1122 with respect to the movable decoration 1100 is performed by one operation control such as rotating the left motor 1151 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Similarly, the operation of the covering decoration 1124 with respect to the movable decoration 1100 is performed by one operation control such as rotating the right side motor 1161 clockwise when viewed from the front. That is, for both the covered decorative body 1122 and the covered decorative body 1124, the corresponding motors (the left motor 1151 for the covered decorative body 1122 and the right motor 1161 for the covered decorative body 1124) are rotated in a specific direction. With one simple motion control, it is possible to operate the movable decoration 1100 independently of the operation of the movable decoration 1100 while continuing to operate the movable decoration 1100 . Moreover, since only one motor is rotated for each of the covering decoration 1122 and the covering decoration 1124, the structure is simple and space-saving, and the movable decoration 1100 can be operated while continuing to operate. can be operated independently of the operation of In particular, in recent years, increasing the size of movable accessories and arranging a plurality of movable accessories has become mainstream, so the contribution to space saving is a great effect.

By the way, conventionally, when the accessory is operated in a substantially straight line in the vertical direction, drive mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, and the drive mechanism performs the linear motion in the vertical direction. When driving mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, it is necessary to provide the driving mechanism over at least the operating range of the accessory in the vertical direction, and installation of such a driving mechanism requires a large area. If the accessory can be operated by arcuate motion, space can be saved, but in this case, the accessory is also operated by arcuate motion. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848, and the boss 1112 slidably connected to the long hole 11542 moves inside the long hole 11542. while moving the movable decoration 1110 downward. In synchronism with this, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise about the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868, and the boss 1114 slidably connected to the long hole 11642 moves inside the long hole 11642. while moving the movable decoration 1110 downward. That is, according to the present embodiment, while each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 is moved in an arc with one end as a fulcrum, the attitude of the movable ornament 1110 is maintained substantially horizontally. It is possible to move the movable decorative body 1110 substantially linearly in the vertical direction over an operation range larger than the installation area of the drive mechanism. In addition, since the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 perform circular arc motion, the installation area in the vertical direction of the drive mechanism (the left drive mechanism 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160) for driving the movable decoration 1110 is the movable decoration 1110. can be made smaller than the operating range of , and can greatly contribute to space saving.

In addition, in the present embodiment, similar decorations are provided on the front surfaces of the movable decoration 1110, the covering decoration 1120, the decoration cover 1130, the decoration cover 1140, the left transfer arm 1154, the right transfer arm 1164, and the static decoration 1196. is applied. The same type of decoration means, for example, decoration that evokes the same idea, and if decorations that can be recognized as having the same color, pattern, and shape are applied, they can evoke the same idea. In this embodiment, on the front surface of each member 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196, there is a shape that constitutes the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100) with the same color in appearance. It is decorated with recognizable decorations. In addition, since the upper back accessory 1100 is a character shape related to the concept of the game machine, the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, and 1196 having the same type of decoration applied to the front face are used to form the same character. A character form is formed.

In a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, in particular, a support member that supports a movable member (corresponding to the movable decorative body 1110 of the present embodiment) and a drive member that drives the movable member (the left transmission of the present embodiment) arm 1154 and right transmission arm 1164) may be visible when viewed from the front when the movable accessory advances to the front side of the liquid crystal display device. In this regard, in the present embodiment, unlike such a conventional game machine, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally made visible in a front view, and other members (movable ornaments 1110 , covering decorative body 1120, decorative covers 1130, 1140 and static decorative body 1196) are members constituting the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are assimilated with the other members (for example, even if the movable decoration 1110 is at any position between the origin position and the operation limit position due to the operation). , (A) of FIGS. 71 to 75). More specifically, the left transfer arm 1154 is decorated with a decoration that provides continuity between the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover 1130, and the right transfer arm 1164 is provided with the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover. It is decorated to give continuity between 1140. Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the front surfaces of the other members are decorated in the same manner to form a single character. In this way, while the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 can be seen from the front, the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are connected to the movable decoration 1110 to support the movable decoration 1110. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp that it is a member that does. Furthermore, while the movable decoration 1110 has an eye-like shape, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are shaped to resemble the corners of the eyes from the left and right ends of the movable decoration 1110. . Therefore, it is even more difficult for the player to understand that the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are members for driving the movable decoration 1110 .

[Configuration of Lower Accessory 1200]
The configuration of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG. FIG. 76 is an example of a front view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 77 is an example of a rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode. FIG. 78 is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed obliquely from the upper front right. FIG. 79 is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed obliquely from the upper left. FIG. 80 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 81 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The lower accessory 1200 includes a lower accessory fixing base 1220 to which various members constituting the lower accessory 1200 are attached, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 configured to be operable with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220, A left guide 1260 member and a right guide 1270 member that guide the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 on both the left and right sides, and an auxiliary force that acts upward on the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 that moves up and down. A lower accessory driving motor 1230 as a drive source for operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the arm 1280 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220, and the power of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 is used to move the lower accessory. A gear 1240 for transmission to the decorative body 1210 and a rear cover 1250 made of transparent resin arranged behind the gear 1240 are provided. Although the rear cover 1250 is made of transparent resin, various members such as the gear 1240 are not shown in FIGS. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the lower accessory driving motor 1230 described above function as an operating mechanism for moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 up and down.

The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is a horizontally long rectangular plate-like member. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A lower accessory drive motor 1230 is attached to the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the lower approximate center. A support shaft 12202 that pivotally supports the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed toward the front on the left side of the front surface of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . A pair of left and right support shafts 12203 and 12205 are formed rearward on the back side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The lower accessory fixing base 1220 has a pair of semicircular holes 12204 and 12206 that are substantially symmetrical with respect to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 and bulge outward above the lower accessory drive motor 1230. formed. The hole 12204 is formed to draw an arc centering on the support shaft 12203 . The hole 12206 is formed so as to draw an arc around the support shaft 12205 . A photosensor 12208 for detecting the position of the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is arranged on the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and on the right side of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 . In this embodiment, the photosensor 12208 detects whether or not the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position.

The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a horizontally elongated decorative member. It is attached to the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to be vertically operable with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 includes a lower accessory movable base 12102 made of transparent resin that can move vertically with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220, and a lower accessory fixed base 1220 that is decorated on the front surface. and a lower accessory decorative cover 12104 that covers the front surface of the lower accessory movable base 12102 and moves up and down. The lower accessory decorative cover 12104 is configured to allow light from the rear to pass forward.

A pair of elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are formed on both left and right sides of the lower accessory movable base 12102 . These elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are transversely long elongated holes. A boss 12110 that engages with the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 toward the front on the right side of the long hole 12106 .

In addition, the lower accessory movable base 12102 has an LED board on which an LED (not shown) is arranged as a light source on the front side. When the LED arranged on this LED board emits light, it emits light forward through the lower accessory decorative cover 12104 . As a result, for example, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in accordance with the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 .

The left guide member 1260 is a vertically long plate-like member and is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at attachment portions 12604 and 12606 . The left guide member 1260 is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The groove formed between the left guide member 1260 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. .

The right guide member 1270 is a vertically long plate-like member and is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the attachment portions 12704 and 12706 . The right guide member 1270 is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . A groove formed between the right guide member 1270 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. .

The auxiliary arm 1280 is a rod-shaped member provided on the front left side of the lower accessory decorative cover 12104 . The auxiliary arm 1280 has a bearing 12804 pivotally supported by the support shaft 12202 of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the left end. The auxiliary arm 1280 has an elongated hole 12802 formed at its right end to engage with a boss 12110 formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 .

An auxiliary coil spring 1290 as an example of an elastic member is provided between the support shaft 12202 formed on the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the bearing 12804 formed on the auxiliary arm 1280 . The auxiliary coil spring 1290 urges the auxiliary arm 1280 counterclockwise (to the left) with the bearing 12804 (support shaft 12202) as the center of rotation. The counterclockwise biasing force of the auxiliary coil spring 1290 assists the upward movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220 .

The lower accessory drive motor 1230 is a stepping motor, and its rotation is controlled by a pulse signal from the accessory control circuit 207 .

A gear 1240 is provided behind the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The gear 1240 includes a drive gear 12402 coaxially provided with the lower accessory drive motor 1230, a left driven gear 12404 and a right driven gear 12406.

The left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter, and are horizontally rotated so that the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. arranged side by side. Also, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate synchronously in directions opposite to each other.

The left driven gear 12404 has a bearing 12404a in its center. The bearing 12404a rotatably supports the support shaft 12203. As shown in FIG. The teeth of left driven gear 12404 mesh with the teeth of drive gear 12402 . The right driven gear 12406 has a bearing 12406a in its center. The bearing 12406a rotatably supports the support shaft 12205. As shown in FIG. The teeth of right driven gear 12406 mesh with the teeth of left driven gear 12404 and do not mesh with the teeth of drive gear 12402 . That is, the rotational force of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 is transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 through the driving gear 12402, and the rotational force transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 is further transmitted to the right driven gear 12406. In this manner, the drive gear 12402 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate synchronously.

The left driven gear 12404 has a boss 12405 formed on its front surface at a predetermined distance from the center of the left driven gear 12404 in the radial direction. Similarly, a boss 12407 is formed on the front surface of the right driven gear 12406 at a predetermined distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 in the radial direction. Note that the distance from the center of left driven gear 12404 to boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of right driven gear 12406 to boss 12407 .

It should be noted that "the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter", "the center height position of the left driven gear 12404 and the center height position of the right driven gear 12406 are the same", and "the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same height position". "The distance from the center of the gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same." However, when transmitting the power of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 to the lower accessory movable decoration 1210, the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is stabilized while maintaining the same posture in appearance (balanced in the left and right direction). In order to be able to move up and down, it is sufficient that the colleague is transmitted to the left and right of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 substantially evenly.

The boss 12405 passes through a hole 12204 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 . Here, the hole 12204 is formed so as to correspond to the trajectory of the boss 12405 rotating around the support shaft 12203 when the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise.

The boss 12407 passes through a hole 12206 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 . Here, the hole 12206 is formed so as to correspond to the trajectory of the boss 12407 rotating around the support shaft 12205 when the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise.

Bosses 12405 and 12407 are normally located at the lowest position (the position shown in FIG. 82).

The holes 12204 and 12206 also have the function of defining the movement ranges of the bosses 12405 and 12407 (that is, the rotation ranges of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406).

When the uppermost positions of the bosses 12405 and 12407 when the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate are defined as the uppermost positions, the holes 12204 and 12206 are positioned at least at the lowermost and uppermost positions. and the bosses 12405 and 12407 must be formed so as to be able to move between them. In this embodiment, the holes 12404 are formed clockwise from the lowest position (see FIG. 82) to beyond the highest position. Also, the hole 12206 is formed counterclockwise from the lowest position (see FIG. 82) to a position beyond the highest position.

Here, of the two positions where the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 and the hole 12204 intersect, the upper position is the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the lower position is the lowermost position of the boss 12405 . Further, of the two positions where the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 and the hole 12206 intersect, the upper position is the uppermost position of the boss 12407, and the lower position is the lowermost position of the boss 12407. (see also FIG. 84). However, in FIG. 84, both boss 12405 and boss 12407 have moved slightly beyond the topmost position.

It should be noted that the “position slightly exceeding the uppermost position” of the boss 12405 is the right side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 when viewed from the front (the right side of FIG. 84A, FIG. (B)), which is a position where a substantially uppermost position can be maintained. In addition, the “position beyond the uppermost position” of the boss 12407 is the left side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (the left side in FIG. 84A, the left side in FIG. 84B ) to the right). However, it is preferable that the extent of the "over position" is so small that it is difficult to recognize that the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 has descended when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves upward. This is because if the bosses 12405 and 12407 greatly exceed the uppermost position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 will descend to a position lower than the uppermost position.

[Description of operation of lower accessory 1200]
Next, the operation of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82A and 82B are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 before the start of operation, that is, in the normal mode (the mode at the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. 83A and 83B are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operated to the intermediate position, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it is operated to its operating limit, (A) being a front view and (B) being a rear view. In addition, in FIG. 84, the boss 12407 and the long hole 12108 are illustrated so that the aspect thereof can be grasped.

The lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is vertically movable between an origin position (see FIG. 82) and an operation limit position (see FIG. 84). When the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position, it is hidden behind the center unit 74, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize it. On the other hand, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the operation limit position, it is positioned in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . That is, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 at the origin position moves toward the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is directed forward from the rear of the center unit 74 to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. will advance. The advance of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 forward from the rear of the center unit 74 to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, the game to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752 It is executed according to the result of the hit judgment executed on the condition that the ball wins (passes).

When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates counterclockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise, the boss 12405 located at the bottom in the normal state rotates clockwise while drawing an arc with a radius of the straight line distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. rotate to When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 located at the lowest position in the normal state is reversed while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. Rotate clockwise. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 rises toward the operation limit position.

While the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 moves from the origin position (see FIG. 82) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 83), the boss 12405 moves leftward ( 82(B) and 83(B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving to the right. The boss 12407 moves rightward (to the left in FIGS. 82(B) and 83(B)) in the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 while moving the lower accessory movable base 12102 upward. push up. At this time, the holes 12204 and 12206 function as guide grooves that guide the operation of the bosses 12405 and 12407, respectively, and as described above, the operation range of the bosses 12405 and 12407 (the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotation range).

Also, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 83) to the operation limit position (see FIG. 84), the boss 12405 moves through the long hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right (to the left in FIGS. 83(B) and 84(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward, and the boss 12407 moves into the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving leftward (rightward in FIGS. 83(B) and 84(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward. In addition, since the auxiliary coil spring 1290 applies a counterclockwise biasing force to the auxiliary arm 1280 with the bearing 12804 as a fulcrum, the auxiliary coil spring 1290 pushes the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward. Supported.

As the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates clockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates clockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12405 rotates counterclockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 . When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 . That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 descends toward the origin position.

While the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 operates from the operation limit position (see FIG. 84) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 83), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the long hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right in FIGS. 83(B) and 84(B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 moves through the long hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving rightward (leftward in FIGS. 83(B) and 84(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward. In addition, while the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is moving from the intermediate position (see FIG. 83) to the origin position (see FIG. 82), the boss 12405 moves through the long hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 to the right. While moving in the direction (leftward in FIGS. 82(B) and 83(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 is inserted into the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. leftward (rightward in FIGS. 82(B) and 83(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward.

As described above, the height direction position of the center of rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the center of rotation of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. diameter is the same. Also, the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same distance (length). Therefore, when the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates, the height direction position of the boss 12405 and the height direction position of the right driven gear 12406 become the same. Here, since the LED board is mounted on the lower accessory movable base 12102, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 to be raised has a considerable weight. Moreover, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is an accessory elongated in the left-right direction. When raising such a role object, there is a possibility that power will be transmitted biased to either the left or right side. However, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the object to be raised is somewhat heavy or an accessory that is long in the left-right direction, only the rotational force (power) of one lower accessory drive motor 1230 can lift the object. While maintaining the posture at the origin position (see FIG. 82), the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is stably (balanced in the left and right direction) without transmitting power to either the left or right side. It becomes possible to operate in the vertical direction.

By the way, when operating the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 from the origin position to the operation limit position, the accessory control circuit 207 is required to operate the lower accessory drive motor 1230 from the origin position to the operation limit position. A pulse signal is output so that the motor rotates more than the maximum number of revolutions (i.e., rotates beyond the operating limit position). The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210, which is activated by the rotation of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, physically moves when the boss 12405 collides with the end of the hole 12204 and the boss 12407 collides with the end of the hole 12206. be stopped. In this way, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be quickly operated from the origin position to the operation limit position.

Here, the hole 12204 is formed up to the central side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (the right side of the vertical line LL in FIG. 84A). Similarly, the hole 12206 is formed up to the central side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (the left side of the vertical line LR in FIG. 84A). Therefore, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the top end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the top end position. That is, the boss 12405 is located on the central side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (the right side of the vertical line LL in FIG. 84A), and the center of the right driven gear 12406 is positioned. The boss 12407 is located on the center side of the line of the vertical ship LR passing through OR (on the left side of the vertical line LL in FIG. 84A).

When the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the topmost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the topmost position, a downward force (for example, gravity) acts on the lower accessory movable decoration 1210. Even if , the holes 12204 and 12206 restrict the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 . Therefore, left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406 cannot rotate in either direction, and left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406 are locked from rotation at this position.

In this way, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not descend due to gravity. Even if a strong force is applied, it does not descend, and is held at the operation limit position unless the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates in the direction (clockwise) toward the origin position. As a result, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is locked in a series of operations for moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism, It is possible to maintain the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 above.

The boss 12405 must be on the left side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (if the boss 12407 is on the right side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406). , downward movement of the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is locked. Therefore, when the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), The movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is locked. When the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), the lower accessory movable decoration The gravity of the body 1210 acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the applied gravity acts in the direction of rotation of the left driven gear 12404 (right driven gear 12406). This is because the driven gear 12406 does not act in the horizontal right direction when viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, when boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position and boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position, left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406 The rotation is restricted because the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) is to be held at the uppermost position, and the target accessory to be raised ( The moving range of the bosses 12405 and 12407 can be appropriately changed according to the position to hold the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment. For example, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 is further rotated by 90 degrees to the right side of the vertical line LL (the right side in FIG. 84(A) and the left side in FIG. 84(B)). , the rotation range of the right driven gear 12406 is further rotated 90 degrees to the left side of the vertical line LR (left side in FIG. 84(A), right side in FIG. 84(B)). The lower accessory movable decoration 1210 can be held at an intermediate position between the upper end position and the lowermost end position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by rotating the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406, the bosses 12405 and 12407 are rotated to rotate the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102). ) is moved up and down, but the aspect of vertically moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is not necessarily limited to this, and a force acting member ( The bosses 12405 and 12407 correspond to the form) may move in an arc to move the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 up and down. Therefore, instead of using gears (corresponding to the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 of the present embodiment) to move the force applying member, for example, the above-described A rotating member or the like having a force acting member formed thereon may be used.

Further, the above-mentioned force acting members (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment) can be moved along an arc of a perfect circle by using a gear, but they are not necessarily moved along an arc of a perfect circle. It is not necessary, and may be moved along an arc of an ellipse. That is, when the moving direction of the force acting member becomes the horizontal direction, the symmetrical accessory in the moving direction (horizontal direction) of the force acting member (lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of this embodiment (more specifically, lower accessory movable (corresponding to the base 12102)) becomes 0, and the force applying member does not move due to the load of the target role object (corresponding to the lower role movable decorative body 1210 of this embodiment). Therefore, as long as the drive source of the force acting member (corresponding to the lower role product driving motor 1230 of the present embodiment) is not driven in the direction in which the target role product descends, a simple configuration can be obtained without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism. Thus, the target role product can be locked upward in a series of operations for moving the target role product upward.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 (the movement of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407) is stopped by stopping the drive of the lower accessory drive motor 1230. 12204 and 12206 are physically stopped. For example, if the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment) is stopped above by controlling the motor (corresponding to the lower accessory driving motor 1230 of this embodiment), the stop There is no choice but to decelerate the rotation of the motor near the desired upper position, and there is a risk that the rising speed of the target accessory near the upper position will decrease. In this respect, as in the present embodiment, unless the rotation of the motor is decelerated by physically restricting the movement of the force acting members (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment), the target role can be moved. , high-speed movement can be realized with a simple structure without stalling in the vicinity of the upper position to be stopped. Moreover, since the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are arranged side by side as a pair, even if the symmetrical object has a horizontally elongated shape that is long in the horizontal direction, the stability in the horizontal direction can be maintained. Can lift objects.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate synchronously in directions opposite to each other. That is, the bosses 12405 and 12407 move synchronously in opposite directions. As a result, even if an external force (such as vibration) is applied in either the left or right direction to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102), the lower accessory drive motor As long as 1230 is not driven, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) can be locked near the top end position. This is because the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not descend unless the bosses 12405 and 12407 move in opposite directions.

[Corner Accessory 1300]
Corner feature 1300 comprises upper corner feature 1320 and lower corner feature 1350 as described above. Here, the upper corner component 1320 will be described first, then the lower corner component 1350 will be described, and then the mode when the corner component 1300 operates to the operation limit position will be described.

[Configuration of upper corner accessory 1320]
The configuration of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88. FIG. FIG. 85 is an example of a front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. FIG. 86 is an example of a rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. FIG. 87 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 88 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The upper corner accessory 1320 includes a fixed plate 1322 to which various members constituting the upper corner accessory 1320 are attached, a first movable body 1330 and a second movable body 1340 that are operable with respect to the fixed plate 1322, A motor 1332 as a driving source for operating the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and a power transmission mechanism 1333 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1332 to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. and a photosensor 1345 for confirming the origin positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 .

The fixing plate 1322 is a horizontally long plate-like member that is attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 on the back side of the upper front role 1000 and the front side of the upper back role 1100 . Support shafts 13222 , 13224 and 13226 are formed on the front side of the fixed plate 1322 . A hole 13225 is formed between the support shafts 13222 and 13224 in the horizontal direction and above the support shafts 13222 and 13224 . A hole 13229 is formed around the support shaft 13226 in substantially the upper half of the periphery of the support shaft 13226 .

The first movable body 1330 includes a decorative portion 13302 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13304 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13302 . A bearing 13306 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13222 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13304 . A support shaft 13308 is formed on the upper right side of the bearing 13306 when viewed from the front. First movable body 1330 is rotatable around bearing 13306 (support shaft 13222). A long linear slope 13307 is formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 along the moving direction of the first movable body 1330 . This slope 13307 has a chevron shape that rises from both sides toward the center in the longitudinal direction.

The second movable body 1340 includes a decorative portion 13402 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13404 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13402 . A bearing 13406 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13228 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13404 . A support shaft 13408 is formed on the upper left side of the bearing 13406 when viewed from the front. Second movable body 1340 is rotatable around bearing 13406 (support shaft 13228). A long linear slope 13407 is formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 along the moving direction of the second movable body 1340 . This slope 13407 has a chevron shape that rises from both sides toward the center in the longitudinal direction.

The motor 1332 is attached and fixed to the fixing plate 1322 via the motor attachment member 1331 . Also, the power of the motor 1332 is output from the motor output shaft 13322 .

The power transmission mechanism 1333 includes a first gear 1334 , a second gear 1335 , a third gear 1336 , a first transmission arm 1337 and a second transmission arm 1338 . The first gear 1334 and the second gear 1335 are in mesh, and the second gear 1335 and the third gear 1336 are in mesh. Power from a motor 1332 is transmitted to the first movable body 1330 via gears 1334 and 1335 . Power from a motor 1332 is transmitted to the second movable body 1340 via respective gears 1334-1336.

A hollow shaft 13342 is formed in the center of the first gear 1334 . The hollow shaft 13342 is supported by the motor output shaft 13322 so as to be coaxial with the motor output shaft 13322 and rotate therewith. A hollow shaft 13342 pivoted on the motor output shaft 13322 is located in the hole 13225 .

A hollow shaft 13352 is formed in the center of the second gear 1335 . The hollow shaft 13352 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13224 . A boss 13354 is formed on the front side of the second gear 1335 at a portion radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance.

A hollow shaft 13362 is formed in the center of the third gear 1336 . The hollow shaft 13362 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13226 . A boss 13364 is formed on the front side of the third gear 1336 at a portion radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance. A boss 13366 is formed on the rear side of the third gear 1336 at a portion radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance. This boss 13366 moves within the hole 13229 when the third gear 1336 rotates. The bosses 13364 and 13366 are formed on opposite sides of the third gear 1336 substantially diagonally with respect to the center of the third gear 1336 . The third gear 1336 has a detection piece 13368 that can be detected by the photosensor 1345 on the front surface.

The first transmission arm 1337 has a C-shaped curved portion 13370 and a bar portion 13371 . A bearing 13372 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13371 side. Bearing 13372 is rotatably supported on support shaft 13308 . A bearing 13374 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13370 side. Bearing 13374 is rotatably supported on boss 13354 .

The second transmission arm 1338 has a C-shaped curved portion 13380 and a bar portion 13381 . A bearing 13382 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13381 side. Bearing 13382 is rotatably supported on support shaft 13408 . A bearing 13384 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13380 side. Bearing 13384 is rotatably supported on boss 13364 .

The photosensor 1345 detects the positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. In this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 89 described later). ) so that the detection piece 13368 can be detected.

[Description of the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320]
Next, the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 92. FIG. FIG. 89 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position. FIG. 90 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 91 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further actuated from the position shown in FIG. 90. FIG. FIG. 92 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit positions.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position, the first movable body 1330 is positioned at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1340 is positioned at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. located in At the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are arranged behind the upper front accessory 1000 (see, for example, FIG. 19), so they are difficult to see when viewed from the front.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 89), the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates counterclockwise in front view (clockwise in FIGS. 89 to 92). , the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352) when viewed from the front, the boss 13354 (see FIG. 87) rotates clockwise around the hollow shaft 13352 (support shaft 13224) when viewed from the front. circulate to When the boss 13354 rotates around the hollow shaft 13352 clockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13374 supported by the boss 13354 also rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 when viewed from the front. As a result, the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 89 to 92) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308 of the first movable body 1330, when the bearing 13372 moves leftward in a front view, the support shaft 13308 moves against the fixed plate 1322. The support shaft 13222 (bearing 13306) thus formed is the center of rotation and rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. That is, the first movable body 1330 rotates counterclockwise in a front view with the support shaft 13222 as the center of rotation. forward).

In addition, when the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352) when viewed from the front, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise around the hollow shaft 13362 (support shaft 13226) when viewed from the front. rotate around. When the third gear 1336 rotates about the support shaft 13226 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the boss 13364 (see FIG. 87) rotates about the hollow shaft 13362 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the boss 13364 turns around the hollow shaft 13362 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 moves rightward (leftward in FIGS. 89 to 92) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 is rotatably fitted around the support shaft 13408 of the second movable body 1340, when the bearing 13382 moves rightward in front view, the support shaft 13408 moves toward the fixed plate 1322. When viewed from the front, it rotates clockwise around the formed support shaft 13228 (bearing 13406) as the center of rotation. That is, the second movable body 1340 moves toward the lower left (front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) from the origin position with the support shaft 13228 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 can be synchronously operated by rotating one motor 1332 .

Also, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move from the original position, which is difficult to see in a front view, in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 approach each other. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move from the outside to the inside of the field of view in a front view so as to sandwich them.

When the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates clockwise in a front view, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in the direction of returning to the origin position by the movement opposite to the movement described above. do.

By the way, when the first movable body 1330 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the fixed plate 1322 interfere with each other, and the first movable body 1330 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to return. Therefore, in this embodiment, the slope 13307 formed on the rear surface of the first movable body 1330 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1322, thereby enabling the first movable body 1330 to smoothly return to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the second movable body 1340, the slope 13407 formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1322, thereby smoothly moving the second movable body 1340 to the origin position. recovery is possible.

[Configuration of lower corner accessory 1350]
The configuration of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. FIG. 93 is an example of a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. FIG. 94 is an example of a rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 viewed obliquely from the upper right front side. FIG. 96 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 viewed obliquely from the upper left of the rear surface.

The lower corner accessory 1350 includes a fixed plate 1352 to which various members constituting the lower corner accessory 1350 are attached, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body 1357 that are operable with respect to the fixed plate 1352, A motor 1354 as a drive source for operating the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and a power transmission mechanism 1360 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1354 to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. and a photosensor 1375 for confirming the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 .

The fixing plate 1352 is a laterally elongated plate-like member fixedly attached to the lower part of the rear box 1800 on the rear side of the middle panel 1500 and the front side of the lower accessory 1200 . Support shafts 13522 , 13523 , 13524 , 13525 , 13526 , 13527 , 13528 , and 13529 are formed on the front side of the fixed plate 1352 . A hole 13530 is formed around the support shaft 13527 in substantially the lower half of the periphery of the support shaft 13527 .

The third movable body 1355 includes a decorative portion 13552 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13554 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13552 . An arm cover 13559 is provided on the back of the arm 13554 . A hole 135592 is formed in the center side end of the arm cover 13559 . A bearing 13556 that supports the support shaft 13524 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13554 . A support shaft 13558 is formed on the lower right side of the bearing 13556 when viewed from the front. The third movable body 1355 is rotatable around a support shaft 13524 on which a bearing 13556 is supported. A coil spring 1395 is provided between the bearing 13556 of the arm portion 13554 and the hole 135592 of the arm cover 13559 . The coil spring 1395 urges clockwise around the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation. As a result, a clockwise biasing force around the pivot 13524 acts on the third movable body 1355 . Furthermore, a long linear slope 13557 is formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 along the moving direction of the third movable body 1355 . This slope 13557 has a chevron shape that rises from both sides toward the center in the longitudinal direction.

The fourth movable body 1357 includes a decorative portion 13572 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13574 integrated with the decorative portion 13572 . An arm cover 13579 is provided on the rear surface of the arm portion 13574 . A hole 135792 is formed in the center side end of the arm cover 13579 . A bearing 13576 that supports the support shaft 13529 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13574 . A support shaft 13578 is formed on the lower left side of the bearing 13576 when viewed from the front. The fourth movable body 1357 is rotatable around a support shaft 13529 on which a bearing 13576 is supported. A coil spring 1396 is provided between the bearing 13576 of the arm portion 13574 and the hole 135792 of the arm cover 13579 . This coil spring 1396 urges counterclockwise around the support shaft 13529 as the center of rotation. As a result, a counterclockwise biasing force around the support shaft 13529 acts on the fourth movable body 1357 . Furthermore, a long linear slope 13577 is formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 along the moving direction of the fourth movable body 1357 . This slope 13577 has a chevron shape that rises from both longitudinal sides toward the center.

Motor 1354 is fixedly attached to fixed plate 1352 via motor mounting member 1356 . The power of motor 1354 is output from motor output shaft 13542 .

The power transmission mechanism 1360 includes a first gear 1361, a second gear 1362, a third gear 1363, a fourth gear 1364, a fifth gear 1365, a sixth gear 1366, a seventh gear 1367, and each gear. A third transmission arm 1370 that transmits power from all or part of 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366, 1367 to a third movable body 1355, gears 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366 , 1367 to the fourth movable body 1357.

A hollow shaft 13612 is formed in the center of the first gear 1361 . A motor output shaft 13542 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 13612 so that it is coaxial with the motor output shaft 13542 and can rotate together.

Power from motor 1354 is transmitted to first gear 1361, second gear 1362, third gear 1363, fourth gear 1364, fifth gear 1365, sixth gear 1366, and seventh gear 1367 in this order. The sixth gear 1366 has a hollow shaft 13662 formed at its center, and a boss 13664 formed at a portion radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance. Further, the sixth gear 1366 has a detection piece 13666 that can be detected by the photosensor 1375 formed on the front surface at a predetermined distance radially outward from the center. The seventh gear 1367 has a hollow shaft 13672 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13528, and a boss 13674 that is radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance.

The third transmission arm 1370 has a C-shaped curved portion 13702 and a bar portion 13704 . A bearing 13706 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13704 side. The bearing 13706 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355 . A bearing 13708 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13702 side. Bearing 13708 rotatably supports boss 13664 of sixth gear 1366 .

The fourth transmission arm 1372 has a C-shaped curved portion 13722 and a bar portion 13724 . A bearing 13726 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13724 side. Bearing 13726 rotatably supports support shaft 13578 . A bearing 13728 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13722 side. Bearing 13728 rotatably supports boss 13674 .

The photosensor 1375 detects the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. In this embodiment, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 97 described later). ) so that the detection piece 13666 can be detected.

[Explanation of operation of lower corner accessory 1350]
Next, the operation of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. FIG. FIG. 97 is an example of a back view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position. FIG. 98 is an example of a back view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 99 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit positions.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position, the third movable body 1355 is positioned at the lower left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is positioned at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is located in the lower right corner of the display area. At the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged behind the first intermediate panel 1520 and the second intermediate panel 1550, and therefore are difficult to see when viewed from the front.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 97), the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 13542 rotates clockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIGS. 97 to 99). , the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front.

When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 97 to 99) about the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as the rotation center, the boss 13664 (see FIG. 95) rotates about the hollow shaft 13662. As viewed from the front, it rotates counterclockwise. When the boss 13664 rotates counterclockwise around the hollow shaft 13662 when viewed from the front, the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 97 to 99) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355, when the bearing 13706 moves leftward in front view, the support shaft 13558 is formed on the fixed plate 1352. The support shaft 13524 (bearing 13556) is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. That is, the third movable body 1355 rotates clockwise about the support shaft 13524 when viewed from the front, and as a result, the third movable body 1355 moves upward from the origin position.

In addition, when the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in a front view around the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as a rotation center, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13528 (hollow shaft 13672) in a front view. rotate around. When the seventh gear 1367 rotates around the support shaft 13528 clockwise when viewed from the front, the boss 13674 (see FIG. 95) rotates around the hollow shaft 13672 clockwise when viewed from the front. When the boss 13672 rotates clockwise around the hollow shaft 13672 when viewed from the front, the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 moves rightward (leftward in FIGS. 97 to 99) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578 of the fourth movable body 1357, when the bearing 13726 moves rightward in a front view, the support shaft 13578 moves toward the fixed plate 1352. When viewed from the front, it rotates counterclockwise around the formed support shaft 13529 (bearing 13576) as the center of rotation. That is, the fourth movable body 1357 moves upward from the origin position with the support shaft 13529 as the center of rotation.

In this manner, rotation of one motor 1354 can synchronously operate the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 .

Also, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position, which is difficult to visually recognize in a front view, in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 approach each other. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move from the outside to the inside of the field of view in a front view so as to sandwich them.

When the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 1354 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move in the direction of returning to the origin position by the movement opposite to the movement described above. Operate.

By the way, when the third movable body 1355 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the third movable body 1355 interferes with the fixed plate 1352, and the third movable body 1355 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to return. Therefore, in this embodiment, the slope 13557 formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1352, thereby allowing the third movable body 1355 to smoothly return to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the fourth movable body 1357, the slope 13577 formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1352, thereby smoothly moving the fourth movable body 13570 to the origin position. recovery is possible.

[Aspect when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operation limit position]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102, the mode when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operation limit position will be described. FIG. 100 shows the back unit when all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 operate to the operation limit position. 176 is an example of a front view. FIG. 101 shows the case where the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 of the corner accessory 1300 are operating to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position. is an example of a front view of the back unit 176 showing the aspect of . FIG. 102 shows the case where the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 are operating to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. is an example of a front view of the back unit 176 showing the aspect of . However, in FIGS. 100 to 102, for convenience of explanation, illustration of the upper front accessory 1000, the lower accessory 1200, the middle panel 1500, and the attacker ball gutter 1600 is omitted.

Although not shown, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 has one character (for example, kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabet). ) is attached.

As shown in FIG. 100, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to their operating limit positions, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3) In the front, one design (for example, an idiom) is formed by letters attached to each movable body 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357.

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 form one design (eg, an idiom).

Further, as shown in FIG. 102, when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), characters attached to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 form one design (eg, an idiom).

In this way, the motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 87) and the motor 1354 (for example, see FIG. 96) are driven by the accessory control circuit 207 (both of which are shown in FIG. 7) of the sub CPU 201, for example. By controlling according to the result of , all the characters of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are one design (hereinafter referred to as "first design" ) or form an upper corner feature 1320
(First movable body 1330 and second movable body 1340) can form one design (hereinafter referred to as “second design”) with some (two) characters, or the lower corner accessory 1350 (second It is possible to form one design (hereinafter referred to as "third design") with some (two) characters of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357). As a result, it is possible to change the visual impression given to the player by the movable presentation by the actuation of the accessory with only a limited number of accessories.

Further, the design formed by two or more movable bodies out of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 is information related to the progress of the game (for example, It can also be recognized by the player as information suggesting the execution of a specific reach with a high degree of expectation. For example, when a specific ready-to-win effect that makes the player expect a big hit is executed as a result of the big hit determination by the start winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440, the specific In front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, two or more movable bodies (first movable body 1330, second movable body 1340, third movable body 1355 and fourth movable body 1355) Any two or more movable bodies among the movable bodies 1357) may be represented by a design (for example, an idiom) that can be recognized when they are arranged close to each other.

In this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see in a front view, in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 approach each other. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to sandwich from the upper outer side of the visual field toward the lower inner side in a front view.

Also, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position, which is difficult to visually recognize in a front view, in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 approach each other. In other words, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to sandwich from the upper outer side of the visual field toward the lower inner side in a front view.

Here, characters are applied to the front faces of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, respectively. Each single character applied to each of 1357 does not make any sense, and information related to the progress of the game is not presented to the player.

In addition, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are all arranged at positions that are difficult to visually recognize at the origin position, and are respectively located on the upper left in the front view and in the front. They are arranged at the upper right, lower left, and lower right positions when viewed from the front, which are separated from each other. Therefore, two or more movable bodies out of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are directed from the outside to the inside of the player's visual field in a front view. In the process of the operation, it is difficult for the player to immediately recognize the design (for example, an idiom) formed by the letters attached to the two or more movable bodies that operate, and the liquid crystal display It is only perceptible when stopped in close proximity in front of the display area of the device 16 .

In this way, two or more movable bodies among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 move inward from the outside of the field of view in a front view. By doing so, the player's gaze can be moved from the depth (performance image shown in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) to the front (movable characters advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 16). Thus, conventionally, information relating to the progress of a game, for example, has been presented to the player by, for example, effect images displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 that have advanced to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 can be displayed without relying on the produced image. Only with the movable body, it is possible to show the player information relating to the progress of the game. As a result, not only can the rhythm of the performance be changed, but also the performance that has an impact on the player can be performed, and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to their operation limit positions, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3) In the front, it is preferable that one design is formed by the characters attached to all the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357, but it is not necessarily limited to this. There is no problem even if one design is formed only by characters. For example, among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, only the letters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the third movable body 1355 form one design. In this case, the second movable body 1340 and the fourth movable body 1357 (characters may not be attached) do not form a design and simply exist as separate movable bodies.

Also, in the present embodiment, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 is labeled with a letter, but this is not necessarily the case. Two or more letters may be attached to all or some of the movable bodies.

In addition, in the present embodiment, characters are attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357. Anything that forms a design or forms a meaningful shape (for example, something that evokes a particular idea) in front of the display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3) may be used.

Further, in this embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 3, for example), , and other movable bodies, but not limited to this, all or part of the movable bodies may be combined to form one design.

Further, in this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are synchronously operated by rotation of one motor 1332 (see, for example, FIG. 87), and the third movable body 1354 is rotated by one motor 1354. Although the movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are configured to operate synchronously, the present invention is not limited to this. Each body 1357 may be configured to operate alone.

[Structure of Side Accessory 1400]
The configuration of the side role item 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 106. FIG. FIG. 103 is an example of a front view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 104 is an example of a rear view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode. FIG. 105 is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed obliquely from the upper right front. FIG. 106 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed diagonally from the rear left (left in front view). In FIG. 104, various members such as the link member 1420 are shown through the mounting plate 1410 so as to be easily visible, but they are actually opaque members.

The side accessory 1400 includes a mounting plate 1410 to which various members constituting the side accessory 1400 are attached, a movable decorative body 1450 configured to be operable with respect to the mounting plate 1410, and a movable decorative body 1450. A side accessory motor 1440 as a drive source, a movable piece 1430 and an L-shaped link member 1420 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the side accessory motor 1440 to the movable decoration 1450, and the positions of the movable decoration 1450 and a photosensor 1464 for confirming.

The mounting plate 1410 is a vertically long plate-like member that is mounted and fixed to the right side of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A link support shaft 1412 that pivotally supports the link member 1420 is formed on the upper portion of the front side of the mounting plate 1410 . At the bottom of the mounting plate 1410, a movable decoration supporting shaft 1414 for pivotally supporting the movable decoration 1450 is formed.

The movable decorative body 1450 is composed of a vertically elongated handle-shaped main body portion 1452 decorated on the front surface, and a single movable body configured to be operable together with the main body portion 1452 and also independently operable with respect to the main body portion 1452. 1454. A main body portion 1452 of the movable decoration 1450 has a movable decoration bearing 1458 that supports the movable decoration support shaft 1414 in the lower portion of the main body portion 1452 . The movable decoration 1450 is supported by the movable decoration bearing 1458 on the movable decoration spindle 1414, and is rotatable around the movable decoration spindle 1414 (movable decoration bearing 1458). The movable decoration 1450 has an origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end. Further, the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative boss 1455 projecting rearward on the right side in front view.

The side accessory motor 1440 is attached and fixed to the attachment plate 1410 via a motor attachment member 1444 . The side accessory motor 1440 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 is reduced to output power from the motor output shaft 1442 .

The movable piece 1430 has a gear bearing 1432 connected to the side accessory motor 1440 by supporting the motor output shaft 1442 and a link member boss 1434 connected to the link member 1420 . The movable piece 1430 rotates around the gear bearing 1432 (motor output shaft 1442) when the side accessory motor 1440 rotates.

The link member 1420 includes a link bearing 1422 that supports the link support shaft 1412 of the mounting plate 1410, a first link 1421 that is long in the lateral direction, and a second link 1425 that is substantially perpendicular to the first link 1421 and long downward. and The link member 1420 is rotatable around a link support shaft 1412 supported by a link bearing 1422 . The first link 1421 is formed with a movable piece elongated hole 1424 to which the link member boss 1434 of the movable piece 1430 is slidably connected. The link member boss 1434 is slidable along the elongated hole direction of the movable piece elongated hole 1424 when the link member 1420 rotates around the link bearing 1422 . The second link 1425 is formed with a movable decoration long hole 1426 to which the movable decoration boss 1455 of the movable decoration 1450 is slidably connected. The movable ornamental boss 1455 is slidable along the elongated hole direction of the movable ornamental elongated hole 1426 when the link member 1420 rotates around the link bearing 1422 .

The photosensor 1464 is fixedly attached to the lower portion of the mounting plate 1410 via the photosensor mounting member 1460 . A photosensor 1464 detects the position of the movable decoration 1450 . As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable decoration 1450 has the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end thereof, and the photo sensor 1464 detects the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 when the movable decoration 1450 is at the origin position. A piece 1456 can be detected. That is, the photosensor 1464 detects whether or not the movable decoration 1450 is at the origin position.

[Description of the operation of the side role item 1400]
Next, the operation of the side role item 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103, 104 and 107 to 111. FIG. FIG. 107 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 108 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 109 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest forward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 110 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 111 shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is further rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view. Hereinafter, in this specification, the position when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as "most advanced position".

The degree of inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decoration 1450 is at the origin position is approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 104), and the inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decoration 1450 is at the most advanced position. The degree of inclination is approximately 4:30 (see FIG. 110) when viewed from the back. In the present embodiment, the speed reduction ratio of the side accessory motor 1440 is such that the motor output shaft 1442 moves from approximately 1 o'clock to approximately 4:30 when the side accessory motor 1440 rotates once (movable decoration 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position), but the speed reduction ratio is not limited to this.

At the most advanced position shown in FIG. 110, the movable decorative boss 1455 has not moved to the end of the long hole 1426 for movable decorative body. This is because the direction of rotation about the movable ornament support shaft 1414 (movable ornament 1450) is different from the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 1426 for the movable ornament. This is because the movement of the movable decorative boss 1455 is regulated by the side surface (surface in the longitudinal direction).

When the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position (the position where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in rear view), the side accessory motor 1440 rotates, and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When rotating (counterclockwise in FIGS. 103, 107 and 109 and clockwise in FIGS. 104, 108, 110 and 111), the movable piece 1430 rotates about the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432). Rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the movable piece 1430 rotates about the gear bearing 1432 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece elongated hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 107 and counterclockwise in FIG. 108) when viewed from the front about the link support shaft 1412) acts. When the link member 1420 rotates clockwise around the link bearing 1422 as viewed from the front, a force pushing the movable decorative body 1450 toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is generated via the movable decorative boss 1455 . works. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 reaches approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 110) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decoration 1450 stops at the most advanced position.

The side accessory motor 1440 further rotates from the state where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 110), and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in front view (FIGS. 103 and 107). 109, and clockwise in FIGS. 104, 108, 110 and 111), the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise in front view with the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432) as the center of rotation. rotate to When the movable piece 1430 rotates about the gear bearing 1432 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece elongated hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 107 and counterclockwise in FIG. 108) when viewed from the front about the link support shaft 1412) acts. When the link member 1420 rotates clockwise around the link bearing 1422 as viewed from the front, a force is applied to the movable decoration 1450 via the movable decoration boss 1455 to return the movable decoration 1450 to the original position. do. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 reaches approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 104) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decorative body 1450 stops at the origin position.

In this way, the movable decorative body can be moved by simply rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the same direction (in the present embodiment, counterclockwise when viewed from the front) without rotating the side accessory motor 1440 forward or reverse. 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position. When the link member 1420 moves from approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 104) to approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 110), the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. On the other hand, when the link member 1420 moves from approximately 4:30 in the rear view to approximately 1:00 in the rear view, the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the origin position. That is, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position can be achieved by simply moving the link member 1420 from approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view to approximately 4:30 in the rear view. Movement of the movable ornament 1450 to the position requires that the link member 1420 move from approximately 4:30 to 1:00 in rear view.

Therefore, not only when the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 (motor output shaft 1442) is constant, but also as long as the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 does not fluctuate greatly, the distance from the origin position to the most advanced position The movement of the movable decoration 1450 is relatively quick, and the movement of the movable decoration 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position is relatively slow. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position toward the most advanced position (movable body effect) is the hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440. Although it is carried out based on the result, it is required that such movement of the movable decoration 1450 be carried out quickly. On the other hand, the movement of the movable decoration 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position does not require rapid movement compared to the movement from the origin position to the most advanced position. Therefore, it is possible to reciprocate the movable decoration 1450 between the origin position and the most advanced position only by rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in one direction (same direction). The rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decoration 1450 to move from the origin position to the most advanced position is the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decoration 1450 to move from the most advanced position to the origin position. By making it smaller than the angle, the movement of the movable decoration 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position is greater than the movement from the most advanced position to the origin position without changing the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440. It is possible to move quickly.

The independent movable body 1454 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position together with the movable decorative body 1450 when the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. By making the 1454 operate in conjunction with the main body part 1452, the action rendering of the side accessory 1400 can be made more dynamic. However, instead of or in addition to this, when the movable decorative body 1450 is waiting at the origin position, the most advanced position, or between the origin position and the re-advanced position, the independently movable body 1454 is attached to the main body part 1452. You can make it work.

[Configuration of Second Middle Panel 1550]
The configuration of the second middle panel 1550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. FIG. FIG. 112 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed obliquely from the upper right front side. FIG. 113 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view). FIG. 114 is (A) an example of a front view of the second middle panel 1550, and (B) an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line CC shown in (A).

The second middle panel 1550 includes a panel mounting case 1556 to which various members constituting the second middle panel 1550 are mounted, an LED board 1560 on which LEDs 1562 and 1564 are arranged, a light guide lens 1570, a black sheet 1580, and an inner A lens 1583 , a decorative sheet 1584 , a half mirror 1585 , a window frame 1586 having the opening window 1552 described above, and a panel cover 1590 are provided.

The panel mounting case 1556 is a case-like member that is fixedly mounted to the lower right portion of the rear box 1800 of the rear unit 176 described above.

The LED board 1560 is a plate-like member having a planar region 1563 and an annular projection 1561 having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552 described above. On the LED substrate 1560 , a plurality of (five in this embodiment) LEDs 1562 are annularly arranged radially inside an annular protrusion 1561 , and a plurality of LEDs 1564 are arranged in a planar region 1563 . The LED 1562 is provided so as to emit light radially outward. The LED 1564 is provided so as to emit light forward when viewed from the front.

Light guiding lens 1570 is provided to accommodate LED substrate 1560 between panel mounting case 1556 and panel mounting case 1556 . The light guide lens 1570 has a function of dispersing the light emitted forward from the LEDs 1564 arranged on the LED substrate 1560 and emitting light in a plane. A hole having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552 is formed in the light guide lens 1570 .

Black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface of panel cover 1590 . The black sheet 1580 has a black front side and watermarks such as characters on the back side. The watermark is not visible from the front in normal times (when the LEDs 1562 and 1564 are not emitting light), but appears to float on the panel cover 1590 when a predetermined condition is met and the LEDs 1562 and 1564 emit light. Black sheet 1580 is formed with a hole having a shape corresponding to opening window 1552 .

The half mirror 1585 , decorative sheet 1584 and inner lens 1583 are stacked in this order from the front and arranged to face the opening window 1552 . At this time, the inner lens 1583 is arranged in such a manner that the LED 1562 is accommodated radially inward (positioned radially outward of the LED 1562).

The inner lens 1583 has a flange 15832 (see FIG. 114(B)) protruding toward the rear side in a front view along the outer periphery. Part of the light emitted radially outward from the LED 1562 is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 , and the light not absorbed passes through the inner lens 1583 . Also, the inner lens 1583 is partitioned into five fan-shaped regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 (see FIG. 113). Further, each of these five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 has a plurality of cutouts formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the radial direction. In addition, since the boundaries of the five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 are inclined so that the height decreases from the periphery toward the center of the circle, the light incident on the inner lens 1583 is It flows along the notch formed in the inner lens 1583 and gathers toward the radial center of the inner lens 1583 . When light is incident on the inner lens 1583, the intensity of the light is stronger at the outer peripheral portion than at the center portion in the radial direction. It is possible to achieve more uniform surface emission.

The decorative sheet 1584 is a light-transmissive sheet on which a picture of a character or the like is drawn. The character drawn on the decoration sheet 1584 cannot be seen from the front by the half mirror 1585 normally (when the LED 1562 is not emitting light), but when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the LED 1562 emits light, the character drawn on the decoration sheet 1584 can be seen in the area inside the opening window 1552. appear to float. In this way, when the LED 1562 emits light, a character appears in the area within the window frame 1552, so the LED 1562 is also referred to as a character lamp in this specification.

The window rim 1586 is bright plated and configured to reflect light. In addition, the above-described opening window 1552 is formed in the window frame 1586, and the outer peripheral portion is decorated so as to maintain a beautiful appearance.

The panel cover 1590 is a transparent plate-like member, and as described above, the black sheet 1580 is attached to the rear side. Also, the panel cover 1590 is formed with a hole corresponding to the opening window 1552 .

The light emitted from the LED 1562 is emitted radially outward. Part of the light is incident on the flange 15832 (see FIG. 114) of the inner lens 1583, part of the incident light is absorbed in the inner lens 1583, and the other light is transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and passes through the inner lens 1583. Light is emitted toward the outside of the direction. The light transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and emitted radially outward is reflected by the radially inner surface 15862 (see FIG. 114) of the outer peripheral edge of the window rim 1586 . The light reflected by the radially inner surface 15862 of the outer peripheral edge of the window rim 1586 is incident on the inner lens 1583 after changing the traveling direction of the light to the radially inner direction. In this way, the light emitted from the LED 1562 is prevented from leaking to the outside as much as possible and is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 as much as possible. In addition, since the light including the part of the light described above is incident on the inner lens 1583 from the outer peripheral portion of the inner lens 1583, the light can be dispersed along the surface of the inner lens 1583, and the surface can be uniformly distributed. It is possible to emit light.

Various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 115 to 133 below.

[Processing when power is turned on]
FIG. 115 shows power-on processing by the main CPU 101 . When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to the stack pointer as shown in the figure (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is ON (step S12). The power failure detection signal is turned ON, for example, when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the power cutoff detection signal is ON, the main CPU 101 determines that the power cutoff detection state, and repeats the process of S12 until the power cutoff detection signal is turned OFF. When the power interruption detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption detection state, and proceeds to the process of step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs sub-control reception reception wait processing for waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices incorporated in the CPU (step S15).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing clearing of the backup contents of the main RAM 103 provided in the main CPU 101 constituting the main control circuit 70 and the RAM (not shown) constituting the payout/launch control circuit 300. . When the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S23. When the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption detection flag is set to ON. The power outage detection flag is a flag indicating that power outage processing has been executed in response to the occurrence of a power outage. When the power interruption detection flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S18. When the power interruption detection flag is set to OFF, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S23.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs a work area damage check on the main RAM 103 using, for example, a checksum.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area is normal (step S19). If the work area is normal, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 initializes work areas that require initial values when power is restored.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets notification of a high-probability gaming state (probability variable gaming state) at the time of power failure recovery (step S21).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S22). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

In step S<b>23 , the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the work area of the main RAM 103 .

Next, the main CPU 101 initializes a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S24).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for RWM initialization (initialization command) to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S25).

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 116 shows system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101 . System timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the values of each register to the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S31).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing for updating various random numbers (step S32).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (step S34).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S35).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S36). The game information is information related to games processed in the main control circuit 70, the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer. .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for restoring the saved values of each register (step S37). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 117 shows switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101 . The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process previously described. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes start-up winning detection processing (step S41). The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 118 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs general winning opening passage detection processing (step S42). In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set when a prize is won to the general winning openings 53, 54, and 55. FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S43). In the special winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set when a prize is won to the special winning opening 540 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs ball passage detector passage detection processing (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value) of the normal symbol game is obtained according to the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector 43 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Starting entry winning detection process]
FIG. 118 shows the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101 . The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described switch input detection process. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472 (step S51). When the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S59.

In step S52, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the winning of the first starting slot.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start winning prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (step S53). If the pending number is less than 4, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S54. When the number of reserved items is 4, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S59.

In step S54, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending prizes for the first start opening prize.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit determination random number value and a symbol random number value, and performs a process of storing these random number values in the main RAM 103 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the winning random number determination table (first start gate), the symbol determination table (first start gate), and the jackpot type determination table are referred to based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random value. , determines a symbol designation command, a winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern determination processing (step S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern relating to the first special symbol is determined by referring to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, the determination value data, the game state and the table pattern. The variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a reserved number increase command for the first start opening winning prize (step S58). The reserved number increase command of the first start opening winning prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 along with the command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S57. and sent.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port switch 441 (step S59). When the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S60. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting opening switch 441, the main CPU 101 terminates the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S60, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the winning of the second start opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved second start winning prizes (the number of reserved second special symbols) is less than four (step S61). If the pending number is less than 4, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S62. When the reserved number is four, the main CPU 101 terminates the start opening winning detection process.

In step S62, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending prizes for the second start opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit determination random number value and a symbol random number value, and performs a process of storing these random number values in the main RAM 103 (step S63).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs second special stop symbol determination processing (step S64). As in the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process is based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. Start port), with reference to the jackpot type determination table, determine the symbol designation command related to the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the selection symbol command at the time of winning, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern determination processing (step S65). This variation pattern determination process also refers to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, the judgment value data, the game state and the table pattern, and determines the variation pattern related to the second special symbol. The variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a reserved number increase command for the second starting opening winning prize (step S66). The command to increase the reserved number of the second start opening winning prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 along with the command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S65. and sent. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

[Variation pattern determination processing]
FIG. 119 shows variation pattern determination processing by the main CPU 101 . The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described starting opening winning detection process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 refers to a game state transition table and a variation pattern selection table based on a table pattern, a hit determination random number value, and a symbol random number value, which will be described later, and selects a variation pattern type. (step S71).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting first half and second half variation patterns from among the selected variation pattern types based on a predetermined lottery probability (step S72). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern determination process.

In addition, since the variable display time of the identification pattern is stored in association with the variation pattern, the variation pattern determined in the above-described variation pattern determination process is substantially information that can represent the variation time. becomes.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 120 shows main control main processing by the main CPU 101 . When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting processing (step S81), as shown in FIG. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described power-on process and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initial value random number update processing (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol control processing (step S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing (step S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs pattern display unit control processing (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display portion 74) and the normal symbol display portion 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74) and the normal symbol display section 71, and the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 74). The symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display for special symbols and normal symbols based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information data generation processing (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command relating to game information data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer, and stores it in the main RAM 103. FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs storage/game state data generation processing (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates memory/game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the variable probability flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the memory/game state data in the main RAM 103 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S82.

[Special symbol control process]
FIG. 121 shows a special symbol control process by the main CPU101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses to the left of each process shown in the figure indicate the values of the control state flags. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area within the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing processing according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 121, the main CPU 101 loads the control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S92 to S100, which will be described later, based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S92 to S100. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S92 to S100. It should be noted that, before reaching this predetermined timing, each process is not executed, and processes related to other subroutines are executed. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 116) is also executed at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage check processing (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the pending number of variable display of special symbols when the control state flag is a value ("00") indicating special symbol storage check processing, and when the pending number is not "0". (When there is a reserved ball), the hit determination result, the determination result of the special symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, etc. obtained in the start winning prize detection process are acquired. Also, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating a special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and changes the variation pattern acquired in this process. A variable display time of the corresponding special pattern is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting opening winning detection process has passed, the special symbol variable display time management process, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there are no reserved balls), the main CPU 101 performs demonstration display processing for displaying a demonstration screen. This special symbol storage check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variable display time management processing (step S93). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process, and when the variable display time of the special symbol has passed, the control state flag is set to a special symbol, which will be described later. A value ("02") indicating the symbol display time management process (step S94) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S93 has passed, the special symbol display time management process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol display time management processing (step S94). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the hit determination is made when the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process and the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S93 has passed. It is determined whether the result is a "big win" or a "minor win". Then, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("03") indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S95) described later. , the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has passed, the jackpot start interval management process, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is neither a "big win" nor a "minor win", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating a special symbol game ending process (step S100), which will be described later. That is, in this case, the special symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs jackpot start interval management processing (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value ("03") indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has passed, the main CPU 101 In order to open the prize winning opening 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. FIG. Also, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the processing during the opening of the large winning prize gate (step S96) described later, and also sets the upper limit time for opening the large winning prize gate 540 (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the timer for opening the big winning opening. That is, by this process, a setting is made so that the later-described process during the opening of the big winning opening is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing during the opening of the big winning opening (step S96). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 101 sets the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the timer for the opening time of the big winning opening is "0") has been satisfied (predetermined closing condition has been established). If one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540 . Then, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (“05”) indicating a process for monitoring remaining balls in the big winning opening (step S97), and sets a waiting time timer to monitor remaining balls in the big winning opening. do. That is, according to this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the big winning hole set in step S97 has elapsed, the process for monitoring remaining balls in the big winning hole, which will be described later, is set to be executed. It should be noted that an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the processing during the opening of the big winning opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process for monitoring remaining balls in the big winning opening (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value ("05") indicating the remaining ball in the big winning opening monitoring process, and when the monitoring time for remaining balls in the big winning opening has passed, the main CPU 101 sets the number of times counter for opening the big winning opening. It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is greater than or equal to the maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning opening (final round) is satisfied. When determining that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening to the control state flag. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a waiting time timer to a time corresponding to the interval between rounds. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has passed, the wait time management process before reopening the big winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, in step S97, when it is determined that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing to the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (jackpot end interval time) in the wait timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has passed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs waiting time management processing before reopening the large winning opening (step S98). In this process, the main CPU 101 opens the big winning gate when the control state flag has a value (“06”) indicating the wait time management process before reopening the big winning gate and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has passed. The memory is updated so that the value of the number counter is incremented by "1". In addition, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating the processing during the opening of the big winning opening. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) to the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-described process during opening of the big winning opening (step S96) is set to be executed again. It should be noted that, immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before re-opening of the big winning opening, a display command during opening of the big winning opening is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 .

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the big winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of times of opening the big winning opening, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot ending interval process (step S99). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag has a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing, and the value indicating the special symbol game end processing (“ 08”) is set in the control state flag. That is, by this process, it is set so that the special symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is executed after the process of step S99. In addition, when the above-mentioned winning time selection symbol command is one of "z5", "z6", "z7", "z10" and "z11", the main CPU 101 shifts the game state to the variable probability game state. When the above-described hit selection symbol command is any one of "z0", "z1", "z2", "z3", "z4" and "z9", the game state is changed to Perform control to make it non-probability variable gaming state. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win (when the random number for judging a big hit is "small hit judgment value data"), the main CPU 101 performs control to maintain the gaming state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol game end processing when the big win game state or the small win game state ends, or when "losing" is won (step S100). In this process, when the control state flag is a value ("08") indicating the end processing of the special symbol game, the main CPU 101 updates the memory so as to decrease the data indicating the pending number (start memory information) by "1". do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to variably display the next special symbol. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating special symbol storage check processing to the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S100, the special symbol storage check process (step S92) described above is set to be executed. After finishing this special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values to the control state flags. Specifically, when the game state is neither the big win game state nor the small win game state, and the result of the hit determination is "loss", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00", "01", " 02” and then “08”. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol storage check process (step S92), the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), the special symbol display time management process (step S94), and the special symbol game end process (step S100). ) are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

In addition, when the game state is neither the big win game state nor the small win game state, and the result of the hit determination is "big win" or "small win", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00" or "01". , "02", and "03". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol storage check process (step S92), the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), the special symbol display time management process (step S94), and the jackpot start interval management process (step S95). ) is executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed.

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "04", "05" and "06" in this order when the transition control to the big win game state or the small win game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the processing during the opening of the big winning prize (Step S96), the process of monitoring the remaining balls in the big winning prize (Step S57), and the waiting time management processing before reopening the big winning prize (Step S98) in this order. A big winning game or a small winning game is executed at a predetermined timing.

It should be noted that, when conditions for ending the jackpot game state are established during the jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in order of "04", "05", "07" and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described processing during opening of the big winning opening (step S96), monitoring processing for remaining balls in the big winning opening (step S97), jackpot ending interval processing (step S99), and special symbol game ending processing (step S100). are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is terminated.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Also, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 127 described later) of step S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 120 also branches the process flow according to the status, like the special symbol control process.

The processing program of this embodiment is programmed so that when the processing is branched according to the status, pure return processing from the small module to the parent module is possible with a call instruction. As a result, in this embodiment, the program capacity can be reduced compared to the case where a jump table is arranged for executing the above process.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 122 shows special symbol storage check processing by the main CPU 101 . The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by load processing (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating special symbol storage check processing (step S112). When determining that the control state flag is not "00", the main CPU 101 terminates the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is "00", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pending number (second start memory number) of the second start opening prize (variable display of the second special symbol) is "0". When it is determined that the number of pending second start opening winning prizes is not "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S114. When it is determined that the number of reserved second start opening winning prizes is "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S119.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start memory number corresponding to the pending number of second start opening prizes. In this embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being variably displayed or held. In the second special symbol start memory area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being variably displayed is stored as start memory information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (reserved ball) of the second special symbol for four times held. is stored as start-up memory information. In addition, the start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes data indicating, for example, the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value obtained when the second start port 440 is won, and the determined variation pattern. be

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage transfer processing based on the second starting opening winning (step S115). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3) respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub-control circuit 200 . After that, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value ("01") indicating a special symbol variable display time management process. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub-control circuit 200 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs big hit/small hit determination processing (step S117). In this process, the main CPU 101 selects the random value for judging the big hit that is extracted at the time of winning the starting opening and is previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the determination value data is acquired by referring to the winning determination table (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the type of winning start opening. Based on the obtained determination value data, the main CPU 101 determines (hit determination) which of the "big win", "minor win" and "losing" is won.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the variable display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbols in the waiting time timer (step S118). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of pending first start wins (variable display of first special symbol) (second start memory number) is "0". When it is determined that the number of pending first start opening winning prizes is not "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S120. When it is determined that the number of pending first start opening prizes is "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S122.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start memory number corresponding to the pending number of first start opening winning prizes. In this embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being variably displayed or held. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being variably displayed is stored as start memory information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (reserved ball) of the first special symbol for four times held. is stored as start-up memory information. It should be noted that the start memory information of each first special symbol start memory area includes, for example, data indicating a hit determination random number value, a symbol random number value, and a determined variation pattern obtained at the time of winning the first start port 5442. be

Next, a special symbol storage transfer process is performed based on the first start opening winning (step S121). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3) respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub-control circuit 200 . After that, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S116.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs demonstration display processing for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub-control circuit 200 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 123 shows a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating special symbol display time management processing (step S131). When determining that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 terminates the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variable display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the variable display has been determined has expired. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 terminates the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S133.

At step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot". When determining that the special symbol game is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S142. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S134.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 further determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "minor win". When determining that the special symbol game is a "small hit", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S137. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "minor hit", that is, when the special symbol game is a "loss", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs time reduction number subtraction processing. This time reduction number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value ("08") indicating a special symbol game end process (step S136). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S137, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small win flag indicating a small win. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S138.

In step S138, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value ("03") indicating the jackpot start interval management process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer to a jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) (step S139).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big win start command or a small win start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S140). Thereby, a big hit start command or a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 .

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11), and sets in the main RAM 103 the upper limit of the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designation command). Then, a round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). The number-of-rounds display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the number of remaining rounds in a predetermined pattern. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S142, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S143.

In step S143, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time saving number counter, the time saving flag and the probability variation flag. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S138.

[Time saving number of times subtraction processing]
FIG. 124 shows the time reduction number subtraction process by the main CPU 101 . The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S151). The time-saving number counter counts until the set number of times of time-saving (in this embodiment, 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times) reaches 0. Subtraction is a counter. When the value of the time saving number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. When the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time saving number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as a time saving flag. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

[Jackpot end interval processing]
FIG. 125 shows the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has expired. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 terminates the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the number-of-times-for-large-winning-awards-opens display LED pattern flag. The number of times of winning opening display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the big winning opening 540 is to be periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. flag. When the big winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol per end display command to the sub-control circuit 200 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating special symbol game end processing (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot" (step S166). When determining that the special symbol game is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S167. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S174.

In step S<b>167 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a big hit flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 .

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a variable probability big hit (step S168). In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S169. If it is not a variable probability big hit, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as a variable probability flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as a time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a prescribed number of times of time saving (in this embodiment, 100 times as an example) in the time saving number counter (step S172).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the small hit flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described time reduction number subtraction process (step S175). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 126 shows variation pattern table setting processing by the main CPU 101 . The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described power-on process or the jackpot end interval process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). When the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S182. If the power is not turned on, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the variable probability flag is "1" (step S183). When the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S184. When the value of the variable probability flag is "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

[Normal symbol control process]
FIG. 127 shows normal symbol control processing by the main CPU 101 . The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. In addition, the numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the left side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. stored in a predetermined storage area in the The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 127, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196, which will be described later, based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of steps S162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 116) is also executed at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol memory check processing (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("00") indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending variable display of normal symbols, and the number of pending is "0". If it is not, a process such as hit determination is performed. Also, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("01") indicating the normal symbol variable display time monitoring process (step S193) described later, and the variable time determined in this process. to the wait timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the determined normal symbol variation time has passed, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol variable display time monitoring processing (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to the normal symbol control state flag when the value ("01") indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process has passed, and the normal symbol control state flag has passed. A value ("02") indicating normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S194) is set, and a waiting time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after determination is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, after the set waiting time has elapsed, the normal symbol display time monitoring process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and when the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S193 has passed, the winning It is determined whether or not the result of determination is "hit". Then, when the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric accessory opening setting process, and sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ( "03"). That is, by this process, setting is made so that the normal electric accessary product release process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not "hit", the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("04") indicating normal symbol game end processing (step S196) described later. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory release process when the result of the hit determination is determined to be "hit" in step S194 (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 determines that a predetermined number of prizes have been won while the normal electric accessory 460 is being opened. It is determined whether one of the conditions and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the normal electric accessory 460 has passed (the normal electric function opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the vane member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 (see, for example, FIG. 3). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating normal symbol game end processing (step S196), which will be described later. That is, by this process, the normal symbol game end process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol game end processing (step S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the pending number of variable display of normal symbols by "1". memory update. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to display the variable variation of the normal symbols next time. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“00”) indicating normal symbol storage check processing. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-described normal symbol memory check process (step S192) is set to be executed. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub control circuit main process. This sub-control circuit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 128, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. (step S201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). The watchdog timer is set to a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) when activated, and power-off processing is executed when the service pulse is not written (during timeout).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes operation means input processing (step S203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes effect mode determination processing (step S205). The effect mode determination process includes scenario presetting process, effect determination process (secret A stage 2002), prefetch effect selection process (high probability stage 2004), background change control process (high probability stage 2004), background change continuous possible number of times, which will be described later. Judgment processing (high probability stage 2004), variation scenario determination processing (high probability stage 2004), chance up control processing (high probability stage 2004), pending change determination processing (high probability stage 2004), character lamp effect control processing, full screen It is composed of subroutines such as effect control processing, character lamp effect control processing, and the like. These processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. 134 to 165. FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command transmission processing (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes drawing control processing (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 .

Next, the audio control circuit 205 executes audio control processing (step S208). In this process, the audio control circuit 205 performs audio control for causing the speaker 24 to output audio based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 .

Next, the lamp control circuit 206 executes lamp control processing (step S209). In this process, the lamp control circuit 206 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the lamp 25 based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 .

Next, the role product control circuit 207 executes a role product control process (step S210). In this process, the role product control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the performance drive motor that operates the movable role product unit based on the message (performance designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 . In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is finished, the processes of steps S202 to S210 are repeatedly executed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 129 shows command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201 . The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203 (step S241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 checks the consistency of the received command (step S242). Consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists upon command reception and that the data has no errors or omissions.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs sub lottery processing (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub lottery process, all items related to the effect including the effect pattern may be selected by lottery. The effect contents (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information in another subroutine process. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub lottery process, and thereafter, the effect contents to be executed based on the effect pattern are selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

[Command transmission processing]
FIG. 130 shows command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201 . The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203 . This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes direct table registration processing (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets a direct table corresponding to the message and effect information stored in the direct buffer in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 . This direct table registration processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes message transmission processing (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads out the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and performs a process of transmitting the message to predetermined control circuits 204-207. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 131 shows message setting processing by the sub CPU 201 . The message setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting presence/absence of system operation (step S262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets stage information and each effect information (step S263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores messages indicating devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmission destinations, presence/absence of system operation, stage information, various performance information, and notice patterns. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[Direct table registration process]
FIG. 132 shows direct table registration processing by the sub CPU 201 . The direct table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a slave table to be used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S274). After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the direct table registration process.

[Message sending process]
FIG. 133 shows message transmission processing by the sub CPU 201 . The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 201 sends the message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. is transmitted (step S281).

Next, after completing the transmission of the message, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding unnecessary direct tables (step S282). After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[Production mode determination processing by sub CPU 201]
Next, details of the effect mode determination processing (step S205) of the sub CPU 201 will be described. A performance mode is formed with characteristics for each of a plurality of performance stages.

[Production stage]
First, with reference to FIG. 134, state transitions of a plurality of production stages will be described. FIG. 134 is a block diagram showing an example of state transitions of a plurality of game state stages.

In the normal stage 2000, the winning probability of the hit determination (hereinafter referred to as "big hit determination") performed as the processing of the main CPU 101 when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 is relatively It is a low low probability state and a state without electric support (that is, a normal game state). If the presentation state is the normal stage 2000, the player can grasp that the game state is the normal game state (low probability state).

A high-probability stage 2004 is a high-probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the jackpot determination is relatively high, and is a state with an electric support. If the presentation state is the high-probability stage 2004, the player can grasp that the game state is the high-probability game state.

Both the secret A stage 2002 and the secret B stage 2006 are high-probability gaming states in which the probability of winning the jackpot determination is relatively high, and a state with an electric support, or a winning probability of the jackpot determination is relatively low. It is a low probability state and a state with an electric sapo. In the secrecy A stage 2002 and the secrecy B stage 2006, the player cannot or grasps whether the game state is the high-probability game state or the low-probability state by looking at the display effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Have difficulty. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the secrecy A stage 2002, it is disclosed whether it is in a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability state, depending on the final result of the battle production described later. . In addition, the character subtraction effect, which will be described later, performed during the battle effect is an intermediate effect toward the final result of the battle effect. It can make the player happy and sad.

In the normal stage 2000 (low-probability gaming state, no time reduction), when the 8R jackpot (jackpot where the jackpot 540 opens and closes for 8 rounds) is drawn, after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state stage is a hidden A stage 2002 (high There is a specified number of electric sapo in the probability game state, or there is a specified number of electric sapo in the low probability game state). In addition, "with power supply" is a state in which the time saving game is executed, and "without power supply" is a state in which the time saving game is not executed.

In the secret A stage 2002, when the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot, or when a specified number of time-saving games are completed in a high-probability game state, the production stage transitions to a high-probability stage 2004.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the secrecy A stage 2002, when the predetermined number of time-saving games are consumed in the low-probability gaming state, the normal stage 2000 is entered. In the normal stage 2000 , if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot or a 15R jackpot, the production stage transitions to a high accuracy stage 2004 .

In the high-probability stage 2004 , if the result of the jackpot determination is the 8R jackpot, the effect stage transitions to the secret A stage 2002 . In the secret A stage 2002 , if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot, the effect stage transitions to the secret B stage 2006 . In the concealment B stage 2006, if the result of the jackpot determination is the 8R jackpot, the production stage transitions to the concealment A stage 2002. - 特許庁In the secrecy B stage 2006, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 15R jackpot, the effect stage transitions to a high probability stage 2004. - 特許庁In the high-probability stage 2004 , if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot, the effect stage transitions to the secret B stage 2006 . In the secrecy B stage 2006, when the specified times of time saving are consumed, the production stage transitions to the normal stage 2000. - 特許庁

Incidentally, the number of rounds of the big hit described above is an example. In the above description, the transition to the game state of the secret A stage 2002 is made when the result of the jackpot determination is the 8R jackpot, but the game state is not limited to this. , the sub CPU 201 may perform a promotion effect during the big win game, and make the transition to the high probability stage 2004 after the big win is completed.

The secrecy A stage 2002 may have a higher expectation of a high probability gaming state than the secrecy B stage 2006, for example. Each of these concealment stages implements a unique production form. For example, in the concealment A stage 2002, a battle production is executed in which a plurality of characters are divided into friends and foes and play a knock-out battle.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the secrecy A stage 2002. FIG. In FIG. 135, the ally character CA1 is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the enemy character CA2 is displayed on the right side of the screen. Also, the type of allied characters currently fighting and the number of allied characters (remaining number) are displayed on the upper left side of the screen, and the type of enemy characters currently fighting and the number of enemy characters are displayed on the upper right side of the screen. (remaining number of people) is displayed. Although not shown in FIG. 135, other information such as identification symbol variable display information and pending starting memory number information may be appropriately displayed.

The above-mentioned battle production is a production that serves as an indicator of whether the high probability game state or the low probability game state is likely in the secrecy A stage 2002, and if a certain requirement is satisfied, Whether it is a high-probability game state or a low-probability game state is determined. For example, when the enemy group is annihilated, the high-probability game state is determined, and when the ally group is annihilated, the low-probability game state is determined. Therefore, the effect of the process until one of the enemy and ally groups is annihilated is an index effect indicating which of the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state is more likely. For example, when a subtraction effect is performed in which the number of people in the enemy group is reduced, the player can be given a sense of expectation that there is a high possibility of being in a high-probability game state, and a subtraction effect is performed in which the number of people in the ally group is decreased. This can give the player the impression that the possibility of being in a high-probability state is low (probability of being in a low-probability gaming state is high). In the secrecy A stage 2002, a rough scenario of such a battle production is determined in advance before the secrecy A stage 2002 starts. The performance is going on. The scenario presentation selection process (secret A stage 2002) will be described below.

Further, for example, in the secrecy B stage 2006, a battle effect is executed in which the main character of the allied characters fights one-on-one with the enemy character. When the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, an effect is executed in which the main character wins in the battle effect. In the battle production in the secret B stage 2006, for example, a) a production zone in which an enemy character can be defeated without fail if the main character attacks, and b) whichever of the main character and the enemy character performs a preemptive attack. c) a production zone in which an enemy character makes a preemptive attack are prepared. Also, in this secrecy B stage 2006, whether or not the game is in the high-probability game state is notified by the operation of the movable decorative body 1040 of the upper front accessory 1000. FIG. For example, in the final variable display (the final variable display in the time-saving gaming state (special symbol game) or the last variable display (special symbol game) in which whether or not the high probability gaming state is confidential), the upper front role If the movable decoration 1040 of the object 1000 falls (moves) toward the operation limit position, it is in a high probability game state, and if the movable decoration 1040 does not fall, it is in a low probability game state. However, in the final variable display, a fall premonitory effect may be performed to make the player expect that the movable decorative body 1040 will fall. Also, when the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, in addition to the falling of the movable decorative body 1040, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 all operate. By operating to the limit position (for example, see FIG. 100), it is notified that the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit.

Also, in the secrecy B stage 2006, transitions between the above-described production zones (a) to (c) are performed at any time according to the number of executions of the variable display (special symbol game). For example, after the jackpot game state is over, the number of executions of the special symbol game stays in the above-mentioned a) production zone between 1 and 10 times, and stays in the above-mentioned production zone between 11 and 90 times. During the 91st to 99th times, the player stays in the effect zone of c), and in the 100th special symbol game, an effect indicating that it is the final game in the secret B stage 2006 is performed. Needless to say, the effect in the secrecy B stage 2006 is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the index effect can indicate which of the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is more likely in the secret A stage 2002. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It can also be adopted for other effects that indicate the degree of highness. For example, the above index effect can be used in the following effects, but the following effects are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other effects can be used.・When the high-probability gaming state is disclosed but the duration of the high-probability gaming state is kept secret, an effect that indicates the length of the duration (expectation that the duration is long) production showing degree).・When it is disclosed that it is a time-saving gaming state, but the duration of the time-saving gaming state is kept secret, an effect that indicates the length of the duration (the degree of expectation that the duration is long) production shown). An effect indicating the degree of expectation that a performance section is set for one or a plurality of starting memories and that the starting memories included in the performance section include a reach variation performance or a big hit.

The degree of expectation (reliability) for a predetermined internal state (that is, an advantageous state) such as a big hit or a high-probability game state of each notice effect is a "jackpot" or a "high-probability game state" when each notice effect is executed. ”, the probability that each notice effect will be executed to become a “big hit” or “high probability game state”, and the probability that each notice effect will be executed to become “miss” or “low probability game state”. It is a numerical value divided by the sum with the probability of becoming an internal state (that is, a disadvantageous state) of . However, since the "expectation level" can include a case where the expectation level is 100% and a case where the expectation level is 0%, strictly speaking, there are cases where the above division does not hold (for example, the production is executed Since it can include the case where the game state or winning or losing is definitely notified when it is done, it is not suitable to divide 1 by 0. In this case, the expectation level includes 100%, 0%, or the concept of presence or absence. that would be the case).

[Scenario production selection processing (secret A stage)]
The sub CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting the character that was defeated in the battle between the friend and foe from the number of participating characters, and erases the defeated character from the screen. A more specific description will be given of the mode of presentation related to the secrecy A stage 2002. FIG.

The processing for the effect form includes a step of determining the scenario effect in advance before the concealment A stage 2002 starts (specifically, during execution of the jackpot game), and when the concealment A stage 2002 starts, the variation pattern is changed. and a step of changing, correcting, etc. the scenario in accordance with the performance selected based on the above. The “scenario” is the development at which point in the progress of the game in the secret A stage 2002 (the number of time reductions) the character is subjected to subtraction processing. Since the "scenario" includes correspondence between the number of times of time saving and character subtraction, it may be rephrased as a "production map". When the secrecy A stage 2002 starts, the sub CPU 201 advances character subtraction processing by executing the determined scenario.

The sub CPU 201 predetermines the team composition and the scenario, since the performance of the secrecy A stage 2002 is a team competition. The sub CPU 201 sets the scenario according to the combination of the attribute of the competing team, the degree of expectation of the high-probability game, and the number of times of time saving. FIG. 136 is a flowchart illustrating an example of scenario presetting processing. The sub CPU 201 repeatedly executes this flowchart at a predetermined timing as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process (step S205). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the result of the jackpot determination process is an 8R jackpot, it executes the scenario presetting process of FIG. According to FIG. 134, it can be seen that the transition from a stage other than the concealment A stage 2002 to the concealment A stage 2002 is triggered by the result of the jackpot determination process being an 8R jackpot.

In this embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the scenario pre-setting process of FIG. The scenario pre-setting process of FIG. 136 may be executed when the jackpot other than 8R is won.

The sub CPU 201 draws lots for parameters suggesting the degree of expectation for the high probability game in the secrecy A stage 2002 (step S300). This parameter includes, for example, four stages A to D, with A having the lowest probability variation expectation. B has an intermediate degree of probability variation expectation, and C has a large degree of probability variation expectation. D corresponds to confirmation of a high-probability game. The sub CPU 201 records the determined parameters in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM (not shown in FIG. 7).

Next, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for the mode of character appearance order in the secrecy A stage 2002, ie, the mode of battle participation order, for each of the enemies and allies (step S302). The order of appearance of the character ROMs selected by lottery is also recorded in the work RAM 203 . It should be noted that when the information on the order of appearance is lost from the work RAM due to a power failure, the sub CPU 201 sets a one-on-one battle effect between specific characters. At this time, the "specific character" to be confronted one-on-one may be set to be a character to finally face off one-on-one when normal performance is executed without power interruption. For example, the mode of the battle production selected by lottery is the battle production between the friendly group of "the main character's character + α" and the enemy group of "the main character's rival character + β", and finally the main character and the main character. When the information is lost due to a power outage, the sub CPU 201 does not produce an effect in which α and β confront each other when the main character and the rival character are in a one-on-one confrontation mode. It can be controlled so that a confrontation with a character is set.

Next, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for a combination of numbers of friendly characters and enemy characters (2×2, 6×5, etc.) (step S304). Furthermore, the sub-CPU 201 selects the above-described effect map 2102 by lottery based on the attributes of the ally team and the enemy team. The attribute of the team may be determined by the variable probability parameter and the combination, or may be determined by the variable probability parameter, the combination and the number of times of time saving. The sub CPU 201 refers to the conversion table based on the attribute, determines the pattern value, and determines the effect map 2102 based on the pattern value.

FIG. 137 shows an example of the correspondence relationship between the battle attribute 2100 and the effect map 2102. As shown in FIG. The sub CPU 201 determines a pattern value (the pattern value is 4 in the example of FIG. 137) based on the battle attribute 2100, and assigns the effect map 2102 to the battle attribute 2100 using the pattern value as a key. Multiple pattern values may be assigned to the battle attribute 2100 . The sub CPU 201 determines the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100 by referring to the table. In determining the pattern value, the sub CPU 201 increases the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100 by including the number of time reductions in addition to the expectation parameter and combination, thereby creating a production map that can be assigned to the battle attribute 2100. 2102 can be colorful.

As shown in FIG. 137, the effect map 2102 consists of a set of a plurality of small maps 2110, the small map 2110, in the secrecy A stage 2002, a predetermined number (for example, 6) of times of time reduction as one unit, the range of Based on the number of friend or foe characters to be subtracted within the variable display (for example, the number of characters in the range of 1 to 3 for each friend or foe), and information on which variable display number of the variable display number is to be subtracted. Configured. "Friend-1" indicates that the friend character is subtracted by "1". "Friend-0" indicates that the friend character is not subtracted. "Enemy -1" indicates that the enemy character is subtracted by "1". "Enemy side -0" indicates that the enemy side character is not subtracted. The number of small maps 2110 combined with the effect map 2102 varies depending on the prescribed number of times (time saving number of times).

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of an effect map 2102 used for scenario lottery. In this embodiment, the effect map 2102 is composed of a plurality of parts, for example, a combination of a first half map and a second half map, and the sub CPU 201 uses the pattern value as a key, and for example, each has the same pattern value. A first half map and a second half map are selected (steps S306 and S308), and the overall effect map 2102 is formed by combining them. As a result, the sub CPU 201 can form a scenario in which the number of characters corresponding to the combination of players is evenly subtracted throughout the time-saving gaming state. In this specification, an effect in which the number of characters is subtracted is referred to as a "subtraction effect".

When the sub CPU 201 completes (or selects) the entire production map, among the small maps 2110 included in the overall production map, at least one character is subjected to subtraction processing for the small map 2110, which character ( Based on the lottery table, it is determined whether the subtraction process (subtraction effect) of the friend character or the enemy character is to be performed (step S310). The sub CPU 201 combines the number of times the subtraction process is performed and the character information with the effect map 2102, and records the effect map 2102 in the work RAM. The sub CPU 201 may switch the lottery table for the small map 2110 according to the content of the overall effect map. The map is recorded in work RAM.

A mode in which the variable probability parameter, the number of times of reduced working hours, and the combination of the number of people are combined is, for example, as shown in FIG. 138 . The range of this mode is defined as a table for each category of low, medium, high, and fixed expectations for the high probability game in the secret A stage. FIG. 138 shows an example in which the first half map and the second half map are applied to this aspect.

If there is no pattern in the table that combines the variable probability parameter (step S300) and the combination of the number of people (step S302), the sub CPU 201 determines that, for example, the variable probability parameter is "D" and the combination of the number of people is defined as a fixed category. In cases other than the specified mode (2×2, etc.), any one of A to C, which is a variable probability parameter other than D, may be determined by re-lottery. Incidentally, the sub CPU 201 may give priority to the variable probability parameter and change the combination of players by a re-lottery.

The sub CPU 201 creates a production map 2102 so that either the specific character A that appears last on the ally team or the specific character B that appears last on the enemy team decreases at the end of the number of time reductions. can be configured not to include the subtraction processing information for For example, if the combination of numbers is 6×4 (6 allies, 4 enemies), it can be reduced to 5 allies and 3 enemies. The sub CPU 201 causes characters to appear at the start of the secrecy A stage 2002 according to the combination of the number of people, but it is also possible to prevent the combination of the number of people from matching the number of displayed characters. For example, if the enemy team has a number of characters including a specific character, the specific character will appear in the final variable display without participating in the battle. In addition, the specific character can be excluded from the performance map 2102 as a target of subtraction processing.

When the sub CPU 201 ends the process of selecting the small map 2110 (step S310), the sub CPU 201 determines the BGM in the game of the secrecy A stage 2002 (step S312). Depending on which BGM is selected, the degree of expectation for the high-probability game state in the secrecy A stage 2002 is suggested. With the above, the scenario pre-setting process by the sub CPU 201 ends.

Next, processing for determining the effect in the secrecy A stage 2002 will be described. In the secret A stage 2002, subtraction of the friend or foe character determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during execution of the big win game) is performed in accordance with the aspect of the performance determined for each time saving game. By adjusting and reinforcing the processing scenario, the scenario can be diversified according to the game result in the secrecy A stage 2002 . In the originally determined scenario, the character subtraction process is executed evenly over the entire number of time reductions, and the sub CPU 201 performs the process of determining the presentation mode in the concealment A stage 2002 evenly. By adjusting the scenario within a range that does not impair the story of the subtraction processing of the character that is executed without being executed, the player can enjoy the versatility of scenario development while maintaining the outline of the story decided before the start of the secrecy A stage 2002. can be made aware of

Furthermore, in the secrecy A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 displays the holding information (starting memory information), and while not displaying the number of times of working hours information on the liquid crystal display device, straddles the digestion of a plurality of holding starting memories. By executing the scenario in the second step, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how the series of scenarios are continuously developed during the period of the secrecy A stage 2002 without the player being conscious of the pending information and the number of times of time saving. can.

It should be noted that in this specification, the suspended starting memory may be simply referred to as suspension. In addition, the process of displaying a variable identification pattern for the suspended starting memory is referred to as suspension digestion. Furthermore, up to four starting memories based on winnings to the first starting port 5442 and starting memories based on winnings to the second starting port 440 can be reserved. Called Hold, 2nd Hold, 3rd Hold and 4th Hold, hold digestion is performed in this order.

In the secrecy A stage 2002, in order to diversify the scenario production in accordance with the mode of production that is determined for each time reduction, provisional fluctuations ( A variable display corresponding to one starting memory) is converted into one or a plurality of blocks, and an effect can be set for each block. For the sake of convenience, this change is hereinafter referred to as "provisional change" in the sense that it is different from the suspended variable display.

Figure 139 is an example showing the provisional variation setting for each hold of the first hold to the fourth hold, together with the time sequence, and assuming that four holds are recorded, the sub CPU 201 is a variable display at the time of hold digestion Set the number of temporary changes to match the time. For example, if the variable display time is 3.5 seconds, the number of provisional changes: 1, if the variable display time is 7.5 seconds, the number of provisional changes: 2, and if the variable display time is 11.5 seconds, the number of provisional changes : Set 3. In this embodiment, the selection ratio of the variable display time of 3.5 seconds, the variable display time of 7.5 seconds, and the variable display time of 11.5 seconds is 1:1:1, but this selection ratio may be changed as appropriate. You can

According to FIG. 139, when the variable display time of the first suspension is 3.5 seconds, the temporary fluctuation is set to 4.0 seconds, which is the total of 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0.5 seconds), When the second pending variable display time is 7.5 seconds, the first provisional change is 4.0 seconds, the second provisional change is 3.5 seconds, and the interval period (0.5 seconds) is added If it is set to 4.0 seconds and the third pending variable display time is 11.5 seconds, then the first and second provisional changes are each 4.0 seconds and the third provisional change is 3.5 seconds. and the interval period (0.5 seconds) are set to 4.0 seconds in total, and the variable display time of the fourth suspension is 3.5 seconds. 5 seconds) is set to 4.0 seconds. The reason why the interval period is included in the provisional fluctuation is that this period is used for processing of effects. FIG. 139 shows that the provisional variation number is determined according to the variable display time (variation pattern), but this is an example, and the sub CPU 201 selects an arbitrary provisional variation number for the variation pattern. You can also Furthermore, the sub CPU 201 can set the variation time of one provisional variation to a predetermined value, and can set the variation time of the provisional variation not to include the interval period. From the viewpoint of making the player aware that it is not the effect of , it is preferable to include the interval time in the variation time of the provisional variation.

Next, the processing for determining the effect in the secrecy A stage 2002 will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of an effect determination process (secret A stage 2002) that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process (step S205). The sub CPU 201 refers to the effect stage flag and checks whether or not it is the secrecy A stage 2002 (step S320). Here, if it is not the secrecy A stage 2002, the effect determination process is terminated, and if it is the secrecy A stage 2002, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second start hole 440 (step S322). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S322 that there is no game ball entering the second starting hole 440, it ends the effect determination process. A provisional variation number is determined, selected, or set based on the variation pattern as a result of analysis of the command of the main control board (step S324). The provisional variation number is uniquely determined by the variation pattern (see, for example, FIG. 141), but is not limited to this, and may be determined as an arbitrary provisional variation number as described above. Note that FIG. 141 is an example of the variation pattern table. In this example, this variation pattern table is stored in the program ROM 202 mounted in the sub-control circuit 200, and the sub-CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table according to the variable display time command transmitted from the main CPU 101. The variation pattern is determined, but not limited to this, for example, the variation pattern table is stored in the main ROM mounted on the main control circuit 100, the main CPU determines the variation pattern table, and the sub control circuit 200 It is also possible to send a command to .

After selecting the provisional variable number, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a scenario effect being executed (step S326). The sub CPU 201 performs scenario lottery within the range of the number of reservations. Scenario lottery refers to determining by lottery which position within the range of the number of reservations the character subtraction process is to be performed at. For example, if it is assumed that there are four reserved starting memories, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery to determine in which of the first to fourth reservations the character subtraction process is to be performed. However, in the scenario lottery, in addition to the lottery to determine where the character subtraction process is to be performed within the range of the number of reservations, the character subtraction process is not performed, but the battle effect between the enemy character and the ally character (a battle effect that results in a draw). It may include a lottery as to which position to perform.

The sub CPU 201 refers to the production map 2102 at the time of the lottery to check whether or not the character subtraction is recorded in the small map 2110 covering the number of time reductions of the first to fourth reservations, and the character subtraction is performed. If it is determined that it is recorded, character subtraction processing is performed within the range of the number of reservations, and if it is determined that character subtraction is not recorded, character subtraction processing is not performed. The sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326 until the variable display of the first to fourth reservations targeted for the scenario lottery ends. When the variable display of the first to fourth suspensions targeted for the scenario presentation is completed, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S326 that there is no scenario presentation being executed, and thereafter, the first to fourth suspensions are displayed. It is determined whether or not the start memory is reserved in any of them (step S328).

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S328 that any one of the first to fourth reservations is reserved for the starting memory, it performs a scenario lottery for the reserved starting memory. As one means for adjusting the character subtraction processing position in accordance with the performance pattern determined in step 1, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory in which the reach fluctuation performance is recorded in the pending start memory. (step S330). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S330 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, it determines up to the start memory in which the reach change effect is recorded as scenario lottery targets (step S332). For example, even if the starting memory is reserved in all of the first reservation to the fourth reservation, when the starting memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded in the third reservation is reserved, the sub CPU 201 is the first The starting memories of the reserve to the third reserve are determined to be subject to the scenario lottery (step S332), and the starting memories reserved to the fourth reserve are not subject to the scenario lottery. Furthermore, for example, when the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is held in a plurality such as the second hold and the fourth hold, the hold is canceled first (the variable display is performed first). The starting memories up to the hold (starting memories of the first and second reservations) are determined as scenario lottery targets (step S332), and the starting memories reserved in the third and fourth reservations are not included in the scenario lottery. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S330 that there is no starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, the sub CPU 201 determines all of the reserved starting memories as scenario lottery targets (step S334). In step S330, if it is determined that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the pending start memories, control is performed such that the character subtraction effect and the reach change effect do not overlap. Since it is not necessary, the control load is smaller than when it is determined in step S330 that there is a starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the reserved starting memory. ,

The sub CPU 201 performs the processing from step S328 onward as the scenario lottery, and performs the starting memory reserved in the first to fourth reservations (for entry into the second starting port 440) at the time when the scenario effect being executed ends. The starting memory that was withheld based on this) is targeted. In other words, when there is a scenario effect being executed, the next scenario lottery is not performed, but when the scenario effect being executed ends, one or more of the first to fourth reserves are started at that time. Since the scenario lottery is conducted with memory as the object, in the secrecy A stage 2002, as long as the starting memory is reserved in any of the first to fourth reservations, the scenario production will be repeatedly executed without interruption. . As a result, it is possible to make the player unconscious of the performance in the starting memory unit and to make the player interested in the scenario performance, thereby making it possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a relatively long period of time. Become.

In this example, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the next scenario lottery when there is a scenario effect being executed. A scenario lottery may be conducted if at least one starting memory is reserved in the reserve to the fourth reserve.

The reason why the sub CPU 201 targets the start memory up to the suspension including the reach variation effect for the scenario lottery and does not target the start memory for the suspension after the reach variation effect is the target for the lottery is that after the reach variation effect is lost, the character This is because even if the subtraction process is performed, the player's interest in the result of the battle between the characters will decrease. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can adjust the subtraction processing position of the character based on the rendering of the secrecy A stage 2002 .

It should be noted that the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 440 in step S322, and if it determines that the game ball has entered the second starting port 440, the processing from step S324 onwards is performed. Although it is running, when it is determined that there is a game ball entered into the first start port 5442 instead of the second start port 440, one suspended based on the enter ball into the first start port 5442 Scenario lottery is conducted with only one starting memory. In this case, a plurality of provisional fluctuations may or may not be set for one start memory that is reserved based on the ball entering the first start port 5442 . Then, if it is determined in the scenario pre-setting process that the variable display for the start memory withheld based on the entry to the first start port 5442 is to perform a subtraction effect, to the first start port 5442 A subtraction effect may be performed in the variable display of the start memory withheld based on the entry of the ball. However, the variable display of one starting memory (or provisional change set for the one starting memory) held based on the entry into the first starting port 5442, and the following of the one starting memory The subtraction effect is not performed across the provisional fluctuation set for the start memory withheld based on the entry into the second start port 440 that is digested after the second start. Further, when the starting memory is suspended based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 5442, the sub CPU 201 performs the scenario lottery only when the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, and when it is not a big hit. For example, control may be performed so that the identification pattern is only variably displayed at the end of the screen of the first special pattern display section 73 or the liquid crystal display device 16 without selecting the effect.

The sub CPU 201 processes the suspension of the scenario lottery range as a performance adjustment target, such as determining the character subtraction processing position for each suspension range that is the target of the scenario lottery. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 checks the degree of expectation of the effect in the final suspension of the scenario lottery range, for example, the intensity of the effect (step S336), and reflects the result in the effect of the suspension belonging to the scenario being executed. good. For example, when the sub CPU 201 discriminates the heat of the performance for the final suspension of the scenario lottery range, it may apply a read-ahead performance or continuous advance notice performance corresponding to the heat of the performance to the performance of the suspension of the scenario lottery target.

After the above processing, the sub CPU 201 performs a process for allocating an effect such as a character subtraction process effect to a provisional change for the pending effect of the scenario lottery target. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect map 2102 in order to determine the temporary variable number necessary for the character subtraction process, and sets the scenario to the start memory of the lottery target (for example, the first to fourth reservations are reserved). start memory), it is determined whether or not there is a start memory for which subtraction processing is to be performed (step S338).

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S338 that there is a starting memory for executing the subtraction process within the scenario lottery target range, the sub CPU 201 counts the characters to be subtracted by dividing them into friend or foe (step S340). Next, when the number of characters to be subtracted for both sides and enemies is 2 or more (step S342: Y), the sub CPU 201 records the order of subtraction processing for characters of 2 or more (step S344). Note that the order between the friend and foe characters may be determined in the effect map 2102, or may be determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 201, as a result of determining the scenario lottery target (step S332, step S334), determines whether or not there is an overlap between the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect in the scenario lottery target holds. This is determined by referring to the effect map 2102 (step S346). Based on this result, the sub CPU 201 can determine the number of provisional fluctuations that can be used for reach precursor fluctuations, or perform effect adjustment processing such as adjusting the position of provisional fluctuations where subtraction processing is performed.

FIGS. 143 and 144 are diagrams showing an example of starting memories held in the first to fourth reserves. FIG. 143 shows that the starting memory is reserved in all of the first to fourth reservations, and neither the subtraction processing nor the reach variation effect is executed in the first and fourth reservations, and the subtraction of the enemy character in the second reservation. It indicates that the process (the process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) will be performed, and that the reach variation effect will be performed in the third hold. FIG. 144 shows that the starting memory is reserved in all of the first to fourth reservations, and neither the subtraction process nor the ready-to-win effect is executed in the first, second, and fourth reservations. This indicates that the character subtraction process (the process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) and the reach variation effect are performed in duplicate. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that there is an overlap between the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect, it sets an overlap flag in the work RAM area (step S348).

When the sub CPU 201 confirms that the duplication flag is set, and if the character to be subtracted is an enemy character, the sub CPU 201 allows overlapping execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process. Executed in a variable performance. On the other hand, although the sub CPU 201 has confirmed that the overlap flag is set, if the character to be subtracted is an ally character, performing an effect in which the ally character is defeated in the reach variation effect is not expected for the reach change effect. In order to unnecessarily reduce the degree of reach fluctuation, overlapping execution of the reach variation performance and the subtraction processing is not allowed, and the performance of the subtraction processing is not executed in the reach variation performance. At this time, it does not prevent the subtraction processing effect of the ally character from being executed in the temporary change just before the reach change effect, but the defeated ally character will be revived and will reach the compensation effect such as adding an attack. It is sufficient to perform it in a variable performance. Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 may allocate the subtraction processing of the teammate character to a provisional variation that is a predetermined number away from the reach variation effect within the range of suspension of the target of the scenario lottery. Incidentally, when the character to be subtracted is an ally character, instead of disallowing overlapping execution of the reach fluctuation effect and the subtraction process, overlapping execution of the reach fluctuation effect and the subtraction process is allowed, but the reach If the variation effect and the subtraction process overlap, the subtraction process may be reallocated to another provisional variation.

In order to allocate the ready-to-win portent effect to the provisional fluctuation, the sub CPU 201 includes a hold (for example, the third hold in FIG. For example, it can be used as a ready-to-win portent effect that can be assigned to provisional fluctuations of FIG. 144 (first hold and second hold) (step S350). This is because the performance of the subtraction processing of the enemy character is executed with the reach variation performance. That is, the sub CPU 201 can use [(total number of pending temporary fluctuations for scenario lottery) - (number of subtraction processes - 1)] as a temporary fluctuation number that can be applied to the ready-to-win portent effect. The sub CPU 201 executes step S352, which will be described later, without executing step S350 when the character to be subtracted is a teammate character.

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect do not overlap, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S352 without setting the overlap flag. The sub CPU 201 subtracts the provisional variation number to which the effect of the subtraction processing of the character (not limited to the friend or foe) is assigned from the total provisional variation number determined for the suspension subject to the scenario lottery. (Residual provisional fluctuation) can be used for reach sign production. Here, the sub CPU 201 performs the ready-to-win portent effect only when it is determined that the remaining provisional variation number is 0 or more, and determines not to perform the ready-to-win portent effect when the remaining provisional variation number is 0. The control processing can be made smooth, and an effect that the ready reach fluctuation effect can be expected can be expected by this reach sign effect. In addition, when the remaining provisional fluctuation number is 1, it may be determined not to perform the ready-to-reach portent, or it may be determined whether or not to execute the ready-to-reach portent with one time as the upper limit.

The starting memory reserved within the scope of the scenario lottery target does not include the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, and the starting memory next to the starting memory to be consumed last among the scenario lottery targets is In the case of the ready-to-win variation effect, although the next starting memory is not subject to the scenario lottery, the sub CPU 201 performs the ready-to-reach portent effect to the provisional variation set for the starting memory to be consumed last among the scenario lottery targets. , and the reach variation effect may be performed in the variable display of the starting memory stored in the next hold.

The sub CPU 201 determines the number of executions of the ready-to-win portent effect, and subtracts the determined number of times of execution of the ready-to-win portent effect from the total provisional variation number determined for the hold targeted for the scenario lottery. The variation may be used for effecting character subtraction processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 145, the sub CPU 201 selects a ready-to-win sign effect depending on whether or not the duplication flag is set. Specifically, in step S354, the sub CPU 201 checks whether or not the overlap flag is set, and if it determines that the overlap flag is set, determines the ready-to-win portent effect as the specific effect (step S356), and sets the enemy character. To make a player have a feeling of expectation that is defeated in a reach variation presentation. Here, the specific performance is a performance that can give the player a high sense of expectation. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S354 that the duplication flag is not set, the ready-to-win portent effect is determined to be an effect that gives the player a smaller sense of expectation than the specific effect (step S358). The sub CPU 201 may select the ready-to-win portent effect from a plurality of effects set in the table. When the ready-to-win portent effect is performed a plurality of times within the scope of the scenario effect target, the sub CPU 201 changes the table so that the same effect does not continue. However, the specific effect may be continued.

Next, the sub CPU 201 selects a provisional variation number to be used for a reach sign from the provisional variation numbers counted in step S350 or step S352 (step S360). For example, the sub CPU 201 may select the provisional variation number by changing the table because the necessary provisional variation number differs depending on the content of the ready-to-win portent effect. The sub CPU 201 selects the provisional fluctuations to be used for the ready-to-win portent effect from the provisional fluctuations having the slowest execution order among the pending temporary fluctuations for the scenario lottery. Thereby, the ready-to-win portent effect can be arranged at a position close to the ready-to-reach fluctuation effect. When "0 variation" is selected, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the ready-to-win portent effect without allocating the ready-to-win portent effect to the provisional variation. This concept of "0 change" includes both 0 tentative change and when no starting memory is reserved in any of the first through fourth reservations. That is, when the 0 provisional variation is selected, and when the starting memory is not suspended in any of the first to fourth suspensions, the sub CPU 201 assigns the ready-to-win sign effect to the provisional variation. Therefore, the reach sign production is not performed. In addition, when there is no ready-to-reach change effect in the start memory for the scenario lottery, the ready-to-win portent effect is a fake ready-to-reach portent effect. Incidentally, when the starting memory is not suspended in any of the first suspension to the fourth suspension, the fake ready-to-win sign effect is not performed.

By the way, as described above, if the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is not reserved in any of the first to fourth reservations, the sub CPU 201 stores all of the reserved starting memories in the scenario lottery. I'm trying to decide on the target. However, since the secrecy A stage 2002 is a time-saving game state, when the scenario lottery target is determined, the start memory is often reserved for all of the first to fourth reservations. Therefore, when the player understands that the scenario effect this time is intended for the four starting memories, at that time, there is a possibility that the range of reach variation effect is not included in the scope of the scenario effect this time. There is a risk that the player will perceive that the price is high, making it difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation. Therefore, when determining the target of the scenario lottery, if there is no starting memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded in any of the first to fourth reservations, the number of starting memories to be the target of the scenario lottery will be different each time. For example, by randomly determining by lottery, it becomes difficult to perceive that the reach variation effect is not included in the target range of the scenario effect this time. In particular, there is a possibility that it will be extremely unpleasant if the false reach prediction effect is performed even though the player has sensed that there is a high possibility that the reach fluctuation effect is not included in the target range of the scenario effect this time. . However, by making it difficult to detect that the reach fluctuation effect is not included in the target range of the scenario production this time, the gase's reach sign production will keep the player's expectations and perform an effective production. be able to.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the provisional variation number used for the ready-to-win portent effect is greater than 0 (step S362). Blocks the provisional variation numbers used for , and selects a block pattern for allocating a ready-to-win portent effect (step S364). Next, the sub CPU 201 assigns the ready-to-win portent effect to blocks to which the ready-to-win portent effect can be assigned among the selected block patterns (step S366). For example, if the number of provisional fluctuations that can be used for the ready-to-win portent is 3, and 2 provisional fluctuations are required for the ready-to-reach portent effect, the sub CPU 201 blocks the three provisional changes, and (1) 1 block + 1 block +1 block pattern and (2) 1 block + 2 block pattern. The sub CPU 201 can select the pattern (2) and assign the ready-to-win portent effect to two blocks. FIG. 146 shows an aspect of blocking three provisional fluctuations in this way.

Next, referring to FIG. 147, when the sub CPU 201 determines in step S368 that the effect of the subtraction process is to be performed, the sub CPU 201 determines in which temporary change block the effect of the subtraction process is to be performed, for example, by random lottery (step S370). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines, by lottery or the like, the provisional variation to which the effect of the subtraction process is assigned, among the provisional variations of the pending scenario lottery target, to which the ready-to-win portent effect is not assigned (step S372). If there is an order of subtraction processing for a plurality of characters (step S342), provisional variation of the subtraction processing effect is determined so as to follow this order. It is as follows when it demonstrates using an example.

For example, by determining the scenario lottery target (steps S332 and S334), a starting memory in which the subtraction processing of the teammate character is recorded and a starting memory in which the subtraction processing of the enemy character is recorded within the range of the scenario lottery target. are reserved in this order. Then, in step S370, it is assumed that the sub CPU 201 has determined the subtraction process for the enemy character to be a relatively long medium attack effect and the subtraction process for the ally character to be a relatively short attack effect. At this time, the sub CPU 201 assigns the medium attack effect to two provisional variations, assigns the weak attack effect to one provisional variation, and assigns these provisional variations so that the former provisional variation is digested before the latter provisional variation. The position of variation can be determined. In this way, the sub CPU 201 assigns a subtraction effect to one or a plurality of provisional fluctuations, for example, according to the effect content of the subtraction process.

Here, an example of allocating the effect of one subtraction process to the temporary fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 148 . FIG. 148 is an example of a temporary change sequence in a state where the first to third reservations are subject to the scenario lottery. Since the change time is 3.5 seconds for the starting memory stored in the first reserve, the provisional change number is set to 1 (#1). Since the variable display time for the starting memory stored in the second hold is 11.5 seconds, the provisional variable numbers are set to three (#2 to #4). Regarding the starting memory stored in the third hold, the variable display time is the time of "11.5 seconds + reach variation effect", so the number of provisional variations set is three (#5 to #7). As for the starting memory stored in the third reserve, since the reach variation effect is performed when the variable display is performed, the target of the scenario lottery is the starting memory reserved in the first to third reserves. . Further, in the example of FIG. 147, the number of subtraction processes in the effect map 2102 determined before the start of the secrecy A stage 2002 (specifically, during execution of the jackpot game) is the starting memory in which the first reserve is reserved. 1 time (weak attack production), 0 in the starting memory held in the 2nd hold, 2 times in the starting memory held in the 3rd hold (1 time in the order of medium attack production, weak attack production, total 2 times) are shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 148, since the starting memories reserved for the first to third reservations are the target of the scenario lottery, the sub CPU 201 selects these in the order of light attack effect, medium attack effect, and light attack effect. To re-determine the timing to execute the production. In the example shown in FIG. 148, the light attack effect recorded in the starting memory reserved in the first reserve is assigned to the provisional variation #2, and the medium attack effect recorded in the starting memory reserved in the second reserve is assigned. are assigned to the blocked #4 provisional variation and #5 provisional variation, and the light attack effect recorded in the starting memory reserved in the third suspension is assigned to the #6 provisional variation. In this way, regardless of the reserved starting memory unit, the character's subtraction effect is the provisional change set for one starting memory and the starting memory digested next to the one starting memory. It may straddle the set provisional fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game (lottery result). In addition, since it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the time is shortened. Moreover, in the secrecy A stage 2002, as an indication of the degree of expectation of the high-probability gaming state, an effect mode to be performed during execution of provisional fluctuations divided into predetermined units (blocked) is determined. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed toward the subtraction effect rather than the remaining number of times of time saving, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest.

Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 148, all the three subtraction effects recorded in the starting memory reserved in the first to third reservations are executed in one of the temporary fluctuations (#1 to #7). However, the sub CPU 201 is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 201 may control the last subtraction effect to be executed in the reach fluctuation.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines an effect for the provisional variation to which no effect is assigned (step S374). FIG. 149 is an example of a temporary change sequence in a state where the first to fourth reservations (see FIG. 139, for example) are subject to the scenario lottery. Production of subtraction processing is assigned to provisional fluctuations #2 and #4, a ready-to-win sign production is assigned to provisional fluctuation #7, and provisional fluctuations #1, #3, #5, and #6 to which no production is assigned, for example , a one-shot effect that gives a weaker impression to the player than the subtraction processing effect and the ready-to-win portent effect can be arranged. The contents of the effects arranged in the temporary fluctuations #1, #3, #5, and #6 and the temporary fluctuations to which the effects are assigned may be determined by lottery. The one-shot effect is arranged on the provisional fluctuation side with a smaller number than the ready-to-win portent effect. By allocating effects to all temporary fluctuations in the sequence, the execution position of the subtraction process is determined. Depending on the content of the performance, the provisional variable number to be assigned changes. The sub CPU 201 generates effect designation information including sequence information in which effects are assigned to all temporary fluctuations.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a reach variation effect in the hold of the scenario lottery object (step S376), and determines the reach change effect when there is a reach change effect in the hold of the scenario lottery object (step S378). Then, the effect determination process is terminated. The sub CPU 201 can select the ready-to-win effect by referring to the result of the subtraction process, for example. You can select a reach production in which characters who survive the battle appear.

Furthermore, the sub CPU 201 refers to the counter for the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, calculates the combination of the remaining number of ally characters and the ally character, Based on the remaining number of time reduction), it is possible to set whether or not to execute the reach performance and the mode of the reach variation performance. For example, when the remaining number of people is less than 2×2 and the suspension is other than the final rotation of the specified short-time rotation number, even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, a special form of reach (SP reach) is executed. Instead, for example, in a battle production, the boss of the enemy group may be defeated to execute the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 may execute a dedicated SP ready-to-win effect when the combination of the remaining number of people is 1×1 and the hold is the final variable display of the prescribed number of short working hours.

In addition, when the target range of the scenario production includes the starting memory where the last variable display is performed in the secret A stage 2002 (for example, when the number of times of time saving is 48 times, the 48th time variable display in the time saving game state is performed), if the reach variation effect or the jackpot effect is not performed in the final variable display of the time-saving game state, the character is set so that the victory or defeat of the battle effect is settled in the final variable display. A subtraction performance may be performed. In this case, the concealment A stage 2002 does not have the impression that the secret A stage 2002 has ended because the time-saving gaming state has reached the specified number of times (whether or not the high-probability gaming state has been disclosed). The impression can be given to the player that stage 2002 has ended.

The sub CPU 201 performs the process of determining the holding range of the target of the scenario lottery (Fig. 140: S332, S334). The time-saving frequency|count by which the subtraction process in 2102 is performed can be moved in the range of +/-3 according to the variation pattern of the secrecy A stage 2002. FIG. For example, when it is determined to perform the subtraction process when the time saving rotation is 8 in the calculation map, the subtraction process can move within the range of 5 to 11 time saving times. Specifically, when the starting memory with the number of times of saving time of 8 is reserved in the fourth reservation, it can be moved within the range of the number of times of saving time from 5 to 8, and the starting memory with the number of times of saving time of 8 is reserved in the first reservation. Time can move within the range of 8 to 11 times of shortening. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 fluidly changes the execution timing of the subtraction process in accordance with the development of the game in the secrecy A stage 2002, thereby increasing the variation of the effect and performing the subtraction process of the character accompanying the battle between the teams of characters. can be executed with certainty.

In the above-described embodiment, when determining in step S326 that there is a scenario effect being executed, the sub CPU 201 does not draw a new scenario effect until the scenario effect created by lottery ends. Therefore, in order to diversify the scenario effect being executed, for example, the sub CPU 201 prefetches the suspension within the range of the scenario effect being executed, and converts this into the effect to be executed during the variable display of the pending digestion. may apply. For example, if the reach variation effect is recorded in the start memory of the scenario effect being executed, the sub CPU 201 performs a prefetch lottery for the start memory up to the reach change effect. If there is no reach variation effect, a suggestion effect suggesting the existence of a specific variation pattern (reach change effect) is applied to the effect being executed. It should be noted that the sub CPU 201 does not perform the suggestion effect when there is no suspension.

Further, the sub CPU 201 prereads the starting memory that is suspended at the time of starting winning, and does not apply it to the prefetching performance at the time of winning, but applies it to the performance that is executed during the fluctuation of pending completion. good. For example, when the start memory is suspended in the fourth suspension due to the start winning during the execution of the scenario effects for the first suspension to the third suspension, the sub CPU 201 prefetches the fourth suspension performance, The look-ahead effect of the 4th reserve can be superimposed on the effect of the 2nd reserve and/or the 3rd reserve.

In the secrecy A stage 2002, since the hold is not shown on the liquid crystal screen, the prefetch effect is not performed at the time of the start winning, but the prefetch effect of the hold set at the time of the start win is from the start win to the display of the effect. Since it is not possible to spend a lot of time, an effect with few processing branches must be, for example, a simple processing such as changing the reserved color. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 uses part or all of the data of the first to third reservations of the prefetching effects (for example, the data of the scenario effect) to perform the prefetching effect of the starting memory reserved in the fourth reserve. If possible, the control load can be reduced, and as a result, the form of the look-ahead performance of the starting memory reserved in the fourth reserve can be diversified compared to the monotonous one that is merely a matter of changing the reserve color. can be realized as

Note that FIG. 150 is a flowchart of a modification when it is determined in step S326 (see FIG. 140) that there is a scenario effect being executed. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 150, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326, it determines whether or not the game ball has won the second start hole 440 (step S400), When it is determined that the ball has won the second start opening 440, it is determined whether or not there is a reach variation effect in the start memory of the scenario object being executed (step S402). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, the sub CPU 201 prefetches the start memory in which the winning is later than the start memory in which the reach change effect is recorded. A look-ahead effect is selected as an object of (step S404). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is no starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, it determines whether or not the look-ahead effect is already being executed (step S406). If the pre-reading effect is already being executed, the already-executed pre-reading effect is continued (step S408), and if the pre-reading effect is not being executed, it is held within the target range of the scenario effect being executed. A look-ahead effect is selected for all starting memories (step S410).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the conventional pachinko machine in which an effect is performed for each starting memory, the execution number of temporary fluctuations is one or more times for each held starting memory. is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the provisional changes determined for each starting memory are blocked into predetermined units using a plurality of provisional changes, regardless of the unit of the starting memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the provisional variation, which is divided into blocks in this predetermined unit, is determined. In addition, as described above, a part of the plurality of provisional changes determined for one starting memory and a plurality of determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that straddles part of the provisional fluctuation is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. In this way, since the performance mode is determined regardless of the unit of the starting memory, it is possible to determine the performance mode across a plurality of starting memories. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display for each starting memory unit, thereby providing a novel game that makes it difficult for the player to be aware of the game result for each starting memory.

In addition, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state (time-saving game state or high-probability game state) that is advantageous to the player separately from the big-hit game state, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is lengthened, the big-hit determination is made. The probability of winning in the process has to be lowered, and there is a risk that interest will decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a risk that the interest in the game may decrease. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one or more temporary fluctuations are set for each start memory, so while suppressing the number of times of time saving, it is difficult for the player to grasp such suppression In addition, since the probability of winning in the big hit determination can be set to an appropriate level, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by setting one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations for each start memory, the period of the secrecy A stage 2002, that is, the end timing of the time-saving gaming state is grasped by the player. can make it harder to be That is, the number of times of time saving is predetermined, for example, at the time of winning, and in the conventional pachinko machine, even if it is concealed whether the game state after the big win game state is a high probability game state, winning is not possible. It has been disclosed whether or not the game is in a high-probability game state when a certain number of times of time saving is consumed. However, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the period of the secrecy A stage 2002 as in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it becomes difficult to grasp the number of time reductions that have been completed, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation. Become. In addition, during the secrecy A stage 2002, the character subtraction effect is performed as an index indicating the degree of expectation of being in a high-probability gaming state, so that the player's attention is increased more than the number of times of shortening the time when it is difficult to grasp the end timing. Rather, it is possible to direct the character toward the subtraction effect, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by setting one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations for each starting memory, in addition to making it difficult to grasp the end timing of the concealment A stage 2002, the concealment A stage 2002 , a character subtraction performance that can be used as an indicator of whether or not the game is in a high-probability game state is performed. In the scenario of this subtraction effect, when the enemy group is wiped out in the scenario effect including the final time of the number of time reduction, the high probability game state is confirmed, and when the ally group is wiped out, the low probability game state is confirmed. The outline is decided before it becomes. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko game machine 1, it is not an effect that whether or not it is in a high probability game state when a certain number of times of shortening time is consumed, but a high probability when the victory or defeat of the battle effect is decided. It is possible to execute an effect such as disclosing whether or not the player is in a game state.

Next, the change effect of BGM will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot game state ends and then enters the secrecy A stage 2002, the timing at which the secrecy A stage 2002 ends (for example, the prescribed number of times (for example, 48 times) is shortened. At the end of the game), the final result of the above-described battle effect indicates whether the state is a high-probability game state or a low-probability state. When the disclosed result is the high-probability game state, then the high-probability stage 2004 is entered (when the disclosed result is the low-probability game state, the normal stage 2000 is entered thereafter).

The sub CPU 201 performs the BGM change lottery during the jackpot game state in which the variable probability flag is turned on, and during the secrecy A stage 2002 when the secrecy game state is the high probability game state. In other words, when a big win with a probability variable flag turned on is won, the BGM change lottery is performed twice from the start of the big win game state to the transition to the high probability stage 2004 via the secret A stage 2002. Become. However, when winning the BGM change lottery performed in the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the BGM change lottery in the subsequent secrecy A stage 2002 .

When the BGM change lottery is won, the sub CPU 201 outputs from the speaker 24 through the voice control circuit 205 a high certainty confirmed BGM that confirms the high probability game state. Therefore, when moving from concealment A stage 2002 to high accuracy stage 2004, high accuracy confirmation BGM is not always output, and even when moving from concealment A stage 2002 to high accuracy stage 2004, it was part High-precision and fixed BGM is not output.

Although the sub CPU 201 controls so that the high-precision confirmed BGM is output in response to winning the BGM change lottery, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in response to winning the BGM change lottery. does not change Therefore, even if the high-precision and final BGM is output, the flow of effect images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 remains unchanged.

When winning the BGM change lottery, the sub CPU 201 also determines the timing of outputting the high-precision confirmed BGM (that is, the timing of changing from the normal BGM to the high-accuracy confirmed BGM). The timing for outputting the high-precision confirmation BGM is, for example, during the jackpot game state or during the secrecy A stage 2002 .

As a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the jackpot game state, when outputting the high-precision confirmed BGM during the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 201 also moves to the secret A stage 2002 after the jackpot game state ends. , continue to control so that the high-accuracy-determined BGM is output. However, as for the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 controls such that the effect image normally displayed in the secrecy A stage 2002 is displayed.

As a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the jackpot game state, when outputting high-precision confirmed BGM during the concealment A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 determines at which timing of the concealment A stage 2002 output is performed. Predetermine in. The output timing of the high-precision fixed BGM is first determined by a fixed number of times of shortening of time, and a random lottery is further conducted within the range of the determined number of times of shortening of time. In detail, for example, when the number of times of time saving is 48 times, 1 to 6 times, 7 to 12 times, 13 to 18 times, 19 to 24 times, 25 to 30 times, 31 to 36 times, 37 to 42 times, 43 Pre-determine to one of each group of ~48 repetitions. Next, it is determined in advance at which timing of the determined groups the high-precision definite BGM is to be output. For example, when a group of 13 to 18 times is determined, the sub CPU 201 predetermines the timing of outputting the high-certainty-definite BGM within the range of 13 to 18 times. For example, when it is determined to be 16 times, the sub CPU 201 outputs high-precision confirmation BGM in the 16th time-saving variable display.

It should be noted that, when the starting memory is suspended in the secrecy A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 sets a provisional change for each starting memory as described above. The sub CPU 201 also determines in which provisional variation the output of the high-precision finalized BGM is to be output in the same manner as the character subtraction effect. For example, when the timing of outputting the high-precision confirmed BGM is predetermined for the 16th time reduction, the sub CPU 201 is all or part of the provisional variation set for the 16th start memory withheld. is used to output high-precision and definitive BGM. At this time, the high-precision confirmed BGM is the same as the medium attack effect as the character's subtraction effect, the provisional change set for one starting memory, and the starting memory digested next to the one starting memory. It may be executed across the provisional fluctuation set for it. In this way, the high-precision and fixed BGM can be executed regardless of the variable display in the starting memory unit, so that the player can be made even less conscious of the variable display in the starting memory unit. .

[Look-ahead effect selection processing (high accuracy stage)]
Next, the look-ahead effect selection processing in the highly accurate stage 2004 will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154. FIG. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing an example of the look-ahead effect selection process (high accuracy stage 2004).

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current rendering state is the high-probability stage 2004 (step S500 in FIG. 151). When it is determined that the current effect state is the high-accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there has been a starting prize (winning to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440). Determine (step S502). When it is determined that there has been a starting prize (YES in step S502), the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for which type of effect to perform for the reserved starting memory (step S504). The effects include, for example, a ready-to-win effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a lamp effect, a so-called movable effect of a character, a pseudo-lotus effect, a change in a pending image, and a look-ahead effect to be described later.

At step S506, it is determined whether or not the effect selected in the lottery at step S504 is the look-ahead effect (step S506 in FIG. 151). The look-ahead effect in the present embodiment is a mode in which a related effect is performed across the starting memory reserved during the high-accuracy stage 2004 and the starting memory (including a plurality of starting memories) won before the starting memory. is. Details of the look-ahead effect will be described later. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be performed (YES in step S506), a look-ahead effect section determination process is performed (step S508). Here, "it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be performed" means that the lottery for the prefetch effect is won.

Here, the look-ahead effect section determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 152 . FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern when determining a section for performing a look-ahead effect. Here, the upper frame in FIG. 152(A) indicates the reservation frame, and the numbers 1 to 4 within the reservation frame indicate the first reservation to the fourth reservation. A lower frame located below the reservation frame indicates the production type frame, and describes what kind of production is scheduled to be performed in each reservation. In this embodiment, the fourth suspension is the winning during the high probability stage 2004 (YES in step S502 in FIG. 151), and the suspension determined to perform the look-ahead effect (YES in step S506 in FIG. 151) be. Then, in the first reservation, it has been decided to perform a black effect (Fig. 152(A)). The ink effect is, for example, an effect that makes the entire screen black in an instant as if ink is spilled on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16, or a “opportunity” or “chance” that is superimposed on the spilled ink. ” is written with a brush.

Since the prefetch effect section determination process is performed by lottery for all the stored starting memories, as long as the starting memories are reserved in the first to fourth reservations in the present embodiment, all these starting Can be done in memory. However, in the present embodiment, since it has already been decided that the black effect will be performed in the first suspension, in this case, the corresponding section is not included in the target section determined in the look-ahead effect section determination process. may be In addition, regarding the start memory that is held next to the start memory that has been determined to perform the black effect (Fig. 152
(B) corresponding to the second hold), not included in the target section determined in the look-ahead effect section determination process. This is because the black effect that is performed in the variable display for the starting memory stored as the first reserve is a performance that may make the player expect expectations by itself, so it is stored as the first reserve. It is preferable to clearly separate the black effect performed in the variable display about the starting memory and the look-ahead effect related to the starting memory of the fourth reservation (the look-ahead effect performed in the third and fourth reservations). It is from. In other words, the black effect is performed in the first suspension, and no particular effect is performed in the second suspension, so that the pre-reading effect related to the fourth suspension (the effect performed in the third suspension and the fourth suspension) is performed. It can have the effect of increasing the sense of anticipation and interest.

It should be noted that if the pre-reading effect related to the fourth suspension is performed including the black effect performed in the first suspension, that is, if the pre-reading effect is performed in the section from the first suspension to the fourth suspension, the player will have a plurality of On the other hand, it is possible to have a sense of anticipation by performing the production in succession. There is a demerit that it is difficult to determine whether it is being read, and there is a possibility that the result will be less interesting as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(C), when it is determined that the section for which the look-ahead effect is to be performed is the third hold and the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 151), the production scenario to be performed in these holds is set. (Step S510 in FIG. 152). For the production scenario, a large lottery is conducted for each reservation, and the production scenario is set only for the reservation that wins the lottery. In this embodiment, for example, when the lottery of the broad division is won for the third reservation (see the third reservation in FIG. 152 (D)), the production scenario is set for the third reservation, and the fourth reservation is the An effect based on the scenario determined in the 3 suspension will be performed.

The production scenario includes a production that affects the development of the suspension (corresponding to the fourth suspension in this embodiment) due to the development of the prefetch, and a production that does not affect the development of the suspension due to the development of the prefetch. The development of the look-ahead affects the development of the suspension means that the same rendering as the look-ahead rendering is also performed in the suspension, and corresponds to, for example, the black rendering described above. An effect that does not affect the development of a prefetched game corresponds to, for example, an effect that is performed only during suspension, such as a movable effect of a character. A scenario lottery is performed for the suspension before the suspension (corresponding to the third suspension in the present embodiment) for the effect that affects the development due to the development of the prefetch. On the other hand, a scenario lottery including the suspension (corresponding to the fourth suspension in the present embodiment) is performed for an effect that does not affect the development due to the development of the prefetch.

When the effect scenario is set for the holding that has won the lottery in the broad category (step S510 in FIG. 151), details of the prefetch effect are selected (step S512). An example of selecting details of the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of selecting details of the look-ahead effect. Figure 153 (A), in the high probability stage 2004 start winning the fourth reservation (YES in step S500 and YES in S502 in Figure 151), it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect (YES in step S506 in Figure 151) , the look-ahead effect section, and the effect scenario are determined.

To elaborate on the determination of the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario, the section to perform the look-ahead effect is selected by lottery for all the stored start memories, so in the present embodiment, the section to perform the look-ahead effect is the first reservation. to the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 151). There are at least two types of production scenarios for the prefetch production. Depending on the development, there is an effect that does not affect the development in question. As an effect that influences the development of the relevant reservation by the development of the look-ahead, a lottery is drawn for the reservations (first to third reservations) other than the relevant reservation. Here, the holding is selected by lottery as a variable production. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the black effect will be performed in the second suspension and the third suspension. A lottery is drawn for effects that do not affect the development of the look-ahead, including the suspension (first suspension to fourth suspension). As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the accessory movement is performed from the first reservation to the fourth reservation.

In this case, when the starting memory reserved for the first to fourth reservations is digested, the black effect is performed while the character is continuously moving, and the black color effect is performed even though the character is finished. The player encounters a situation in which the is movable. Then, it is difficult for the player to judge whether these series of effects are individual effects or related effects. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153(B), when it is determined that the black effect like the third suspension is not performed in the suspension (corresponding to the fourth suspension in the present embodiment), the fourth suspension , cancels (rewrites to "none") an effect that does not affect the development (in this embodiment, the character object is movable) due to the development of the look-ahead.

<Countdown production>
It is determined whether or not the details of the prefetch effect selected in step S512 of FIG. 151 are the countdown effect (step S514). A countdown effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the details of the look-ahead effect are the countdown effect. In FIG. 154(A), the fourth reservation is won during the high probability stage 2004 (YES in step S500 in FIG. 151 and YES in step S502), and it is decided to perform a look-ahead effect (YES in step S506 in FIG. 151). ), the look-ahead effect section, and the effect scenario are determined.

To elaborate on the determination of the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario, the section to perform the look-ahead effect is selected by lottery for all the stored start memories, so in the present embodiment, the section to perform the look-ahead effect is the first reservation. to the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 151). There are at least two types of production scenarios for the prefetch production. Depending on the development, there is an effect that does not affect the development in question. It has been determined that a countdown effect will be performed in the first to third holds as an effect that affects the development of the hold due to the development of the look-ahead. Here, the holding is selected by lottery as a variable effect. A lottery is drawn for effects that do not affect the development of the look-ahead, including the suspension (first suspension to fourth suspension). As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the accessory movement is performed from the first reservation to the fourth reservation.

In this case, when the first suspension to the fourth suspension are completed, the countdown effect is performed while the character is continuously moved, and in the fourth suspension, the countdown effect is not performed. The player will encounter a situation in which it is movable. When the countdown is set to 0 (zero), the big hit is confirmed (winning in the main CPU 101), and the pattern in which the countdown does not become 0 is the loss is confirmed. When the character movement in the fourth reservation is performed, it is not only difficult for the player to judge whether these series of effects were individual effects or related effects, but also other effects (In this embodiment, the movable accessory) may be perceived as meaningless by the player.

Therefore, when it is determined that the effect selected in step S514 of FIG. 151 is the countdown effect (YES in step S514), it is determined whether the result of the selected countdown effect is false (step S516). . When it is determined that the result of the selected countdown effect is fake (YES in step S516), it is determined whether or not another effect scenario has been decided up to the suspension (step S518). If it is determined that another effect scenario has been decided up to the suspension (YES in step S518), the other effect scenario in the suspension is canceled (step S520).

That is, as shown in FIG. 154(B), when it is determined that the countdown effect performed over the first to third suspensions in the variation (corresponding to the fourth suspension in the present embodiment) is not performed 2, cancel (rewrite to "none") the effect (movable character in this embodiment) that does not affect the development due to the development of the look-ahead in the fourth suspension.

<Background change control processing>
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the game on the normal stage 2000, a pre-reading performance of the suspended starting memory is performed, accompanied by a change in the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. The look-ahead effect of the suspended starting memory with background change is the background change as an effect for the starting memory (the suspension) suspended by the starting prize (winning the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440). If it is determined by lottery that the background change of the suspension is performed, the performance based on the background change scenario of the suspension is performed across the starting memory suspended before the suspension, and the background change of the suspension is given continuity. is. Variations of the look-ahead effect include not only an image notice, but also a lamp notice, a character notice, and the like. Background change control processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158. FIG.

FIG. 155 is a flowchart illustrating an example of background change control processing. FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing an example of the background change continuous count determination process. FIG. 157 is an example of a table relating to background change control and background change scenarios. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a specific example for explaining the flow of background change control processing according to the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the start memory (retained) withheld due to the start prize (won at the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440) has won the background change lottery (Fig. 155 step S530). If it is determined that the suspension has won the background change lottery (YES in step S530), the background change consecutive possible number of times determination processing is performed until the background change of the suspension is performed based on the starting memory suspended before the suspension. It is determined how many fluctuations the effect can be performed over (step S532). The background change continuous number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156 .

When the sub CPU 201 determines the number of possible consecutive background changes in the possible number of consecutive background changes determination processing, the sub CPU 201 performs a background change scenario lottery for the suspension (step S534). The background change scenario lottery is selected from the background change scenario table of FIG. 157(A). When a predetermined background change scenario is selected from the background change scenario table of FIG. , information related to variable effects such as "normal failure" and "reach failure" are rewritten into a background transition table based on the background change scenario (step S536 in FIG. 155). Examples of background change scenarios are described below.

156, the background change continuous count determination process in the background change control process of FIG. 155 will be described. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S530 in the background change control process that the start memory (the hold) that has been put on hold due to the start prize wins the background change lottery (YES in step S530 of FIG. 155), the background change of FIG. In the possible number of times of continuation determination processing, the number of times of continuous effects that can be performed until the background change of the suspension is determined (step S540 in FIG. 6). The number of consecutive possible times refers to the number of starting memories in the section that is not won separately in the background change lottery due to loss variation, going back from the background change object hold (the hold).

A case where the winning start memory (retained) is 4 (fourth retained) will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 158 (A), when the suspension wins, the start memory is suspended from the first suspension to the third suspension, and the production contents of "normal loss" are set for the first suspension to the third suspension, respectively. It is in a state where That is, the pending number is "4". 156, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the continuous effect related to the pending background change is possible for the three starting memories, excluding the pending starting memory, out of the four starting memories. determine whether

The sub CPU 201 decrements (subtracts) the pending number in step S542 of FIG. That is, it is determined whether or not the 3rd hold can be continued among the 1st to 3rd holds. In step S544, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the pending number is 0 (step S544 in FIG. 156). As described above, since the pending number 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), the sub CPU 201 next determines whether or not the third pending clears the continuation possible condition (step S546). The continuance possible condition is a condition described in the continuance possible condition table of FIG. 157(B).

The continuation possible condition in FIG. 7(B) is that the referred suspension (starting memory) is "1" The variation display of the identification pattern is normal variation, "2" In the background change scenario of FIG. 7(A), " (none) or normal", "3" not won the pending change lottery, that is, the pending display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a manner different from the default display mode due to the pending change lottery It is not being won in the "4" look-ahead effect lottery, that is, it is not the target of another look-ahead effect. The sub CPU 201 determines that continuation is possible only when all of the above conditions "1" to "4" are satisfied.

Here, since the third reservation in FIG. 158(A) is "normal loss", it satisfies all of the continuation possible conditions (1) to (4). Therefore, the third suspension is a starting suspension in which a look-ahead effect is possible. Then, in step S548 of FIG. 156, the number of consecutive possible times is incremented (added) (step S548 of FIG. 156). That is, the number of possible consecutive times is 0+1=1. The process of incrementing the number of possible continuations is repeated until the pending number becomes zero or the continuation possible condition cannot be cleared.

In the present embodiment, when the number of reservations is decremented, 3-1=2 (step S542 in FIG. 156), and it is determined whether or not the second reservation can be continued. Since the pending number 2 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is then determined whether or not the second pending clears the continuation possible condition (step S546). The second hold in FIG. 158(A) is “normal loss”, and thus satisfies all of the continuation possible conditions (1) to (4). In other words, since the second hold can also be read-ahead effect, the number of possible consecutive games is incremented in step S548 of FIG.

Furthermore, when the pending number is decremented, 2-1=1 (step S542 in FIG. 156), and it is determined whether or not the first pending can be continued. Since the pending number 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is then determined whether or not the first pending has cleared the continuation possible condition (step S546). The first reservation in FIG. 158(A) is “normal loss”, and thus satisfies all of the continuation possible conditions (1) to (4). That is, since the first hold is also capable of pre-reading effects, the possible number of consecutive games is incremented in step S548 of FIG. Next, when the pending number is decremented, 1-1=0 (step S544 in FIG. 156), and the pending number becomes 0 (NO in step S544). It is determined that there is

If it is determined in the background change continuous count determination process that the continuous count is 3 (step S532 in FIG. 155), a background change scenario is selected based on the background change scenario table in FIG. 157(A). Since the number of times of possible continuation indicates the number of times of possible prefetching, in the present embodiment, in FIG. 3, No. 7 to No. 9, No. 13 to No. 15, No. 19 to No. 21.

For example, background change scenario No. When 3 is selected, the background change scenario type is "normal", and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, before 2 changes, and before 1 change are all "normal". Also, for example, background change scenario No. 20 is selected, the background change scenario type is "normal", and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, before 2 changes, and before 1 change are "normal", "evening", and "evening" in that order. It's becoming It is expected that the background will change from the normal system to the evening background by the time the suspension (fourth suspension) changes, and some kind of story presentation will be performed continuously.

In addition, for example, background change scenario No. When 9 is selected, the background change scenario type is "Japanese style", and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, before 2 changes, and before 1 change are all "Japanese style mansion". This can be used as an effect with more expectation than "normal" in the background change scenario type. Also, for example, the background change scenario No. 13 to No. When 15 is selected, the background change scenario type is "Invasion", which can be used as an effect with a higher sense of expectation than the above-mentioned "Japanese style" state. Especially for the background change scenario type "Invasion", since the background change scenario has an effect of "Enemy Invasion", it may suggest a transition to some special mode (zone).

The example of FIG. 158(B) will be described. In FIG. 158 (B), when the suspension wins, the start memory is suspended from the first suspension to the third suspension, and the production contents of "normal loss" are set for the second suspension to the third suspension respectively. However, it can be seen that the first suspension is set to "change the background", that is, the background change scenario is set. In this case, the pending number is "4", and in the background change continuous possible number determination process of FIG. is possible.

In step S542 of FIG. 156, when the pending number is decremented, 4-1=3, and it is determined whether or not the third pending can be continued. As described above, since the pending number 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the third pending clears the continuous possible condition (step S546). The third hold in FIG. 158(B) is “normal loss”, and thus satisfies all of the continuation possible conditions (1) to (4). Therefore, since the third hold can be read-ahead effect, the number of consecutive possible times is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 156 (step S548 of FIG. 156). That is, the number of possible consecutive times is 0+1=1. The same is true for the second hold, so the number of possible consecutive times is 1+1=2.

Then, when the pending number is decremented in step S542 of FIG. 156, 2−1=1, and it is determined whether or not the first pending can be continued. As described above, since the pending number 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the first pending condition satisfies the continuation possible condition (step S546). Since the first suspension in FIG. 158(B) is “background change”, among the continuous possible conditions (1) to (4), in the background change scenario of FIG. 7(A) in (2), “(none ) or “normal system” is not satisfied.

Then, since it is determined in step S546 in FIG. 156 that the continuance condition is not satisfied (NO in step S546 in FIG. 156), it is determined that the number of continuations possible is 2 in the background change continuation count determination process. be done.

<Change scenario decision processing>
Variation scenario determination processing performed by the suspended starting memory (for example, the first to fourth suspensions) at the start of variation will be described with reference to FIG. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the starting memory withheld due to the starting prize (winning at the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440) is a background performance change effect related to the starting memory withheld after the suspension. Alternatively, the look-ahead effect can rewrite the effect information different from that at the time of winning. Therefore, a predetermined effect is selected according to the conditions given at the start of the fluctuation.

FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing an example of change scenario determination processing. In the variation scenario determination process, it is determined whether or not it is time to start variation when the variation starts when the starting prize or the suspended starting memory is consumed by the variation (step S550 in FIG. 159). If it is determined that it is time to start changing (YES in step S550), it is determined whether or not the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is normal (step S552). The normal system includes, for example, effects different from effects that affect the player's interest in some way, such as attacks and assaults, which will be described later.

If it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is of the normal type (YES in step S552), it is determined whether or not it is an exception in the normal type (step S554). For example, among the effects determined by the background change scenario lottery in the above-described background change control process, if it is determined that the change is "1" and the effect of rushing into a Japanese-style mansion, "2 ” If it is decided that the change is a production that rushes into the enemy attack production, ” 3 ” The change corresponds to the next change after the final evening background.

If it is determined to be an exception (YES in step S554), an effect corresponding to the exception condition is executed in normal background exception processing (step S556). For example, if it is determined that the change is to rush into a Japanese-style mansion, then a Japanese-style background scenario lottery is executed, and "2" is the change to rush into an enemy attack effect. If that has been decided, set the effect related to the enemy attack in the normal background scenario lottery. be done. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be an exception (NO in step S554), a normal background scenario lottery is conducted (step S558).

If it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is not normal (NO in step S552), it is determined whether or not the background is evening (step S560). If it is determined that the background is evening (YES in step S560), an evening background scenario lottery is conducted (step S562). On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not evening (NO in step S560), it is determined whether the background is Japanese style (step S564). If it is determined that the background is Japanese style (YES in step S564), a Japanese-style background scenario lottery is conducted (step S566).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not Japanese (NO in step S564), it is determined whether or not the background is an invasion (step S568). If it is determined that the background is an invasion (YES in step S568), a scenario lottery for the background of an invasion is performed (step S570). On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not an attack (NO in step S570), an attack background scenario lottery is conducted (step S572). The degree of expectation for the production performed as a result of these scenario lotteries is higher in the order of normal background, evening background, exception to normal background, Japanese style, attack, and assault.

<Chance up control processing>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether it is the normal stage 2000 or the high-precision stage 2004, the chance is increased to generate an effect related to the effect that occurs first as an effect during fluctuation that develops into super reach. Control processing is possible. The chance up control process will be explained using FIG. FIG. 160 is a flowchart illustrating an example of chance-up control processing.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect displayed during the current variation is the effect during variation (step S580 in FIG. 160). When it is determined that the effect currently being displayed during variation is the effect during variation (YES in step S580), it is determined whether or not to execute chance up (step S582). If it is determined that chance up is to be executed (YES in step S582), it is determined whether or not chance up has already been performed in the variation. That is, it is determined whether or not the chance up flag is not 1 (step S584).

If it is determined at step S584 that the chance up flag is not 1 (YES at step S584), a chance up introduction effect is set (step S586). This means that the chance-up flag is not 1, which means that the chance-up effect has not yet been performed in the variation. Therefore, the normal production that can lead to the introduction of the chance-up production is selected. When the chance-up introduction effect is set in step S586 (step S586), the chance-up flag is set to 1 (step S588).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the chance up flag is 1 in step S584 (NO in step S584), a chance up effect related to the previously executed effect is set (step S600). For example, if the effect executed last time, that is, the effect executed based on the chance-up introduction effect was a conversation effect in which the character A appears, the character A appears again as the chance-up effect, and the previous conversation is performed. There are productions such as a conversation that has developed while being related to , and a production that develops into a super reach with the appearance of a character B related to the character A. In this way, it is possible to increase expectations for the super ready-to-win performance by controlling the performance to be generated later so as to relate to or develop the performance to be generated first.

When the chance-up flag is set to 1 in step S588 (step S588) or the chance-up effect related to the effect executed last time is set in step S600 (step S600), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation ends (step S590). . If it is determined that the fluctuation has ended (YES in step S590), the character lamp flag is set to 0 (step S592). On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation has not ended (NO in step S590), the chance up control process ends.

<Pending change decision processing>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the starting memory is suspended due to the starting winning (winning at the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440), the player can visually recognize that the suspension has been made. Display (or notify) in a manner. As a mode of display, for example, the number is displayed on a part of the liquid crystal display device 16 . Also, the display (design) of the withheld starting memory can change if certain conditions are met. A pending change is to change the pending image. The pending change determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 161 . FIG. 161 is a flowchart illustrating an example of pending change determination processing.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a reserved winning (step S610 in FIG. 161). Whether or not there is a pending winning does not mean whether or not there is a starting winning (winning to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440), but the fact that the starting memory is suspended and the suspension is made as described above. It indicates that it is in a state where it can be displayed in a manner that can be visually recognized by a person. If it is determined to be a pending prize (YES in step S610), a pending change scenario lottery is performed (step S612).

In the hold change scenario lottery in step S612, a lottery is drawn for a scenario regarding hold change. Specifically, the scenario regarding the pending change is how many times the confrontation is to be made under the condition that the pending display is changed only when A wins due to the confrontation between A and B forces (the number of battles n determination), whether to perform pending changes, and so on. The form of the confrontation includes, for example, a ninjutsu confrontation. In this embodiment, the maximum number of battles is eight. When a predetermined scenario is determined in the pending change scenario lottery of step S612 (step S612), it is determined which character is to be selected from the first party (step S614). Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that always results in the victory of A (fixed change of hold).

Next, in step S616, a lottery is drawn for a second character and a scenario that will face A. Here, in the present embodiment, only one character of the A force is selected in the A character lottery in step S614. In addition, the story and cut-in scenario when appearing will also be determined by the Confrontation B Character Scenario Lottery. Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that always results in the victory of A (fixed change of hold).

Next, in step S618, a confrontation process is performed (step S618). If A wins (YES in step S6620), the pending image is changed by pending change processing. For example, the image of the starting memory that was displayed as a red shuriken image is changed to a yellow shuriken image, or the image that was displayed as a shuriken image is changed to a ninja book (scroll). Any display that is different from the current display may be used. When one battle ends, 1 is subtracted from the number of battles n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined that the number of times of confrontation after subtraction in step S624 is not 0 (NO in step S626), the confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations reaches zero.

When the number of confrontations decremented in step S626 becomes 0 (YES in step S626), development effect processing is performed in step S628 (step S628). In the development production processing, there is a production that develops into super reach after the end of the confrontation between the first power and the second power.

On the other hand, in step S620, if A does not win in the confrontation between A and B (NO in step S620), it is determined whether or not the match is a draw (step S630). If it is determined to be a draw (YES in step S630), 1 is subtracted from the number of matches n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined that the number of confrontations decremented in step S626 is not 0 (NO in step S626), the confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations reaches zero.

When the development effect process ends in step S628 or when it is determined that the game is not tied in step S630 (NO in step S630), the pending change determination process ends. In addition, pseudo-continuation may be used in the presentation regarding the confrontation between the first power and the second power in the pending change.

[Character lamp]
In this embodiment, when the character lamp (LED 1562) emits light, a picture of a character or the like appears inside the opening window 1552. FIG. Note that the character lamp (LED 1562) is hereinafter simply referred to as a character lamp.

While the sub CPU 201 selects an effect in which the character lamp lights up at the start of the variable display of the identification pattern, it may draw a lottery as to whether or not the character lamp lights up in the effect lottery when the effect button 62 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed. .

As a result, there exists a timing at which the character lamp selected at the start of the variable display of the identification pattern lights up, and a timing at which the character lamp selected by lottery when the production button 62 is pressed down exists, so that one variable display is performed. It is conceivable that there are timings during which the character lamp lights up multiple times. For this reason, the earliest timing is adopted for lighting the character lamp, and the sub CPU 201 controls so that once the character lamp is lit, it will not be lit again.

FIGS. 162A to 162C are sequence charts showing an example of character lamp lighting control. In FIGS. 162(A) to (C), during the period from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the end of the variable display, as a performance, the first performance lottery is executed at the start of the variable display. is executed, the second effect lottery is executed on the way, and as a result, special reach (hereinafter referred to as "SP reach") is executed in the latter half.

The example shown in FIG. 162(A) assumes that the lamp lighting timing is selected twice during one variable display. In the illustrated example, there is a period during which the character ramp effect can be performed in the first half of the conversation advance notice, and there is also a period during which the character lamp effect can be performed in the latter half of the SP reach.

The example shown in FIG. 162(B) represents the case where the production button 62 is pressed. In the illustrated example, the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect upon pressing the effect button 62 in the first half of the conversation advance notice, and does not execute the character lamp effect in the second half of the SP reach.

The example shown in FIG. 162(C) represents the case where the production button 62 is not pressed. In the illustrated example, the effect button 62 is not pressed in the first half of the conversation notice, while the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect in the latter half of the SP reach.

If it is determined that the character lamp is lit when the effect button 62 is pressed at the start of the variable display, if the effect button 62 is not pressed at the time of the button effect, it is identified without the character lamp lighting timing after that. Although it is conceivable that the variable display of the pattern ends, the lottery for lighting the character lamp drawn at the start of the variable display and the lighting lottery for the character lamp when the performance button 62 is pressed can be executed separately. Therefore, it is possible to prepare various lighting timings of the character lamp.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing an example of control processing for character lamp effects. First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect is during variable display (step S801). If the effect is medium, it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the character lamp effect (step S802).

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display is finished when the character lamp effect is not executable (step S807). It is determined whether or not there is (step S803).

If the character lamp flag is 1 (character lamp effect has been executed), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended (step S807). Execution), it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the character lamp presentation are satisfied (step S804). The condition for executing the character lamp effect is, for example, pressing of the effect button 62 or elapse of a predetermined variable display time.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display is finished when the conditions for executing the character lamp effect are not satisfied (step S807), and when the conditions for executing the character lamp effect are satisfied, the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect. (step S805).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the character lamp flag to 1 (step S806). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display is finished (step S807). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the variable display has not ended, it ends the process, and if it determines that the variable display has ended, it sets the character lamp flag to 0 (step S808).

Although the above contents have been described as an embodiment by taking variable display as an example, the execution of the character ramp effect is controlled during the look-ahead effect or the look-ahead effect + variable display effect as one period. You can make it work.

As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 162(B), when the effect button 62 is operated, for example, a conversation notice (execution of the first effect) capable of executing a character lamp effect is provided as a specific notification mode. means) and SP reach (second effect executing means) capable of executing a character lamp effect when variable display of identification symbols reaches a predetermined time during the same variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 162(C), in the conversation advance notice, if the production button 62 is not operated, the character lamp production is not executed, while in the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 162(C), when the character lamp effect is executed in the conversation advance notice, the character lamp effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. perform the performance.

Moreover, it can be rephrased as follows. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute a character lamp effect as a predetermined effect, and the lottery for executing the character lamp effect under the first condition (for example, triggered by pressing the effect button 62) is performed. A first lottery that can be performed and a second lottery that can be performed under a second condition (eg, elapsed time) different from the first lottery can each be viable. When each of the above becomes executable, the first condition may become unsatisfied depending on the game situation. When the first condition is satisfied, the character lamp effect can be executed under the condition that the first condition is satisfied, and the establishment of the second condition is invalidated. Only when the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect can be executed, for example, at an execution timing different from that when the first condition is satisfied.

Moreover, it can be rephrased as follows. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute a character lamp effect as a predetermined effect, and executes the character lamp effect as a first condition, for example, triggered by pressing the button in FIG. 162(A). A first lottery that allows a lottery and a second lottery that allows a lottery to be executed at the time shown in FIG. sell. When each of the above becomes executable, the character lamp effect is executed when the second condition is established, while the first condition is a condition that becomes unsatisfied or invalid depending on the game situation. For example, as shown in FIG. 162(B), when the first condition is established, the character lamp effect can be executed under the establishment of the first condition and shall be invalidated (or discarded).

[Full screen preview]
FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing an example of control of the full-screen effect, and FIG.
(C) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen display. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 201 outputs a message (effect designation information) to the voice control circuit 205 when it receives a command to execute a full screen effect in the normal effect state shown in FIG. 165(A). By doing so, the sound control circuit 205 is controlled to set the sound volume of the specific channel (the channel in which the sound of the pattern is reproduced) to zero.

Note that the audio control circuit 205 controls so as not to output the pattern sound during the full-screen presentation, but the error screen after power failure recovery (that is, the full-screen error screen indicating that the variable display is in progress) ) is displayed, control is performed to output the symbol sound.

However, in this example, the full-screen error screen is the error screen after power is restored, but the full-screen error screen does not necessarily have to be the error screen after power is restored. It is intended to include full-screen display of information screens related to gaming machines that have nothing to do with judging big hits, such as message screens and warning screens when fraud is committed, in a manner in which the variable display of identification symbols cannot be seen. .

The voice control circuit 205 has four channels (execution system) of sound sources for controlling voices such as notification sounds, pattern sounds, sound effects, and BGM. , for example, four channels (execution system) can reproduce these respectively. In this embodiment, a channel number is assigned to each channel. For example, channel number 1 is a notification sound, channel number 2 is a pattern sound, channel number 3 is a sound effect, and channel number 4 is BGM. be.

164. First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the full screen effect is being executed (step S901), and ends the process if the full screen effect is not being executed. On the other hand, in the case of the full-screen effect, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not power failure recovery as shown in FIG. 165(B) is performed (step S902).

If it is not power failure recovery, the sub CPU 201 sets full-screen presentation (step S903). Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits to the voice control circuit 205 a message designating channel number 2, which is the symbol sound channel, and instructs the voice control circuit 205 to set the volume of the symbol sound channel to 0. (step S904).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165(C), in the case of recovery from power failure, the sub CPU 201 sets a screen during recovery from power failure (step S905). This is because the effect is not memorized at the time of restoration from power failure, and therefore the screen during restoration from power failure is simply displayed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message to the voice control circuit 205, and causes the voice control circuit 205 that receives the message to output the sound volume of the symbol channel for channel number 2 of the symbol sound (step S906). This may be changed to a louder sound than the symbol stop sound in the normal presentation.

In the processing described above, when the full-screen presentation is performed as a presentation, the sound of the pattern is not produced, but after that, if power failure occurs, the full-screen presentation command is sent again when the power is restored. In such a case, by controlling the volume of the pattern sound channel (channel number: 2) so that it can be output, the power failure recovery screen is covered and the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed. Even when the displayed identification pattern cannot be seen, it is possible to grasp that the identification pattern has stopped by the design stop sound.

In other words, during the display effect, the effect tone color can be output according to the system by a plurality of channels, and the channel (for example, channel number 2) can be output according to the change in the display effect mode. , 3, 4 pattern sound channels, effect sound channels, BGM channels) are changed, while the pattern system channel (for example, the pattern channel of channel number 2) is fixed. , the output sound from the channel of the symbol system is muted according to the mode of symbol display.

According to the configuration as described above, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the performance and reduce unnecessary processing for the performance, so that the processing can be performed smoothly.

In addition, from a different viewpoint of the above embodiment, a plurality of channels, for example, channel numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4 of information sound channels, pattern sound channels, effect sound channels, and BGM channels Shared channels that can output timbres according to the system, and can change the timbre output from the channel according to the change in the display performance mode, for example, channels with channel numbers 2, 3, and 4, effects It has a sound channel, a BGM channel, warning system channels and symbol system channels, for example, channel numbers 1 and 2 for notification sounds and symbol sound channels, and production tones are produced through shared channels according to the mode of display production. On the other hand, when a specific display effect, for example, the full-screen display shown in FIG. It can also be said that

In the above-described embodiment, the channel number of the symbol sound channel is fixed to 2 (hereinafter also referred to as "fixed channel system"), but this is not the only option. Based on a message (effect designation information) from the CPU 201, for example, an unused unused channel among four channels (execution system) may be dynamically allocated to reproduce each sound.

In this case, the sub CPU 201 stores a specific channel number representing a specific channel that reproduces the pattern sound, and for example, when executing a full-screen effect, the sub CPU 201 instructs the sound control circuit 206 to select the specific channel number. A message specifying a number is transmitted, and the voice control circuit 206 receiving this is made to set the sound volume of the channel of the pattern sound to zero. Even in this way, the same effects as those of the fixed channel system can be obtained.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[Appendix 1]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a fixed condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (for example, random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by means, the variable performance and stop of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the effect to be performed, and pattern effect (for example, , temporary variation) execution number determination means (for example, step S324), and a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) among one or more start memories stored by the holding means ) is included, an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed, The effect mode determination means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into predetermined units with respect to the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. , Specific effect determination means (for example, , step S372, etc.).

According to the game machine of (1) above, when a specific starting memory is included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, until the specific starting memory is displayed variably. (i.e., the starting memory in which the variable display has not yet been performed) can be determined before the variable display is started. processing can be performed. Moreover, since the execution number of one or a plurality of symbol effects is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, even though the display is variable for one start memory, it may appear that there are multiple starts. It looks as if a variable display for memory is being performed, and can enhance the presentation effect. Further, the number of executions of the determined pattern performance is divided into predetermined units, and a performance mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units is determined. It is possible to perform smooth processing.

In addition, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), even if variable display is performed in a specific manner In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed (for example, character subtraction processing is performed) after that, the performance mode will not be performed. The player's interest is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the starting memory is the first among the plurality of specific starting memories. A performance mode is determined for the starting memory up to the earliest specified starting memory variably displayed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, further comprising suspension effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling so that an image relating to starting memory stored in the suspension means is displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. and

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in the starting memory unit. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When there is no starting memory, the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. suggesting effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining a effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode, even though is not the specific starting memory, The suggesting performance determining means is configured not to determine a performance mode suggesting that the identification symbol variation performance is to be performed in the specific mode when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is not included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effects. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is not a specific start memory, but the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect. Moreover, when the start memory is not stored by the holding means, the performance mode suggesting that the variation performance of the identification pattern is performed in a specific mode is not decided, so that the control load does not increase.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 2]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (for example, random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by means, the variable performance and stop of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. A display control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls to perform a production, and a symbol production (for example, a (temporary fluctuation) execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions, and an effect mode capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means determination means (for example, step S372, etc.); is divided into predetermined units, and specific effect determination means ( For example, step S370, etc.), and when the specific starting memory is not included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, for all the starting memories stored by the holding means A performance mode is determined, and the performance mode for the last stored starting memory among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It has a suggestive effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) that determines a performance mode that suggests that the identification pattern variable effect will be performed (for example, a false reach premonition effect), and the suggestive effect determination means It is characterized in that when the start memory is not stored by the holding means, the performance mode suggesting that the variation performance of the identification pattern is performed in the specific mode is not determined.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, the data capacity is large. Even if this is the case, it is possible to perform smooth processing. Moreover, since the execution number of one or a plurality of symbol effects is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, even though the display is variable for one start memory, it may appear that there are multiple starts. It looks as if a variable display for memory is being performed, and can enhance the presentation effect. Further, the number of executions of the determined pattern performance is divided into predetermined units, and a performance mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units is determined. It is possible to perform smooth processing.

Further, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), the player's expectation for the display performance is maintained. can become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the rendering mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the rendering mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. The player's expectation for the display performance is maintained by determining the performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation performance is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific starting memory. ing.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which a game ball can win, and the identification pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed is further provided, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) determines that the game ball has won the starting hole. The starting memory can be reserved based on the starting memory stored in the holding means, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball wins the starting hole. is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory. In addition, since the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern, the number of symbol effects for each starting memory is not increased without increasing the load on the government. The number of runs can be easily determined.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. characterized by

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while enhancing the performance effect.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and a display in which an identification pattern is variably displayed based on acceptance of a game ball into the starting port. Means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a symbol, etc.) are stored in a predetermined number (for example, 4) as starting memory. ), and when the variable display of the identification pattern is performed, the first performance mode is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. Then, the first performance mode determining means for setting the performance data related to the determined first performance mode, and the starting memory stored by the holding means when the game ball is received in the starting port are targeted. a second effect mode determining means for determining a second effect mode and setting effect data related to the determined second effect mode, wherein the second effect mode determining means is equal to the first effect mode determining means; The second effect mode is determined using the effect data related to the first effect mode determined by.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second effect mode in which the effect mode is determined for the starting memory stored by the retaining means when the game ball is received in the starting port is stored by the retaining means. Although there is no time to display immediately when the identification pattern is displayed, the first performance mode is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means when the variable display of the identification pattern is performed. Since the performance data is used for determination, smooth processing can be performed even if the data volume is large.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. A symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number is further provided, and the first effect mode determination means determines the symbol effect execution number determination means for the starting memory stored by the holding means. The pattern performance of the number of executions determined by is divided into predetermined units, and the performance mode to be performed during execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units is determined regardless of the unit of the start memory. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of executions of one or more symbol effects is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means, even though it is a variable display for one starting memory From the outside, it looks as if variable displays are performed for a plurality of starting memories, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the number of executions of the determined pattern performance is divided into predetermined units and the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units is determined, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect. becomes.

According to the present invention, it is possible to perform processing smoothly while enhancing the presentation effect.

[Appendix 4]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. Display means for performing variable display (for example, liquid crystal display device 16) and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as start memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a number (for example, four) and one starting memory stored by the holding means are displayed, the one starting memory is displayed. Display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) for controlling so that the variable effect and stop effect of the identification pattern are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory is performed; a special game state execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of is a specific result; an advantageous state control means capable of controlling the subsequent game state to an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state over different periods each time; an effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling a display effect displayed on the means, and the effect control means executes an index effect (character subtraction effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state. The number of times and the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous game state is to be executed are at least information related to the game state of the advantageous game state (for example, information as to whether or not the game state is a high-probability game state). ) and the period controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, time saving number of times), effect pre-determining means for determining before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 136)) and a specific effect determining means (for example, step S370, etc.) for determining an effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state, wherein the specific effect The determining means determines the index effect by the effect pre-determining means when one or more starting memories stored by the holding means include an index starting memory for executing the index effect. one of the one or more start memories instead of the execution timing It is characterized by having an effect re-determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining execution in the variable display related to any of the starting memories.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, although the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state is executed in the variable display in the advantageous game state, the execution timing of the index effect is set in the advantageous game state. Determined before being controlled. Therefore, even if the data volume is large, it is possible to perform smooth processing because there is time to spare before the index effect is performed. However, before the advantageous game state is controlled, the starting memory related to the index performance is not yet suspended, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, the decision may be made before the advantageous game state is controlled. It is not always possible to perform the index effect at the determined execution timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in the one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is set in the one or more start memories. It is re-determined to execute in the variable display related to any starting memory. As a result, even if the data volume is large, the index rendering can be performed through smooth processing.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect predetermining means is set to the M-th variable display in the game state after the special game is executed. When it is time to perform, and the predetermined number that can be stored as start memory by the holding means is N, the effect re-determining means replaces the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect pre-determining means. Then, in the game state after the special game is executed, in the variable display at any timing within the range of [M-(predetermined number N-1)] to [M+(predetermined number N-1)] This is for deciding to perform the index effect.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution timing of the index performance determined by the performance re-determining means is determined without greatly deviating from the execution timing of the index performance determined before being controlled to the advantageous game state. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, one or more starting memories stored by the holding means include a specific starting memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner. Further provided is specific start determination means (for example, step S330) for determining whether or not the performance redetermining means stores the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. is included, it is determined that any one of the variable displays of the starting memory until the variable display related to the specific starting memory is performed is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the specific starting memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation) is included in the starting memory stored by the holding means, in terms of control, The index performance can be performed by smooth processing without excessively increasing the burden on the operator. That is, if the specific start memory is included in the start memory stored by the holding means, it will be necessary to re-determine the mode of presentation, which may increase the burden on control. In this respect, according to the game machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is included in the starting memory stored by the holding means, the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed. Since the mode of presentation for is determined, the burden on control can be reduced as much as possible.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 5]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suppress the deterioration of interest. To provide a game machine capable of smoothly performing processing.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. Display means for performing variable display (for example, liquid crystal display device 16) and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as start memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a certain number of times and the variable display of one starting memory stored by the holding means are performed, the next starting memory of the one starting memory is displayed. Display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) for controlling to perform a variable effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display is performed; a special game state execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player based on Advantageous state control means that can control advantageous game states (for example, time-saving game state or high-probability game state) that are advantageous to the player over different periods each time; The number of executions of the effect) and the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous game state is to be executed are at least information related to the game state of the advantageous game state (for example, whether it is a high-probability game state or not). Information on whether or not) and the period (for example, the number of times of time reduction) controlled to the advantageous gaming state, effect pre-determining means (for example, scenario presetting processing ( Figure 136)), and execution of symbol effects capable of determining the number of executions of symbol effects (for example, provisional variations) in which variation effects and stop effects of the identification symbol are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. Number determining means (for example, step S324) and effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state etc.), wherein the effect mode determination means determines whether or not one or more start memories stored by the holding means include an index start memory for executing the index effect. indicator effect execution determination means (for example, step S338, etc.); When the indicator performance execution determining means determines that the index performance execution memory is included in one or a plurality of performance memory stored by the stage, the execution timing determined by the performance pre-determining means is reached. Alternatively, the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units, and it is determined in which of the symbol performances divided into the predetermined units the index performance is to be executed. and effect re-determining means (for example, step S358).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, although the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state is executed in the game state after the special game state is executed, the execution timing of the index effect is , is determined before being controlled to an advantageous playing state. Therefore, even if the data volume is large, it is possible to perform smooth processing because there is time to spare before the index effect is performed. However, before the advantageous game state is controlled, the starting memory related to the index performance is not yet suspended, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, the decision may be made before the advantageous game state is controlled. It is not always possible to perform the index effect at the determined execution timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in the one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is set in the one or more start memories. It is re-determined to execute in the variable display related to any starting memory. As a result, even if the data volume is large, the index rendering can be performed through smooth processing.

Moreover, since the execution number of one or a plurality of symbol effects is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means, even though the display is variable for one starting memory, it appears to be a plurality of starting memories. It looks as if a variable display is being performed for the display, and the production effect can be enhanced. Further, since the number of executions of the determined pattern performance is divided into predetermined units and the index performance is executed in any one of the pattern performances divided into the predetermined units, the performance effect can be further enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the index performance execution determination means determines that one or more start memories stored by the holding means include an index start memory for executing the index performance. Although it is determined whether or not it is included, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, it is determined in which one of the plurality of starting memories the index performance is executed. It is characterized in that it is configured so as not to

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, although it is determined whether or not the index starting memory is included, any one of the plurality of starting memories is determined. Since it is not judged whether or not the index performance is executed in the starting memory, the performance effect can be enhanced without increasing the control load. The reason why it is not determined in which starting memory among the plurality of starting memories the index performance is executed is that even if the plurality of starting memories includes the index starting memory, the performance pre-determining means determines. This is because the execution timing is re-determined.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the effect mode determination means stores a specific start mode in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode in one or more start memories stored by the holding means. When a memory (reach or big hit) is included, it is characterized in that it is configured to determine the performance mode for the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed. .

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), interest can be suppressed. That is, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), even if variable display is performed in a specific manner, In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed (for example, character subtraction processing is performed) after that, the performance mode will not be performed. The player's interest is reduced. In this respect, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the specific starting memory Decreased interest because the performance mode is determined for the starting memory until the variable display of is performed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory that is variably displayed after the specific starting memory can be suppressed.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 6]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. Display means for performing variable display (for example, liquid crystal display device 16) and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as start memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a certain number and the variable display of one starting memory stored by the holding means are performed, the next starting memory of the one starting memory is displayed. Display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) for controlling to perform a variable effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol using the effect time until the variable display is performed; A special game state execution means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game state after the special game is executed Advantageous state control means capable of controlling over a different period each time an advantageous state (for example, a short-time game state or a high-probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state. The number of executions of the index effect (character subtraction effect) and the execution timing for executing the index effect in which variable display in the advantageous game state are at least information related to the game state of the advantageous game state (for example, Information on whether it is a high probability gaming state) and the period controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, the number of times of time reduction), the effect pre-determining means that determines before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state ( For example, scenario pre-setting processing (Fig. 136)) and the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means (for example, step S324, etc.), and an effect mode capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous game state. determining means (for example, step S372, etc.); The second indicator effect (for example, the reduction of allied characters , the effect pre-determining means determines execution timings of each of the first index effect and the second index effect, and the effect mode determining means determines the execution timing of the first index effect and the second index effect. The one or more starting memories stored by the means include a first index starting memory for executing the first index performance and/or a second index starting memory for executing the second index performance. index effect execution determination means (for example, step S338) for determining whether or not the first index activation memory and/or the second index activation memory is stored in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means; When it is determined by the index effect execution determination means that the memory is included, the number of executions determined by the pattern effect execution number determination means is replaced with the execution timing determined by the effect pre-determination means. Effect redetermining means (for example, step S358, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, as index effects having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state, a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation and an expectation relatively lower than the first index effect A second index effect having degrees is prepared. Although the first index effect and the second index effect are both executed in the variable display in the advantageous game state, the execution timing of the first index effect and/or the second index effect is different from the advantageous game state. is determined before being controlled by Therefore, even if the data volume is large, there is enough time before the first index effect and/or the second index effect is performed, so smooth processing can be performed. However, before the advantageous game state is controlled, the starting memory for the first index effect and/or the second index effect has not yet been suspended. It is not always possible to perform the first index effect and/or the second index effect at the execution timing determined before being controlled to the game state. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in the one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the first index effect and/or the second index effect is set. , one or a plurality of starting memories. As a result, even if the data volume is large, the index rendering can be performed through smooth processing. It is preferable that the re-determination of the execution timing of the first index effect and/or the second index effect is performed by maintaining the execution order of the first index effect and/or the second index effect determined by the effect pre-determining means. .

Moreover, since the execution number of one or a plurality of symbol effects is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means, even though the display is variable for one starting memory, it appears to be a plurality of starting memories. It looks as if a variable display is being performed for the display, and the production effect can be enhanced. Further, since the determined execution number of symbol effects is divided into predetermined units and the first index effect and/or the second index effect is executed in one of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units, further effects are performed. It is possible to enhance the effect.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the index effect execution determination means stores the first index start memory and/or the first index effect execution memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the reserve means. Although it is determined whether or not the 2-index starting memory is included, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, in which one of the plurality of starting memories the first index effect or and/and is configured not to determine whether or not the second index effect is to be executed, and the first index start memory and the second index start memory are stored in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. The execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined when both of the memory is included.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether or not the first index starting memory and/or the second index starting memory are included. However, since it is not determined in which of the plurality of starting memories the first index performance and/or the second index performance is executed, the performance effect is enhanced without increasing the control load. be able to. The reason why it is not determined in which of the plurality of starting memories the first index effect and/or the second index effect is executed is that the first index memory and/or the second index effect is not determined in the plurality of starting memories. This is because the execution timing determined by the effect predetermining means is re-determined even if the memory is included. However, when both the first index start memory and the second index start memory are included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect I try to make judgments about This is because the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect determined by the effect pre-determining means is maintained when the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are re-determined. is.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means may select a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) among one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. is included, the performance mode for the starting memory is determined until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), interest can be suppressed. That is, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), even if variable display is performed in a specific manner, In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed (for example, character subtraction processing is performed) after that, the performance mode will not be performed. The player's interest is reduced. In this respect, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the specific starting memory Decreased interest because the performance mode is determined for the starting memory until the variable display of is performed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory that is variably displayed after the specific starting memory can be suppressed.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 7]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. Display means for performing variable display (for example, liquid crystal display device 16) and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as start memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a number (for example, four) and one starting memory stored by the holding means are displayed, the one starting memory is displayed. Display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) for controlling so that the variable effect and stop effect of the identification pattern are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory is performed; a special game state execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result of is a specific result; Advantageous state control means (for example, step S171, etc.) capable of controlling the subsequent game state to an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state. The performance mode determination means divides the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means into predetermined units, and the symbols divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Specific effect determination means (for example, sub CPU 201) that determines the effect mode to be performed during execution of the effect, timing determination means (for example, Scenario pre-setting processing (FIG. 136, step S370, etc.), and one or more starting memories stored by the holding means include a specific starting memory in which a specific effect (for example, reach variation) is executed; Execution timing of the specific effect and execution timing of the index effect and are not overlapped, the specific effect out of the total number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) determined for each of the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means By subtracting the number of executions of the symbol performance for which the index performance is performed from the number of executions of the symbol performance until the performance is performed, prior to the specific performance, a suggestive performance (prediction of ready-to-win) suggesting that the specific performance will be performed is executed. It is characterized by having suggestive effect execution determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining the number of possible symbol effects.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, the data capacity is large. Even if this is the case, it is possible to perform smooth processing. Moreover, since the execution number of one or a plurality of symbol effects is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, even though the display is variable for one start memory, it may appear that there are multiple starts. It looks as if a variable display for memory is being performed, and can enhance the presentation effect. Further, the number of executions of the determined pattern performance is divided into predetermined units, and a performance mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units is determined. It is possible to perform smooth processing.

Further, although the specific starting memory is included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the specific performance relating to the specific starting memory and the execution timing of the index performance do not overlap. In this case, the number of executed symbol effects is subtracted from the total number of executed symbol effects until the specific effect is executed, and the number of symbol effects capable of executing suggestive effects (prediction of reach) is determined. Therefore, it is possible to determine the execution timing of any of the specific effect, the index effect, and the suggestive effect before the variable display is started, so that smooth processing can be performed. Moreover, since the index effect and the suggestive effect can be executed at suitable timing, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the suggestive effect execution determining means may include the specific starting memory in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, When the execution timing and the execution timing of the index performance overlap, execution of the symbol performance (for example, provisional variation) determined for each of the one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. The number obtained by subtracting 1 from the execution number of the symbol performance in which the index performance is performed is subtracted from the total number of numbers, and the number of symbol performances capable of executing the suggestive performance (prediction of ready-to-win) performed prior to the specific performance is determined. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect overlap, the index effect is executed while the specific effect is being executed. Since the specific performance and the index performance are overlapped from the flow of the suggestive performance, the performance effect can be enhanced.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The suspension performance control means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the suspension means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 8]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (for example, random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; A special game execution means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed on the means, and an effect executed in a game state after the special game is executed. , a first index effect with a relatively high degree of expectation (for example, a subtraction effect for an enemy character) and a second index effect with a relatively lower degree of expectation than the first index effect (for example, a (subtraction effect) is prepared, and index effect timing determining means (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 136), step S370, etc.) for determining the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect. and determines whether or not a specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner and the first index effect and/or the second index effect are performed in the same variable display. duplication determination means (for example, step S346, etc.), and production mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the production mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means, When it is determined that the specific effect and the first index effect are performed in the same variable display, the effect mode determining means determines that the first index effect is to be performed in the variable display in which the specific effect is performed. A first effect mode determining means (for example, step S350) to determine, and a variable display in which the specific effect is performed when it is determined that the specific effect and the second index effect are performed in the same variable display. a second effect mode determination means for determining not to perform the second index effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, as index effects having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state, a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation and an expectation relatively lower than the first index effect are provided. A second index effect having degrees is prepared. Also, it is determined whether or not the first index effect and/or the second index effect is executed when a specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) is being performed. Here, when the index effect executed when the specific effect is performed is the first index effect, the specific effect and the first index effect are performed in the same variable display. On the other hand, when the index effect executed when the specific effect is performed is the second index effect, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. That is, if the first index effect is performed during execution of the variable display performed in a specific manner, both effects can give the player a relatively high sense of expectation. An index presentation is performed. On the other hand, even if the second index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have expectations for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of anticipation. Therefore, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. In this way, the presentation effect is enhanced appropriately.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times. It should be noted that the "stop effect" of the identification pattern is the stop effect of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. A symbol performance execution number determination means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number, and the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means are divided into predetermined units, and the unit of the start memory is divided into predetermined units. irrespective of the specific effect determination means (for example, sub CPU 201) that determines the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, and the effect mode determination means determines the specific It is characterized by having suggestive effect execution determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining the number of symbol effects capable of executing suggestive effect (prediction of ready-to-win) suggesting that the specific effect is performed prior to effect.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the suggestive effect (ready-to-win sign) that suggests that the specific effect will be performed is executed prior to the specific effect, the effect of the game can be further enhanced.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The suspension performance control means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the suspension means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 9]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects can enhance the effects of effects, the amount of data such as video data is large. I don't like it.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs win/lose determination (for example, big win determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification based on the result of the win/lose determination. Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display of patterns and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining patterns, etc.) are stored at start-up. and a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) as a starting memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific starting memory. determines whether or not to execute a first effect (for example, a black effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation with respect to the result of the hit/loss determination for the starting memory, and also for the specific starting memory. A first effect execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) for determining whether or not to execute the effect, and a effect different from the first effect, out of the start memory stored by the holding means , a second effect (for example, a movable character object effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the win/loss determination for the specific starting memory stored last is displayed on all the starting memories stored by the holding means. a second effect execution determining means (for example, step S205) for determining whether or not to execute the first effect for the specific starting memory; a second effect non-execution determining means for changing not to execute the second effect for the specific starting memory when it is determined that the performance is to be executed for the specific starting memory. Characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if it is determined to execute the second effect for the specific start memory, it is determined not to execute the first effect for the specific start memory. Since the second performance is changed so as not to be executed for a specific starting memory when the player is playing, there is no need to perform meaningless performance, and not only is the decrease in interest suppressed, but also the performance is effectively performed. becomes possible. That is, even if it is determined to execute the second effect for the specific starting memory, if it is determined not to execute the first effect for the specific starting memory, the specific starting memory will not be executed. Expectations are not so high. Therefore, even if it is determined that the second performance is to be executed for a specific starting memory, execution of meaningless performance is omitted by making a change so that the second performance is not executed, It is designed to produce an effective performance.

It should be noted that "executing the first effect (second effect) for the starting memory" means executing the first effect (second effect) that changes the pending effect image itself indicating that the starting memory is stored. executing, executing a first effect (second effect) on a pending effect image indicating that the starting memory is stored, and executing a first effect (second effect) when a variable display about the starting memory is being performed 2nd effect) is included.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a winning/losing result for a starting memory other than the specific starting memory with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific starting memory. Further comprising a third effect confirmation means (for example, step S205 etc.) for confirming whether or not execution of a third effect having a predetermined degree of expectation is determined in response to the determination result, and executing the first effect. The determination means, when it is determined to execute the third effect for the previous start memory stored by the reserve means prior to the specific start memory, the specific start memory and the previous start. It is characterized by determining whether or not to execute the first effect for the starting memory between the memories.

According to the gaming machine (2) above, without determining whether or not to execute the first effect for the starting memory for which it is determined that the third effect is to be executed, the specific starting memory and the previous Since the first performance is executed for the starting memory between the starting memories, effective performance can be performed without increasing the control load uselessly.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

[Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects can enhance the effects of effects, the amount of data such as video data is large. I don't like it.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs win/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification symbols based on the result of the win/lose determination. Display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 16) in which the variable display is performed, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (e.g., random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are used as starting memories. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four), and winning/losing for a specific starting memory that is last reserved among the starting memories that are reserved by the retaining means. A first effect (for example, a countdown effect) capable of suggesting the result of determination is continued from the variable display of the starting memory stored prior to the specific starting memory to the variable display of the specific starting memory. First effect execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) for determining whether or not to execute, and at least when the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed, the result of win-lose determination for the specific starting memory A second effect execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) for determining whether or not to execute a second effect (for example, a movable character object effect) that suggests and wherein the first effect executed from the variable display of the starting memory stored prior to the specific starting memory continues until the variable display of the specific starting memory. When the result of the win/lose determination for the specific starting memory is determined to be a win or is highly likely to be a hit, the execution continues until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed. If not, it is determined that the result of the win-lose determination for the specific starting memory is a failure or there is a high possibility that it is a failure, and the specific starting memory is displayed until the variable display. When it is determined not to continue to execute the first effect, and when it is determined to execute the second effect in the variable display for the specific starting memory, the variable display for the specific starting memory. is further provided with second effect non-execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) for changing not to execute the second effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is determined that the first effect is not to be continuously executed until the variable display of the fixed start memory is performed, and the second effect is executed in the variable display of the specific start memory. When it is decided to perform, the variable display for the specific starting memory is changed so as not to execute the second performance, so that meaningless performance is not required, and not only is the decrease in interest suppressed, It is possible to perform effectively. That is, if the first effect is not continuously executed until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed, it is confirmed that the result of the win/lose determination for the specific starting memory is a loss or there is a high possibility that the result is a loss. . Even in such a case, if the second effect is performed in the variable display for a specific starting memory, not only will the effect be meaningless, but there is a risk that interest will be reduced. Therefore, even if it is determined that the second performance is to be executed in the variable display for the specific starting memory, by changing the second performance so as not to be executed, the execution of the meaningless performance is omitted and the effect is achieved. It was designed to create a dramatic performance.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

[Appendix 11]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs win/loss determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that displays a predetermined effect image. and a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of executing control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol and capable of executing control related to the expected effect image based on the result of the hit/loss determination, and a predetermined effect a sound output control means (e.g., a sound control circuit 205) for controlling output of sound, wherein the display control means has a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the win/lose determination. As an effect, a specific effect control means (for example, step S903) for controlling to display the expected effect image without displaying the variable effect of the identification symbol, and a game without displaying the variable effect of the identification symbol information image display control means (for example, step S905) for controlling display of an information image related to the machine on the display means; is not displayed, a muffling means (for example, step S904) that does not output a variation sound related to the variation effect of the identification pattern, and when the variation effect of the identification pattern is not displayed by the information image display control means, the identification pattern It is characterized by having fluctuating sound control means (for example, step S906) for outputting fluctuating sound related to the fluctuating effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without making the player feel uncomfortable, and to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the decrease in interest. The information image related to the game machine corresponds to, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or hall attendant regardless of the result of the win-lose determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is committed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the information image display control means cuts off power while the identification symbol variation effect is being displayed as the information image related to the gaming machine, and then restores power. 165(C)) is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the recovery image after the power failure, even if the recovery image is displayed and the identification symbol variation effect cannot be visually recognized, it can be grasped that the identification symbol variation effect is being performed. .

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 12]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention performs a variable display of identification symbols when a predetermined starting condition is established, and display means (for example, a liquid crystal display) that displays the results of win-lose judgments when the identification symbols stop. device 16), an operation means (effect button 62) operable by the player, and a lottery for execution of a specific effect based on the result of the hit/loss determination based on the operation of the operation means within a predetermined period. , a first effect execution means (FIG. 162 (B)) for executing the specific effect based on the execution lottery, and performing the execution lottery for the specific effect based on the elapse of a predetermined time, and based on the execution lottery second effect executing means (Fig. 162(C)) for executing the specific effect, and the first effect executing means executes the specific effect when the operating means is not operated within the predetermined period of time. The second effect execution means does not execute the specific effect when the specific effect is executed by the first effect execution means within the same variable display, while the operation means is operated within the predetermined period. The specific effect is executed when the specific effect is not executed by the first effect executing means due to no operation.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the operation means is not operated, the specific notification mode is not executed, and when the specific notification mode is executed, the specific notification mode is further executed. It will never be executed. On the other hand, if the specific notification mode has not yet been performed, the specific notification mode may be performed. As a result, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without discomfort, and to perform processing smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 13]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed. For example, up to four variable display patterns are reserved as starting memory, and the variable display is performed one starting memory at a time.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the result of the game is displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that there is a possibility that a special game will be played, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the starting memory unit, if the display effect is not such that the special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the user may lose his sense of expectation for the variable display of the pattern, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (for example, random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by means, the variable performance and stop of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. a display control means for controlling a performance to be performed; and the execution number of symbol performances (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation performance and the stop performance are performed for the start memory stored by the holding means. can be determined (for example, step S324, etc.), and a specific start memory (for example, a start in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded) in one or more start memories stored by the holding means memory) is included, an effect mode determining means (for example, step S332, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed. When a plurality of the specific starting memories stored by the holding means include a plurality of the specific starting memories, the effect mode determining means selects the first variable display among the plurality of specific starting memories. Determining the performance mode for the starting memory until the variable display of the earliest specific starting memory to be performed is performed, and the starting memory until the variable display of the earliest specific starting memory is performed , the execution number of the symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory It is characterized by having specific effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining the effect mode (for example, character subtraction effect) to be performed during execution of the symbol effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, when the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), variable display is performed in a specific manner. In spite of this, when the result of the win-lose determination is a failure, even if there is a production mode that gives the player a high sense of expectation (for example, a character subtraction process is carried out) after that, such a production is performed. The player's interest in the aspect is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the starting memory is the first among the plurality of specific starting memories. A performance mode is determined for the starting memory up to the earliest specified starting memory variably displayed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, further comprising suspension effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling so that an image relating to starting memory stored in the suspension means is displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. and

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display in the starting memory unit. can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When there is no starting memory, the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. Although is not the specific starting memory, the production mode (for example, fake reach sign production) that suggests that the identification pattern variation production is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation production) is determined. A suggestive effect determination means (for example, step S366, etc.) is provided, and the suggestive effect determine means performs the variable effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode when the start memory is not stored by the reserve means. It is characterized in that it is configured so as not to be determined to a production mode that suggests.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is not included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is not a specific start memory, but the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect. Moreover, when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means, since the performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation performance is performed in a specific mode is not decided, the increase of the control load is also suppressed. .

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 14]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a gaming machine in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed. For example, up to four variable display patterns are reserved as starting memory, and the variable display is performed one starting memory at a time.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the result of the game is displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that there is a possibility that a special game will be played, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the starting memory unit, if the display effect is not such that the special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the user may lose his sense of expectation for the variable display of the pattern, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for judging big hits and patterns determination random number, etc.) can be stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four) as start memory (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.); When the variable display is performed, display control means for performing control so that the variation performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. (for example, the sub CPU 201), and symbols capable of determining the number of executions of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.); effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means; The performance mode determination means divides the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means into predetermined units with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means, and the starting memory Specific effect determination means for determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of When the starting memory (for example, the starting memory in which the reach fluctuation performance is recorded) is not included, the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means and stored by the holding means. A performance mode for the last stored starting memory among the starting memories is a performance suggesting that the identification pattern variation performance is performed in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It is characterized by having suggestive effect determination means (eg, step S356, etc.) for deciding on a mode (eg, fake ready-to-win portent effect).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It can be difficult to let go. Therefore, in this case, the presentation mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the last one is stored (the variable display is performed at the end) among the starting memories stored by the holding means. By determining a performance mode for a starting memory to a performance mode suggesting that a variable performance of an identification pattern is performed in a specific mode even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory, the player can respond to the display performance. to maintain the expectations of

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which a game ball can win, and the identification pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed is further provided, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) determines that the game ball has won the starting hole. The starting memory can be reserved based on the starting memory stored in the holding means, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball wins the starting hole. is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. is.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by the movable body performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 15]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachislot machines are known that perform hit/lose determination and execute games that are advantageous to the player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, before the result of hit/lose determination is displayed, a movable body presentation is performed to activate the movable body in order to make the player expect that the result of hit/lose determination is advantageous to the player. There are things that make it possible to raise

As such a movable body production, for example, a technique is known in which the movable body is moved by the expansion/contraction motion of the pantograph, and the movable body is tilted at the same time when the expansion/contraction motion of the pantograph starts (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582). reference).

However, in the game machine of Patent Document 1, for example, when the operation of the movable body is started, multiple operations of the movable body, such as movement and tilting of the movable body, can be grasped, and there is a limit to enhancing the performance effect. There was a fear that interest would decline.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to enhance the presentation effect by the presentation of a movable body, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (for example, random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by means, the variable performance and stop of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. a display control means for controlling a performance to be performed; and the execution number of symbol performances (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation performance and the stop performance are performed for the start memory stored by the holding means. (for example, step S324, etc.), and effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.), and the effect mode determination means includes a specific start memory (for example, a start memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded) among one or more start memories stored by the reserve means. when not set, the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time; In determining, the symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and regardless of the unit of the start memory, it is divided into the predetermined units. specific effect determination means for determining the effect mode (e.g., character subtraction effect) to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect, and the effect mode for the last stored starting memory among the starting memories stored by the holding means. , Suggestion performance to decide on a performance mode (for example, fake ready-to-win premonition performance) suggesting that the variation performance of the identification pattern is performed in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It is characterized by having a determining means (for example, step S356).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), the player's expectation for the display performance is maintained. may become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time, and of the starting memories stored by the holding means, the last stored (last variable display) is performed) is determined to be a presentation mode suggesting that the variation presentation of the identification pattern is performed in a specific mode even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory. To maintain a player's sense of expectation for performance.

In addition, the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time. In order not to easily grasp that the variable display is not performed (even if the performance mode suggesting that the variable display of the identification pattern is performed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggestive performance mode is false) It is for

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which a game ball can win, and the identification pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variation pattern determining means (for example, step S57, etc.) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed, wherein the holding means stores the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole. is configured to be able to hold the symbol effect execution number determination means, when a game ball wins in the start port, the execution number of the symbol effect for the starting memory stored in the holding means, It is characterized in that the determination is made based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. is.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by the movable body performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 16]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (for example, random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; Special game execution means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game (for example, big win game state) advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed on the means; Index effect timing determining means (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 136), etc.) for determining in advance the execution timing of an index effect (subtraction effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state as the effect to be executed in the game state. and effect mode determining means (for example, step S374) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the retaining means; and one or more starting memories stored by the retaining means. Effect information determining means ( For example, step S346, etc.), wherein when the index start memory is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding unit, the effect mode determination means sets the index effect to Effect re-determining means (for example, step S372) for determining execution in the variable display related to one of the one or more starting memories instead of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determining means. etc.), and the effect re-determining means receives the effect information indicating that the specific starting memory and the index starting memory are included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. When determined by the determination means, regardless of the execution timing determined by the index performance timing determination means, it can be determined that the index performance for the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display for the specific start memory. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timing of the index performance is determined in advance, even if the data volume of the index performance is large, there is a margin of time before the index performance is performed. processing can be performed. Further, when the specific starting memory and the index starting memory are included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the specific starting memory and the index starting memory are included regardless of the execution timing determined by the index performance timing determining means. Since it is determined so that the index performance for the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display for the start memory, the performance effect can also be enhanced. That is, when an index effect is performed during the execution of a variable display performed in a specific manner, if the degree of expectation for such an index effect is relatively low, the player will not be able to display the variable display. It is difficult to have expectations. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of anticipation. Therefore, when a specific starting memory and an index starting memory are included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the index effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific starting memory. By doing so, the performance effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the performance mode determining means includes the specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. It is characterized in that it is configured to determine the mode of presentation for the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed when the specific starting memory is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), A decrease in interest can be suppressed. That is, when the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), variable display is performed in a specific manner. In spite of this, when the result of the win-lose determination is a failure, even if there is a production mode that gives the player a high sense of expectation (for example, a character subtraction process is carried out) after that, such a production is performed. The player's interest in the aspect is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (2) above, when a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the specific starting memory Since the effect mode for the starting memory is determined until the variable display of is performed, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 17]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (for example, random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; A special game executing means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed on the means, and a starting memory stored by the holding means. , a symbol effect execution number determination means (e.g., step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed, and the special game As effects to be executed in the game state after the is executed, a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation (for example, a subtraction effect for the enemy character) and an expectation relatively lower than the first index effect index effect timing determining means ( For example, scenario pre-setting processing (FIG. 136)), and when a specific effect (for example, a reach variation effect) is performed in which the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode, the first index effect and/or the Duplication judgment means (for example, step S346) for judging whether or not the second index effect is to be performed; etc.), wherein the effect mode determination means determines the effect mode for the one or more starting memories to be determined by the pattern effect execution number determination means. a specific performance determining means for dividing the symbol performance of the number of executions into predetermined units and determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory; When it is determined by the duplication determining means that the second index performance is performed when the specific performance is performed, it is determined that the second index performance is performed in the pattern performance before the specific performance is performed. By doing so, the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed. It is characterized by having means for re-determining index effect timing (for example, step S358, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined in advance. Also, since there is time to spare before the first index effect and/or the second index effect is performed, smooth processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the second index effect will be performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in the pattern effect before the specific effect is performed. Since the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed by being determined, the effect of the effect can also be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during execution of the variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have expectations for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of anticipation. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced by performing the second index performance in the symbol performance before the specific performance is performed.

If the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy characters are completely destroyed) before the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the allied characters are completely destroyed), an advantageous state is reached. (For example, it has a function of notifying that it is in a high probability game state). Further, when the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before allied characters are annihilated) before the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy characters are annihilated), the It has a function of notifying that it is in a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, low probability gaming state).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the index effect timing determination means determines execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect during execution of the special game, The performance mode determination means determines the performance mode of the starting memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed in a game state after the special game is executed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined during execution of the special game, it is possible to perform the processing more smoothly.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The suspension performance control means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the suspension means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 18]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (for example, random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; special game executing means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) when a specific result is displayed on the means; Symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324 etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the fluctuation effect and stop effect are performed, and the game after the special game is executed As effects to be executed in the state (for example, time-saving game state), a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation (for example, a subtraction effect for the enemy character) and an expectation relatively lower than the first index effect index effect timing determination means for preparing at least a second index effect (for example, a subtraction effect of a teammate character) having a certain degree, and predetermining execution timings of each of the first index effect and the second index effect; , determining whether or not the first index effect and/or the second index effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) is performed in which the identification pattern is varied in a specific manner. and a performance mode determination means (eg, step S372) capable of determining a performance mode for the starting memory stored by the holding means, wherein the performance mode determination is provided. means, in determining the effect mode for the one or more starting memories that are subject to determination of the effect mode, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means in a predetermined unit; Separately, a specific effect determination means (for example, step S372 etc.) for determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory, and the specific effect is performed. determining that the second index effect is to be performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed when the duplication determining means determines that the second index effect is to be performed when the second index effect is performed, An index performance that prevents the second index performance from being performed when the specific performance is performed An exit timing redetermining means (for example, step S358, etc.) is provided, and when the duplication determination means determines that the first index effect is to be performed when the specific effect is performed, the specific effect is performed. It is characterized in that it is configured such that the first index effect is sometimes performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined in advance. Also, since there is time to spare before the first index effect and/or the second index effect is performed, smooth processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the second index effect will be performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in the pattern effect before the specific effect is performed. Since the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed by being determined, the effect of the effect can also be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during execution of the variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have expectations for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of anticipation. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced by performing the second index performance in the symbol performance before the specific performance is performed.

If the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy characters are completely destroyed) before the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the allied characters are completely destroyed), an advantageous state is reached. (For example, it has a function of notifying that it is in a high probability game state). Further, when the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before allied characters are annihilated) before the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy characters are annihilated), the It has a function of notifying that it is in a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, low probability gaming state).

Further, when it is determined that the first index performance is performed when the specific performance is performed, the first index performance is performed when the specific performance is performed. This is because when the first index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, the player is highly likely to have expectations for the variable display. This is because the presentation effect can be enhanced by any of the variable displays.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the index effect timing determination means determines execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect during execution of the special game, The performance mode determination means determines the performance mode of the starting memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed in a game state after the special game is executed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined during execution of the special game, it is possible to perform the processing more smoothly.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. characterized by

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 19]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information (for example, random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; A special game executing means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed on the means, and a starting memory stored by the holding means. , a symbol effect execution number determination means (e.g., step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed, and the special game index effect determining means (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 136)) for determining in advance the execution timing of an index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state as the effect to be executed in the game state after the execution of and a duplicate judgment means (for example, step S346) for judging whether or not the index effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) is performed in which the identification pattern is variably displayed in a specific manner. etc.), and an effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory stored by the holding means, wherein the effect mode determination means determines the effect mode. In determining the effect mode for the one or more starting memories, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the unit of the starting memory Regardless, the specific effect determination means for determining the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, and the duplication determination means that the index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed. , the execution number of symbol effects obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index effect from the total number of executions of the symbol effects determined for the one or more starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined. It is characterized by having a suggestive performance execution determining means for determining execution of a suggestive performance suggesting that the specific performance will be performed, prior to the specific performance, only when there exists.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timing of the index performance is determined in advance, even if the data volume of the index performance is large, there is a margin of time before the index performance is performed. processing can be performed. Also, when it is determined that the index effect will not be performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the pattern effect determined for one or a plurality of start memories to be determined for the effect mode Only when the number of executions of the symbol performance is obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index performance from the total number of executions (that is, only when it is greater than 0), the suggestive performance suggesting that the specific performance will be performed. Since it is executed prior to the production, it is possible to carry out an effective production such that a specific production is expected by the suggestive production while performing smooth processing.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the suggestive effect execution determining means determines whether the specific effect (for example, reach variation) is executed in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. each of the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means when it is determined by the duplication determination means that the index performance will be performed when the specific performance is performed Subtract the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of executions of the symbol performance in which the index performance is performed from the total number of executions of the symbol performance (for example, temporary fluctuation) determined for the above, and performed prior to the specific performance. It is characterized by determining the number of symbol effects capable of executing the suggestive effect (prediction of ready-to-win).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the duplication determination means determines that the index performance is to be performed when the specific performance is performed, the suggestive performance is performed at an appropriate timing prior to the specific performance. As a result, a more effective production can be performed.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The suspension performance control means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the suspension means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 20]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that displays a predetermined effect image, and display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204), and a sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) for controlling to output a predetermined effect sound, and the sound output control means systematically controls the effect tone color using a plurality of channels. In accordance with the change in the mode of the effect image displayed on the display means, the effect timbre output from the channel is changed, while the channel of the system of the identification pattern is fixed. In addition, the output sound from the channel of the system of the identification pattern is muted in accordance with the aspect of the variation performance of the identification pattern.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without making the player feel uncomfortable, and to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the decrease in interest. The information image related to the game machine corresponds to, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or hall attendant regardless of the result of the win-lose determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is committed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

It should be noted that the present invention can also employ the following configuration as an effect that can give the player a feeling of anticipation for the result of the win-lose determination, for example. That is, the gaming machine is configured to be capable of progressing a game by receiving power supply, and includes lottery means for performing win/loss determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, display means for displaying a predetermined effect image, A display control means capable of executing control related to the variable performance of the identification pattern as a main performance and executing control related to other performances as a secondary performance, a speaker for outputting a performance sound, and displayed by the display means and a sound output control means for controlling so that a production sound that matches the production image is output from the speaker, and the display control means provides a production having a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the hit/loss determination, A specific effect control means for executing the control for the character effect as a main effect and the control for the variation effect of the identification pattern as a secondary effect, and the control for the variation effect of the identification symbol being executed as a main effect. As an effect when the supply of the power supply is stopped and the supply of the power is restored after that, the control of the variation effect of the identification pattern is executed as a secondary effect, but the power supply is restored. It has a return performance control means for controlling so that the performance image is mainly displayed, and the sound output control means starts the variable performance of the identification pattern when the variation performance of the identification pattern is not displayed by the specific performance control means. The game machine has a variable sound output control means which does not output a variable sound but outputs a variable sound for the variable performance of the identification pattern when the variable performance of the identification pattern is not displayed by the return performance control means. Even in such a gaming machine, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest. The main effect is the effect on the side that is the subject of the effect and is the side where the player's gaze is directed. It is a performance on the side that is difficult to face.

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 21]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817 1, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that outputs a warning sound when a predetermined error occurs, and includes lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs win-lose determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition. Then, a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that displays a predetermined effect image and control of the variation effect of the identification pattern can be executed, and control of the expected effect image based on the result of the hit/loss determination is possible. a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of executing, a speaker (for example, a speaker 24) for outputting an effect sound, and an effect image displayed by the display means including the warning sound A sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) that controls so that the combined effect sound is output from the speaker, and the sound output control means has a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the win-lose determination. a specific output control means (for example, step S904) that, when a specific effect having It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without making the player feel uncomfortable, and to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the decrease in interest. The information image related to the game machine corresponds to, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or hall attendant regardless of the result of the win-lose determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is committed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a plurality of channels are capable of outputting effect tones according to the system, and the effect tones output from the channels are output in accordance with the effect images displayed on the display means. A changeable shared channel, a warning system channel, and an identification pattern system channel are provided, and the specific output control means changes the effect tone color through the shared channel according to the effect image displayed on the display means. When the specific performance is executed, the state of the warning system channel is maintained, and the output from the identification pattern system channel is muted.

The gaming machine of (2) above is a more specific representation of (1) above, omitting unnecessary processing without giving the player a feeling of discomfort, and smoothly processing while suppressing a decrease in interest. It is possible to do

ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to process smoothly, suppressing the decline of interest.

[Appendix 22]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of expectation for the variable display of the patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) for controlling the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol until the variable display of the identification symbol is performed, and the identification symbol for each variable display Symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the execution number of symbol effects in which variable effects and stop effects are performed, and effect mode determination capable of determining effect modes for a plurality of variable displays means (for example, step S372, etc.), and the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units, and divides the symbol effect into predetermined units. It is characterized by having specific effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the divided symbol effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for each variable display. That is, originally, one symbol effect is performed for each variable display, but since the execution number of one or more symbol effects is determined for each start memory, one variable display Although it is a single game), it looks as if a plurality of variable displays (a plurality of games) are being performed. Moreover, each symbol effect is divided into predetermined units regardless of the game unit. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display for each game, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

The term "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one game. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the effect mode determining means determines one or a plurality of variable displays as a effect section, and includes the effect mode as a section effect to be performed in the effect period. A performance mode for the variable display is determined, and the symbol performance of the execution number determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units for the variable display included in the performance section. and section performance mode determination means for determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units irrespective of the units of the variable display.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution number of symbol effects is determined for a plurality of variable displays included in the effect section, it is possible to further prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display for each game. can be

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the effect mode determination means includes part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for one variable display included in the effect interval, and A part of the pattern effect of the number of executions determined for other variable displays included in the variable display can be divided as a predetermined unit across a plurality of variable displays. .

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, a part of the symbol performance determined for one variable display included in the performance section and a plurality of patterns determined for the other variable displays included in the performance section It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display for each game, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in units of win-lose determination, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 23]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of expectation for the variable display of the patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display performance in units of win-lose determination, and to preferably suppress the decrease in interest. .

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (for example, random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) for controlling so that the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed using and a stop effect (for example, provisional variation) execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions, and one or more start memories stored by the holding means When a specific starting memory (reach or big hit) is included in the, a performance mode determining means ( For example, step S372, etc.), wherein the performance mode determining means determines the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means for the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed. a specific effect determination means for dividing the symbol effect into predetermined units and determining a effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory, The specific effect determining means, in determining the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern effect divided into the predetermined units, stores the start memory stored prior to the specific start memory and the specific start memory. Although it is possible to determine a performance mode straddling the above, it is configured not to determine a performance mode straddling the specific start memory and a start memory stored after the specific start memory.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, when the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), variable display is performed in a specific manner. In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if there is a performance mode that can give the player a high sense of expectation (for example, a character subtraction process is performed) after that, The player's interest in the mode of presentation is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the starting memory is the first among the plurality of specific starting memories. A performance mode is determined for the starting memory up to the earliest specified starting memory variably displayed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, in determining the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into predetermined units, the performance mode that straddles the start memory stored prior to the specific start memory and the specific start memory is determined. I can. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. On the other hand, it is arranged not to determine an effect mode extending over a specific starting memory and a starting memory stored later than the specific starting memory. As a result, the player's gaze can be directed to the variation performance of the identification pattern performed in a specific mode rather than the performance mode performed during the execution of the pattern performance, and the player can expect the variation performance. can be done.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above, further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, wherein the holding effect control The means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display in the starting memory unit. can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When there is no starting memory, the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. suggesting effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining a effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol variation effect is to be performed in a specific mode even though the is not the specific starting memory. and

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is not included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is not a specific start memory, but the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in units of hit/lose determination.

[Appendix 24]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of expectation for the variable display of the patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in units of winning/losing determination, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for the first start memory, the variation performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A display control means for controlling, and a pattern effect capable of determining the execution number of pattern effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. an execution number determination means stage (for example, step S324, etc.); and an effect mode determination means stage (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means; and, when the specific starting memory is not included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the retaining means, the effect mode determining means determines all the starting memories stored by the retaining means. , and in determining the effect mode for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is specified. (regardless of the units of the starting memory) and determines a performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units (regardless of the units of the starting memory).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

By the way, when the starting memory memorized by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), the starting memory stored by the holding means Since the burden on control is less than when a specific starting memory is included in the holding means, and it is possible to determine the performance mode for more starting memories as targets, all the starting memories stored by the holding means He is trying to determine the mode of presentation.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A variation pattern for determining a variation pattern when the variable display of the identification pattern is performed based on a starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which the game ball can win and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. determining means (for example, step S173, etc.); Determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) determines the number of executions of the symbol effect for the starting memory stored in the holding means when the game ball wins the starting hole, determined by the variation pattern determining means. It is characterized by determining based on a variation pattern.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. It is characterized by

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in units of hit/lose determination.

[Appendix 25]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of expectation for the variable display of the patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in units of winning/losing determination, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for the first start memory, the variation performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) to control, and execution of a symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number, and effect mode determining means (for example, Step S372, etc.), wherein the performance mode determination means determines that a specific start memory (for example, a start memory in which reach fluctuation performance is recorded) is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means. When not included, a performance mode (for example, character subtraction performance) is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and a performance is made for all the starting memories stored by the holding means. In determining the mode, the symbol performance of the execution number determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units, and the performance mode performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units is determined. A specific effect determination means for determining and a performance mode for the last stored starting memory among the starting memories stored by the holding means, even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory, the specific mode. It is characterized by having suggestion effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining a effect mode (for example, fake ready-to-win portent effect) suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol will be performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), the player's expectation for the display performance is maintained. can become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the rendering mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the rendering mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. The player's expectation for the display performance is maintained by determining the performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation performance is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific starting memory. ing.

In addition, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), even if variable display is performed in a specific manner In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed (for example, character subtraction processing is performed) after that, the performance mode will not be performed. The player's interest is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the starting memory is the first among the plurality of specific starting memories. A performance mode is determined for the starting memory up to the earliest specified starting memory variably displayed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which a game ball can win, and the identification pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed is further provided, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) determines that the game ball has won the starting hole. The starting memory can be reserved based on the starting memory stored in the holding means, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball wins the starting hole. is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. It is something to do.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in units of hit/lose determination.

[Appendix 26]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of expectation for the variable display of the patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in units of winning/losing determination, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for the first start memory, the variation performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A display control means for controlling, and a pattern effect capable of determining the execution number of pattern effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.); and effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means; wherein, when the specific starting memory is not included in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the rendering mode determining means determines the number of starting memories for which the rendering mode is to be determined. , effect object number determination means for determining a different number each time, and in determining the effect mode for the starting memory to be the determination target of the effect mode, the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means. Specific performance determination means for dividing the symbol performance into predetermined units and determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units; Suggestion to determine the effect mode for the starting memory stored in to the effect mode suggesting that the variation performance of the identification pattern is performed in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It is characterized by having an effect determination means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), the player's expectation for the display performance is maintained. can become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time, and the effect mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means. is determined to be an effect mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory, thereby maintaining the player's expectation for the display effect. I'm trying to be

The reason why the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time is that the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is varied and the identification pattern is displayed in a specific manner. (Even if a performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern is displayed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggesting performance mode is false) is not easily grasped. Because.

In addition, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), even if variable display is performed in a specific manner In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed (for example, character subtraction processing is performed) after that, the performance mode will not be performed. The player's interest is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the starting memory is the first among the plurality of specific starting memories. A performance mode is determined for the starting memory up to the earliest specified starting memory variably displayed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the effect target number determining means determines the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined by lottery.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is determined by lottery, the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that controls so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. ), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. It is.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in units of hit/lose determination.

[Appendix 27]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls the game state after the special game ends to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving game state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). 122447).

However, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player apart from the special game, if the period of control to the specific game state is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win-lose determination cannot help but be reduced. Interest may decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably perform a specific game state which is performed separately from a special game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine that can be used, and a lottery promotion control means that can execute control (for example, a time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state; A probability changing means that can set a high probability (for example, a high probability game state) compared to the state, and a secret effect that does not explicitly indicate whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is set to the high probability (for example, , secrecy A stage 2002), and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed can be stored as starting memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display of one starting memory stored by the holding means are performed, the variable display of the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (e.g., display control circuit 204) for controlling the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect using the effect time until the effect is performed, and at least control for promoting the hit/loss determination are executed. In the game state, a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 etc.), and an effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, wherein the effect mode determination means The symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units, and the performance is performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. A specific effect determining means for determining a mode is provided, and the specific effect determining means determines the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is the high probability when the secret effect is being executed. As shown, the effect mode (example For example, it is characterized by determining the character's subtraction effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least in the game state in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the win-lose determination can be moderate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend the period during which the control for promoting the winning/losing determination is executed. Moreover, when the concealment performance is executed, the performance performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-described presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. becomes.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, further comprising suspension effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling so that an image relating to starting memory stored in the suspension means is displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. and

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol performance is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Coupled with this, the degree of progress since the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the number of times the starting memory was digested during the execution of the control to promote the win-lose determination (the game that was executed number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the win-lose judgment is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment can be shortened. It is possible to make the player less conscious of it.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the presentation mode determining means stores the variable display in a specific mode in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When the specific starting memory to be performed is not included, the effect mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the last stored starting memory is stored by the holding means. Suggestive effect determination means (for example, , step S358, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is not included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effects. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is not a specific start memory, but the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by the movable body performance and suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 28]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls the game state after the special game ends to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving game state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). 122447).

However, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player apart from the special game, if the period of control to the specific game state is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win-lose determination cannot help but be reduced. Interest may decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably perform a specific game state which is performed separately from a special game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine that can be used, and a lottery promotion control means that can execute control (for example, a time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state; A probability changing means that can set a high probability (for example, a high probability game state) compared to the state, and a secret effect that does not explicitly indicate whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is set to the high probability (for example, , secrecy A stage 2002), and retention means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), and when the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, presentation time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls so that the identification pattern variation effect and stop effect are performed using, and a game state in which at least the control to promote the hit/loss determination is executed (for example, time saving In the game state), the execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) for determining the number of executions of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed for the start memory stored by the holding means. means (e.g., step S324, etc.); and effect mode determination means (e.g., step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means; The performance mode determination means divides the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means into predetermined units, and determines the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. It has specific effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining the effect mode to be performed during execution, and the specific effect determination means, when the specific start memory is stored by the holding means, performs the specific effect. Effect straddling the starting memory stored before the starting memory and the specific starting memory Although the mode can be determined, it is configured not to determine a performance mode that straddles the specific starting memory and the starting memory stored later than the specific starting memory, and when the secret performance is being executed. , as a degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is set to the high probability, the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units is determined. . .

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least in the game state in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the win-lose determination can be moderate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since a display effect can be executed that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, the period during which the control for promoting win/lose determination is executed can be made difficult for the player to comprehend. Moreover, when the concealment performance is executed, the performance performed during execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-described presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. becomes.

Also, in determining the performance mode to be performed during execution of the pattern performance divided into predetermined units, it is stored (variably displayed earlier) than a specific start memory (for example, reach fluctuation performance). It is possible to determine an effect mode that straddles the starting memory and the specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. On the other hand, it is arranged not to determine an effect mode that straddles a specific starting memory and a starting memory that is stored (later variably displayed) after the specific starting memory. As a result, the player's gaze can be directed to the variation performance of the identification pattern performed in a specific mode rather than the performance mode performed during the execution of the pattern performance, and the player can expect the variation performance. can be done. Here, the ``specific starting memory'' corresponds to a starting memory that performs a variable display that gives the player a sense of expectation that the result of the win-lose determination is a specific result, such as reach fluctuation. do.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above further includes holding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol performance is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Coupled with this, the degree of progress since the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the number of times the starting memory was digested during the execution of the control to promote the win-lose determination (the game that was executed number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the win-lose judgment is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment can be shortened. It is possible to make the player less conscious of it.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When there is no starting memory, the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. suggestive effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining the effect mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation effect is to be performed in a specific mode even though the is not the specific starting memory. It is.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is not included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is not a specific start memory, but the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect.

According to the present invention, since the specific game state performed separately from the special game can be preferably performed, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 29]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls the game state after the special game ends to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving game state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). 122447).

However, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player apart from the special game, if the period of control to the specific game state is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win-lose determination cannot help but be reduced. Interest may decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably perform a specific game state which is performed separately from a special game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine that can be used, and a lottery promotion control means that can execute control (for example, a time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state; A probability changing means that can set a high probability (for example, a high probability game state) compared to the state, and a secret effect that does not explicitly indicate whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is set to the high probability (for example, , secrecy A stage 2002), and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed can be stored as starting memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display of one starting memory stored by the holding means are performed, the variable display of the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect using the effect time until the effect is performed, and at least the control for promoting the hit/loss determination are executed. In the game state, symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324 etc.) for determining the number of symbol effects to be executed in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. ), and an effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, wherein the effect mode determination means includes the When a specific starting memory is not included in the starting memory stored by the retaining means, the mode of performance is determined for all the starting memories stored by the retaining means and stored by the retaining means. In determining a performance mode for all starting memories, the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units, and the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units is determined. A feature that determines the effect mode (for example, character subtraction effect) that is performed during execution A gaming machine characterized by having fixed effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least in the game state in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the win-lose determination can be moderate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend the period during which the control for promoting the winning/losing determination is executed. Moreover, when the concealment performance is executed, the performance performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-described presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. becomes.

By the way, when the starting memory memorized by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), the starting memory stored by the holding means Since the burden on control is less than when a specific starting memory is included in the holding means, and it is possible to determine the performance mode for more starting memories as targets, all the starting memories stored by the holding means He is trying to determine the mode of presentation.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which a game ball can win, and the identification pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed is further provided, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) determines that the game ball has won the starting hole. The starting memory can be reserved based on the starting memory stored in the holding means, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball wins the starting hole. is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory. As a result, it is possible to make it even more difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol presentation is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Coupled with this, the degree of progress since the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the number of times the starting memory was digested during the execution of the control to promote the win-lose determination (the game that was executed number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the win-lose judgment is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment can be shortened. It is possible to make the player less conscious of it.

According to the present invention, the specific game state performed separately from the special game can be preferably performed, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 30]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls the game state after the special game ends to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving game state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). 122447).

However, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player apart from the special game, if the period of control to the specific game state is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win-lose determination cannot help but be reduced. Interest may decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably perform a specific game state which is performed separately from a special game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The game machine according to the present invention is
Lottery means (e.g., step S117, etc.) that performs hit/lose determination (e.g., big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means (e.g., liquid crystal and a display device 16), and is capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result, which is a normal game. Lottery promotion control means capable of executing control (for example, time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to the state, and the probability of winning in the win-lose determination is higher than the normal game state (e.g., high probability a game state), and a concealment capable of executing a concealment performance (for example, concealment A stage 2002) that does not explicitly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the win/loss determination is the high probability. Effect execution means (for example, step S205) and holding means (for example, steps S54 and S55) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start memory. etc.), and when the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, the identification is performed using the effect time until the next starting memory of the one starting memory is displayed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling so that a pattern variation effect and a stop effect are performed, and at least the game state in which the control for promoting the hit/loss determination is executed. Symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324 etc.) for determining the number of symbol effects to be executed in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed for the start memory, and the one stored by the holding means. Alternatively, an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for a plurality of starting memories, wherein the effect mode determining means is one or more starting stored by the holding means. When a specific starting memory is not included in the memory, a performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and for all the starting memories stored by the holding means. In determining the performance mode, the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units, and divided into the predetermined units (regardless of the unit of the start memory). A production mode that is performed during the execution of the pattern production (for example, character reduction and a performance mode for the last stored starting memory among the starting memories stored by the holding means, even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It is characterized by having suggestive effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining to a effect mode (for example, fake ready-to-win portent effect) suggesting that the identification pattern variation effect will be performed in the specific mode. .

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least in the game state in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the win-lose determination can be moderate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, the degree of progress after the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the control to promote the win-lose determination is It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period of execution. Moreover, when the concealment performance is executed, the performance performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-described presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. becomes.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It can be difficult to let go. Therefore, in this case, the rendering mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the rendering mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. The player's expectation for the display performance is maintained by determining the performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation performance is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific starting memory. ing.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a variation pattern when the variable display of the identification pattern is performed based on a start opening in which a game ball can win and the winning of the game ball in the start opening. and a variation pattern determining means (for example, step S173, etc.) for determining the holding means is configured to be able to hold the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole, The symbol effect execution number determining means determines the execution number of the symbol effect for the starting memory stored in the holding means when the game ball wins in the starting hole, the variation determined by the variation pattern determining means. It is characterized by making decisions based on patterns.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory. As a result, it is possible to make it even more difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol presentation is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Combined with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the win-lose determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the win-lose judgment is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment can be shortened. It is possible to make the player less conscious of it.

According to the present invention, the specific game state performed separately from the special game can be preferably performed, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 31]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls the game state after the special game ends to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving game state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). 122447).

However, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player apart from the special game, if the period of control to the specific game state is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win-lose determination cannot help but be reduced. Interest may decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably perform a specific game state which is performed separately from a special game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine that can be used, and a lottery promotion control means that can execute control (for example, a time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state; A probability changing means that can set a high probability (for example, a high probability game state) compared to the state, and a secret effect that does not explicitly indicate whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is set to the high probability (for example, , secrecy A stage 2002), and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed can be stored as starting memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display of one starting memory stored by the holding means are performed, the variable display of the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect using the effect time until the effect is performed, and at least the control for promoting the hit/loss determination are executed. In the game state, symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324 etc.) for determining the number of symbol effects to be executed in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. ), and an effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, wherein the effect mode determination means includes the When one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means do not include a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) in which the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode, the holding means stores. number-of-effects determining means for determining a performance mode for a different number of starting memories out of the starting memories to be processed; The pattern effect of the execution number determined by the effect execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units. (regardless of the units of the start memory) to determine a performance mode (for example, character subtraction performance) to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined unit; The performance mode for the last stored starting memory among the number of starting memories suggests that the identification pattern variation performance is performed in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It is characterized by having a suggestive effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining the effect mode (for example, fake ready-to-win portent effect).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in a game state in which at least the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the win-lose determination can be moderate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, the degree of progress after the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the control to promote the win-lose determination is It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period of execution. Moreover, when the concealment performance is executed, the performance performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-described presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. becomes.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It can be difficult to let go. Therefore, in this case, the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time, and the effect mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means. is determined to be an effect mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory, thereby maintaining the player's expectation for the display effect. I'm trying to be

The reason why the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time is that the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is varied and the identification pattern is displayed in a specific manner. (Even if a performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern is displayed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggesting performance mode is false) is not easily grasped. Because.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the effect target number determining means determines the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined by lottery.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is determined by lottery, the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. It is characterized by

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the present invention, the specific game state performed separately from the special game can be preferably performed, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 32]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the special game is finished is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, and whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is a high probability is kept secret, and is determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played is completed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not the probability is high in the specific game state perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state.

However, in a gaming machine in which the specific game state ends when a predetermined number of games are played, the player can easily know the end timing of the specific game state simply by grasping the number of games that have been played. put away. As the end timing of the specific game state approaches, even if an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the high probability is performed, the expectation of the high probability fades, and there is a risk that interest will decline. .

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to make it difficult to grasp the end timing of the specific game state and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. a game machine capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state until the win-lose determination is performed a predetermined number of times; Probability changing means capable of making the probability of winning in win-lose determination higher than a normal game state (e.g., high-probability game state) at least while the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed; a concealment effect executing means (for example, step S205, etc.) capable of executing a concealment effect (for example, concealment A stage 2002) in which whether or not the winning probability in the win/loss determination is set to the high probability is not specified; holding means (e.g., step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of information about the variable display that has not been set as start memory; and one start stored by the holding means. When the variable display is performed for the memory, control is performed so that the variation performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (for example, sub CPU 201) and in a game state in which at least the control for promoting the win/loss determination is executed, the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect for the starting memory stored by the holding means. A pattern effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) for determining the number of executions of the symbol effect to be performed, and one or more start memories stored by the holding means. and a performance mode determination means (for example, step S372), wherein the performance mode determination means divides the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means into predetermined units, and the starting It is characterized by having specific effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of storage.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least in the game state in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, even if the end timing of the period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed is predetermined, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the execution period.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, the degree of progress after the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the control to promote the win-lose determination is It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period of execution. Moreover, when the concealment performance is executed, the performance performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness toward the above-described presentation mode rather than the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, thereby further suppressing the decline in interest. becomes.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling an image related to start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means, the holding effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol performance is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Combined with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the win-lose determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the index performance that makes it possible to guess the degree of expectation that the probability of winning in the win-lose judgment is high, and the end timing of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment can be further improved. It is possible to make it even more difficult for the player to grasp.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the effect mode determining means selects one of the plurality of starting memories. A part of the pattern performance of the number of executions determined for the starting memory and a part of the pattern performance of the number of executions determined for the other starting memory are divided as a predetermined unit straddling a plurality of starting memories. and, regardless of the unit of the starting memory, it has a specific effect mode determination means (for example, step S372 etc.) capable of determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units. do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine an effect mode across a plurality of starting memories without being bound by the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of starting memory, thereby making it even more difficult for the player to comprehend the end timing of the control that promotes the winning/losing determination.

According to the present invention, by making it difficult to grasp the end timing of the specific game state, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 33]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the special game is finished is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, and whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is a high probability is kept secret, and is determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played is completed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not the probability is high in the specific game state perform a high-probability suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state.

However, in a game machine that conceals whether or not the probability is high in a specific game state and that a high probability indication effect is performed that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state, the high probability When not, the performance with a low degree of expectation is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific game state is immeasurable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to make the display effect performed in the specific game state more interesting, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs win/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a fixed condition, and identification symbol selection based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine capable of executing a lottery promotion control means (for example, step S171 etc.) capable of executing control (for example, time-saving game state) that promotes the winning/losing determination compared to a normal game state for a predetermined period; a probability changing means capable of making the winning probability in the win/lose determination higher than a normal game state (for example, a high probability game state) at least while the control for promoting the win/lose determination is being executed; A concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) is provided in which a display performance that does not indicate whether or not the winning probability in the win-lose determination is set to the high probability is provided, and during the concealment period, the win-lose determination in the win-lose determination is provided. An index effect executing means (for example, step S370, etc.) capable of executing an index effect that gives a sense of expectation that the probability is the high probability, and a scenario of the index effect performed as an overall effect during the concealment period, a scenario determining means (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 136)) that is determined in advance before the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, and the scenario determining means controls for promoting the win-lose determination; is terminated, the scenario of the index performance is determined so as to clearly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is set to the high probability.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the scenario of the index effect that is performed as the overall effect during the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the win/loss determination is executed, the indicator is displayed in accordance with the concealment period. It is possible to progress the production scenario. In other words, if it is determined whether the index performance is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player before the concealment period ends, the player may lose interest. In this respect, according to the present invention, it is possible to maintain the interest in the index performance until the concealment period ends, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start memory; Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.), and an effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, wherein the performance mode determination The means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into predetermined units with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means, and divides the symbol effect into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. It has specific effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into units of .

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the retaining means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, "variable display" means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern for one starting memory to the stop display, and the variation of the identification pattern for one starting memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeated multiple times, the number of times of variable display is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201), and the holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is being displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol presentation is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Combined with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the win-lose determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the index performance that can give a sense of anticipation that the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is high.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific game state interesting, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 34]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the special game is finished is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, and whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is a high probability is kept secret, and is determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played is completed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not the probability is high in the specific game state perform a high-probability suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state.

However, in a game machine that conceals whether or not the probability is high in a specific game state and that a high probability indication effect is performed that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state, the high probability When not, the performance with a low degree of expectation is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific game state is immeasurable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to make the display effect performed in the specific game state more interesting, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. a holding means (for example, steps S54, S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. A display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) that controls to be played, and a lottery promotion control means that can execute the control (for example, time-saving game state) that promotes the winning/losing determination compared to the normal game state for a predetermined period , a probability changing means capable of making the winning probability in the win-lose determination higher than a normal game state (for example, a high-probability game state) at least while the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed; Then, a concealment period is provided in which a display effect that does not indicate whether or not the winning probability in the win-lose determination is set to the high probability is provided, and during the concealment period, the winning probability in the win-lose determination is the high probability. An index effect execution means (for example, step S370, etc.) capable of executing an index effect that can give a sense of expectation, and a control that promotes the hit/loss determination with a scenario of the index effect that is performed as an overall effect during the concealment period. is executed, the scenario determining means (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 136)) determined in advance, and the identification pattern for the starting memory stored by the holding means at least during the concealment period and a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) for determining the number of executions of symbol effects in which the variable effect and the stop effect are performed, wherein the index effect execution means is determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means. The symbol performance of the determined number of executions is divided into predetermined units, and the index performance is performed as a performance performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Having a special effect determination means to determine In addition, the scenario determining means determines the scenario of the indicator effect so that, when the control for promoting the win/lose determination is completed, it is clearly indicated whether or not the winning probability in the win/lose determination is set to the high probability. It is characterized by determining.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least during the concealment period, execution of a symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. number is determined. That is, originally, the symbol performance is performed once for each starting memory stored by the holding means, but at least during the concealment period, one or more times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the execution number of the pattern presentation is determined, even though the variable display is for one start memory, it looks as if the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period. Furthermore, since the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory, it is even more difficult to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

Also, as a performance to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units, an index performance capable of giving a sense of expectation that the probability of winning in the winning/losing determination is high is determined. This indicator effect is determined in advance before the control for promoting the win-lose judgment is executed for the scenario performed as the overall effect during the concealment period, and when the control for promoting the win-lose judgment ends, the win-lose judgment in the win-lose judgment Whether or not the probability is high probability is clearly indicated.

In this way, an index effect is performed that gives the player a sense of expectation that the probability of winning in the win/lose determination is high, while not making the player aware of the end timing of the concealment period and thus the end timing of the control that promotes the win/lose determination. At the same time, when the control for promoting the win/lose determination ends, whether or not the winning probability in the win/lose determination is high is indicated by an index effect. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines that disclose whether or not the probability of winning in the win-lose judgment is high when the concealment period has passed for a certain period of time, the timing of the end of the concealment period and the end of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment It is possible to execute an effect such that whether or not the probability of winning in winning/losing determination is high or not is clearly indicated by the outcome of the index performance without making the player aware of the timing. For example, if the index effect is a game effect between an ally and an enemy, it is possible to realize a high-probability definite effect when the ally wins.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above further includes holding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. do.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol performance is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Combined with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the win-lose determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed). As a result, the player can be interested in the index performance that can give a sense of anticipation that the probability of winning in the win-lose judgment is high, and the probability of winning in the win-lose judgment increases according to the outcome of the index performance. It is possible to give the impression to the player that whether or not there is is disclosed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, when a plurality of starting memories are stored by the holding means, the special effect determining means selects one of the plurality of starting memories. A part of the pattern performance of the number of executions determined for the starting memory and a part of the pattern performance of the number of executions determined for the other starting memory are divided as a predetermined unit straddling a plurality of starting memories. and, regardless of the unit of the starting memory, it has a specific effect mode determination means (for example, step S372 etc.) capable of determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units. do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine an effect mode across a plurality of starting memories without being bound by the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and makes it even more difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period and the end timing of the control that promotes the winning/losing determination. be able to.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific game state interesting, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 35]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the special game is finished is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, and whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is a high probability is kept secret, and is determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played is completed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not the probability is high in the specific game state perform a high-probability suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state.

However, in a game machine that conceals whether or not the probability is high in a specific game state and that a high probability indication effect is performed that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state, the high probability When not, the performance with a low degree of expectation is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific game state is immeasurable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to make the display effect performed in the specific game state more interesting, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs a hit/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine capable of increasing the winning probability in the winning/losing determination, and a lottery promotion control means capable of executing control for promoting the winning/losing determination compared to a normal gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) for a predetermined period. probability changing means capable of setting a higher probability (e.g., high-probability game state) compared to a normal game state at least while the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed; and winning probability in the win-lose determination. A concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) is provided in which a display effect that does not indicate whether is set to the high probability is provided, and during the concealment period, the winning probability in the win-lose determination is the high probability. An index effect executing means capable of executing an index effect (for example, a subtraction effect of a character) that makes it possible to guess whether or not the player is a player, and a scenario of the index effect performed as an overall effect during the concealment period promotes the hit/loss determination. scenario determination means for determining in advance before control is executed, wherein the lottery promotion control means selects one of a plurality of periods so that the period for executing the control for promoting the win-lose determination is different each time. (for example, step S172), and the scenario determining means terminates the control for promoting the win/loss determination according to the period determined by the promotion period determining means. When doing so, the scenario of the index effect is determined so as to clearly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is the high probability.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the scenario of the index performance performed as the overall performance during the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, and the win-lose determination is accelerated. When the control ends, it is clearly indicated whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is high. Here, the index effect is a effect that makes it possible to guess whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is the high probability. In addition, since the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is determined differently each time, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

In this way, an indicator effect is performed that makes the player guess whether the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is high or not, while not making the player aware of the ending timing of the concealment period and thus the ending timing of the control that promotes the winning/losing determination. At the same time, when the control for promoting the win/lose determination ends, whether or not the winning probability in the win/lose determination is high is indicated by an index effect. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines that disclose whether or not the probability of winning in the win-lose judgment is high when the concealment period has passed for a certain period of time, the timing of the end of the concealment period and the end of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment It is possible to execute an effect such that whether or not the probability of winning in winning/losing determination is high or not is clearly indicated by the outcome of the index performance without making the player aware of the timing. For example, if the index effect is a game effect between an ally and an enemy, it is possible to realize a high-probability definite effect when the ally wins.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start memory; Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means, and divides the symbol effect into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. It is characterized by having specific effect determination means (for example, step S370, etc.) for determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into units.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, "variable display" means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern for one starting memory to the stop display, and the variation of the identification pattern for one starting memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeated multiple times, the number of times of variable display is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

(3) The gaming machine according to (2) above, further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling an image related to start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, wherein the holding effect control The means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol presentation is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Combined with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the win-lose determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the index presentation that makes the player guess the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is high.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific game state interesting, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 36]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of expectation for the variable display of the patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably make the player not aware of the display effect in units of winning/losing determination, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means for the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information (for example, random number for judging a big hit, random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the effect time until the next starting memory of the one starting memory is displayed is variable. a display control means for controlling to perform a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification pattern using a display control means; Symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of effects (for example, temporary fluctuations), and one or more start memories among the start memories stored by the holding means as a effect section a performance mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for the start memory included in the performance section as the section performance to be performed in the performance section, wherein the performance mode The determination means determines whether or not the section performance is being executed, and when it is determined that the section performance is not being executed, determines the performance section again and determines the section performance to be performed in the performance section. It is characterized in that the section performance is repeated without interruption by determining the performance mode.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, one or a plurality of starting memories among the starting memories stored by the holding means are determined as the performance section. Since such section performance is repeatedly performed without interruption, the player is not made aware that it is the performance of the starting memory unit, and the expectation can be maintained for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the mode in which the above-mentioned section effect is "performed repeatedly without interruption" includes, of course, the mode in which it is performed without interruption as long as there is a withheld starting memory. Even if, for example, the demonstration effect is executed in the middle due to the lack of memory, if the section effect is executed when the starting memory is suspended after that, it is included in the above "repeatedly performed without interruption" . Also, when there are multiple starting ports (for example, when there are a first starting port 5442 and a second starting port 440), one of the starting ports (for example, the first starting port 5442) When a game ball enters Although the section effect is not performed in , when the game ball enters the other start port (for example, the second start port 440), the section effect is repeated without interruption.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the performance mode determination means performs the symbol performance for the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means for the starting memory included in the performance section. It is divided into predetermined units, and has section performance mode determination means (for example, sub CPU 201) that determines the performance mode performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. is.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the performance mode is determined regardless of the unit of the starting memory, it is possible to determine the performance mode across a plurality of starting memories. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and to provide a novel game that makes it difficult for the player to be aware of the game result for each starting memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the section effect mode determination means includes part of the symbol effects of the number of executions determined for one start memory included in the effect section, and the effect A portion of the symbol performance of the number of executions determined for other starting memories included in the section can be divided as a predetermined unit across a plurality of starting memories.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since the player can execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, the range of effects can be expanded, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Regarding the "expectation level" described in appendices 4 to 8, appendix 16 and appendix 19 above, the degree of expectation ( Reliability) is the probability that each notice effect will be executed and will be a "big hit" or a "high probability game state", It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probability of a predetermined internal state (that is, a disadvantageous state), such as the probability of “lose” or “low-probability gaming state” when each notice effect is executed. However, since the "expectation level" can include a case where the expectation level is 100% and a case where the expectation level is 0%, strictly speaking, there are cases where the above division does not hold (for example, the production is executed Since it can include the case where the game state or winning or losing is definitely notified when it is done, it is not suitable to divide 1 by 0. that would be the case).

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in units of win-lose determination, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest.

All the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments can be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines, and all other gaming machines without departing from the gist of the invention. can.

16 liquid crystal display 101 main CPU
104 Sub-SPU

Claims (1)

Lottery means for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
a holding means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information on special symbols as a starting memory,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery being a specific result,
a game state control means capable of controlling an advantageous game state different from the special game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
effect display means for performing a predetermined display effect;
an effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect capable of suggesting an expectation level related to the control of the advantageous gaming state;
holding image display control means capable of displaying a normal holding image as an image indicating that the starting memory is stored in the holding means;
scenario determination means capable of determining in advance the scenario of the suggestive effect before the advantageous game state is controlled;
with
The game state control means is
It is possible to control to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states with different periods of control to the advantageous game state,
The production execution means is
The suggestive effect can be executed based on a scenario determined in advance by the scenario determining means before being controlled to the advantageous game state, and when the advantageous game state is controlled, the advantageous game state is controlled. As an effect different from the suggested effect, it is possible to perform a fixed notification effect that clearly indicates when the advantageous game state ends,
When the effect display means can perform a variable display effect, and when a plurality of starting memories are stored by the holding means, the suggestive effect is performed for one starting memory out of the plurality of starting memories. and a variable display effect performed for the next starting memory of the one starting memory,
The holding image display control means is
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be controllable so that the normal pending image is not displayed at least when the effect mode of the suggestive effect is displayed.

Images